Q/7 \AO 
 IF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 IF CALIFORNIA 
 
 LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 z\\ . / 
 
 u. /VU1B. 
 
 * IP 
 
 u- \V$N 
 
 ^44<H 
 
 ^1^ 
 
 3'- 6= 
 
 - /v 
 
 F /^Zfl 
 
 s \w 
 
 IF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 =. z; /'>/ 
 ^ IP 
 
 u> V> 
 
 K 
 
jj"^; p. . \1. -/"-** ** "fc-.'S^ Jt' JO ^P* ^LX1*~ y-~v I /*-"*-" \ I X"*\ *^"^-*( " I *> O T^^ VJ^^v'^fl 
 
 *< 
 
 f CALIFORNIA LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 $^M i 
 
 %! 
 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 PRESENTED BY 
 
 PROF. CHARLES A. KOFOID AND 
 MRS. PRUDENCE W. KOFOID 
 
 NIA LIBRARY 
 
 OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY I 
 

 DIRECTIONS 
 
 FOR MAKINCJ 
 
 ANATOMICAL PREPARATIONS, 
 
 FORMED ON THE BASIS OF 
 
 POLE, MARJOLIN AND BRESCHET, 
 
 AND INCLUDING 
 
 THE NEW METHOD O MR. S WAN- 
 
 BY USHER PARSONS, M. D. 
 
 PROFESSOR OF ANATOMY AMD SURGERY. 
 
 
 
 CAREY & JLEA. 
 
 1831. 
 
EASTERN DISTRICT OF PENNSYLVANIA, To wit : 
 
 BE IT REMEMBERED, that on the twentieth day of June, Anno Dom- 
 ini one thousand eight hundred and thirty-one, 
 
 CAREY & LEA, 
 
 of the said district, have deposited in this office the title of a book, the title 
 of which is in the words following, to wit : 
 
 " Directions for making Anatomical Preparations, formed on the basis of 
 Pole, Marjolin, and Breschet, and including the new Method of Mr. Swan. 
 By USHER PARSOHS, M D. Professor of Anatomy and Surgery." 
 
 The right whereof they claim as proprietors, in conformity with an Act of Con- 
 gress, entitled, " An Act to amend the several Acts respecting Copy Rights." 
 
 D. CALDWELL, 
 Clerk of the District. 
 
 E. at Q. Merriam, Printers, Brook field, Masa. 
 
Bio 
 L i b vt 
 
 TO 
 
 WILLIAM E. HORNER, M. D 
 
 of 
 
 IN THE 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA, 
 
 THE FOLLOWING PAGES 
 
 ARE RESPECTFULLY INSCRIBED 
 
 BY 
 
 THE AUTHOR. 
 
 Imssee 
 
P R E F A C E. 
 
 THAT a minute knowledge of anatomy is essential to 
 success in the practice of physic and surgery, is an opinion 
 so generally prevalent, that the assertion of it at the pre- 
 sent day wears the air of a truism. Every student reads 
 the remark in his books, hears it from his lecturer, sees its 
 force in the clinical rounds of his instructor, and feels it 
 when he commences practice. And if the young practi- 
 tioner feels the want of anatomical knowledge when he 
 has recently left the dissecting table and the halls of de- 
 monstration, how much more sensible must he be of it, 
 after years have elapsed, without affording him an oppor- 
 tunity to refresh his memory by lectures or dissections. 
 To obviate this inconvenience, various modes have been 
 employed for preserving the different organs and textures, 
 in a humid or dry state, to which the practitioner may 
 refer as a substitute for recent dissection and demonstra- 
 tion ; with this aim in view, the art of making anatomical pre- 
 parations has been cultivated with great success and advan- 
 tage. 
 
 The art is of modern invention. Injecting and prepar- 
 ing of the blood vessels certainly could not have been 
 known prior to the discovery of the circulation of the 
 blood, nor have we any description of arterial preparations 
 until the time of Ruysch, a professor of anatomy who died 
 in 1731. His first anatomical museum was sold to Peter 
 the Great, in 1717, and many specimens belonging to it, 
 as well as a great number made subsequently, are still in a 
 
VI PREFACE. 
 
 good state of preservation. His manner of preparing wet 
 specimens, of injecting the blood vessels, and of preserv- 
 ing the flexibility of dried preparations, although he pro- 
 fessed to have disclosed it, is supposed to have perished 
 with him, since no one has yet succeeded in imitations 
 that can be compared with those made by himself. 
 
 Still however the common process for making and pre- 
 serving injected preparations bears the name of Ruysch, 
 and to this process many additions and improvements have 
 been made by Dumeril, Breschet, Hunter, Pole, Marjolin, 
 Charles Bell, Cloquet, Swan and some others, besides sev- 
 eral valuable treatises on the art of injecting the lympha- 
 tics, and numerous facts and observations, are contained in 
 periodical publications. The substance of the following 
 sheets, is principally drawn from the above writers, but 
 chiefly from Pole,* to which are added, such facts as I 
 could glean from some of the best practical anatomists of 
 this country, and such observations as I have been able to 
 collect during a year passed in the medical schools of 
 Europe, and several years devoted to practical anatomy in 
 this country. 
 
 That a work like the present is wanted, appears evident 
 from the fact, that several teachers of anatomy have con- 
 templated publishing an edition of Pole, notwithstanding 
 its numerous imperfections. I should however not have 
 commenced the present work, had that of Pole been in 
 circulation in this country. The few copies to be found 
 are imported, and I have several times been at pains to 
 order copies for my friends from London. 
 
 Such a work will, I am confident, be acceptable to 
 students from the country, as by following its directions, 
 they will be able to preserve the dissections made at medi- 
 cal schools, as memorials of their industry, and for refe- 
 
 * The sections copied from Pole are marked with an (*) 
 
PREFACE, 
 
 Vll 
 
 rence in their future practice. Even in cities, where sub- 
 jects are easily obtained and dissected, and where public 
 demonstrations are frequent, a student feels reluctant to 
 destroy a fine piece of dissection that has cost him long 
 protracted labour and pains to finish, although he may ex- 
 pect to derive but little advantage from its preservation ; 
 but in the country, where such specimens are the best, if 
 not the only means he can enjoy for refreshing his memory, 
 they possess a real and practical value ; for, with the 
 exception of Massachusetts, whose legislature has nobly 
 raised its voice in favour of practical anatomy, prejudice 
 and legal impediments it is to be feared will long exist 
 against its prosecution throughout the union, and especially 
 in our country towns. 
 
 f/ * * *" 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 SEASON FOR DISSECTING AND FOR MAKING DRY 
 PREPARATIONS. 
 
 THE extremes of heat and cold are unfavourable for 
 dissections and making preparations, heat being the season 
 for insects and rapid putrefaction, and* cold congeals the 
 subject, the subsequent thawing of which is attended with 
 loss of time, hastens decomposition, and always impairs the 
 beauty of the preparations. But the objections to mid- 
 winter are removed where the accommodations are such as 
 to moderate the intensity of cold. The late autumnal and 
 early spring months are, however, decidedly preferable for 
 long centinued dissections ; and it is well known to those 
 who are conversant with the business, that for preserving 
 subjects from decomposition, spring at the same tempera- 
 ture, is more favorable than autumn. These remarks 
 however, refer to preparations requiring long and patient 
 dissection ; for other kinds, as macerated and corroded, the 
 summer season may be even preferable. 
 
 DISEASES OCCASIONED BY DISSECTIONS. 
 
 Besides the diseases that may proceed from contagious 
 affections of dead bodies and which every anatomist will 
 know how to avoid, there are two pertaining to a dissecting 
 room that require some notice. One of them is derange- 
 ment of the stomach, sometimes attended with fever, and 
 which is probably occasioned by putrid inhalations, per- 
 haps by errors in diet and long exposure to cold, and is 
 more common to ardent beginners ; the other is exten- 
 sive and severe inflammation from slight wounds of the 
 fingers, and absorption of poison from the subject. 
 B 
 
X INTRODUCTION. 
 
 The former affection may be prevented, first, by proper 
 attention to diet, never visiting nor remaining in the dis- 
 secting room with an empty stomach ; by nutricious well 
 seasoned food and considerable exercise of the body in the 
 open air, and by obviating a costive habit. Secondly, by 
 attention to the air of the room both as respects temperature 
 and cleanliness. The large cavities of a subject when 
 cleared of their viscera may be sponged with clean water 
 and sprinkled with chlorate of lime and the room freely 
 ventilated When the emanations are very putrid and of- 
 fensive, they may be entirely removed by a fumigating mix- 
 ture like the following : 
 
 Black oxyde of manganese and common salt pulverised, 
 equal parts, by weight, to which add sulphuric acid, dilut- 
 ed with three parts of water in a leaden or earthen vessel. 
 Close the dissecting room, leaving the mixture in the centre 
 of it in the evening, and by morning, the putrid smell will 
 be entirely removed. 
 
 Attention should also be paid to cleanliness of person. 
 An apron with sleeves to it, made of shalloon, or brown 
 linen, may be worn, and when this is wanting, a suitable 
 coat to put on and off on entering and leaving the room 
 may be substituted. 
 
 When the symptoms of gastric disturbance which I have 
 mentioned appear, the dissection should be suspended, for 
 a day or two, and an active cathartic administered. 
 
 The other affection arising from wounds of the fingers 
 is of a more serious character. Chambar, Percy, Duncan, 
 and Shaw, have each written treatises of some length on 
 such wounds, from which I shall draw such facts as are 
 most material to be known. The effects of such wounds, 
 Mr. Duncan and Mr. Shaw, think, may be classed under 
 two heads, forming cases which differ essentially from each 
 other. The one is attended with immediate danger, and 
 is generally the consequence of examining a body a few 
 hours after death ; and proceeds with more certainty, from 
 dissection of the bodies of persons who have died with in- 
 flammation of some of the serous membranes. The other 
 
INTRODUCTION. Xi 
 
 cases are more frequent, and less dangerous, and they occur 
 more in common dissections, and particularly, in preparing 
 bones or ligaments after long maceration. The symptoms 
 attending this last kind of wound are the following : the 
 finger being scratched or pricked in the morning ; there is 
 not much pain at the time, but it gradually increases to- 
 wards evening ; a little uneasiness is felt in the axilla, and 
 next morning red lines can be perceived running up the 
 arm. The finger is now excessively painful ; there are 
 often slight rigors, and general uneasiness ; the counte- 
 nance is anxious, tongue sometimes furred, and head-ache ; 
 but there is not much fever. The finger then becomes 
 rapidly swollen and livid, so as to call for immediate atten- 
 tion, and the general system still more and more affected. 
 
 In respect to the first, or malignant kind, which is more 
 likely to occur from examining a body that has died from 
 peritonitis, in the form of hernia and puerperal fever ; or 
 from pleurisy, there will, in five or six hours after receiving 
 a scratch or puncture be a small pimple, or a blush of red, 
 If the case proceeds in the usual manner, there will pro- 
 bably be a darting pain up the arm, which seems to fix 
 more particularly in the shoulder or side of the chest. 
 Within fourteen hours, the patient is very ill ; he suffers 
 a great deal of pain, and is anxious and alarmed. Red 
 lines may generally be perceived running from the hand 
 towards the axilla, but it sometimes happens that there are 
 no marks on the arm, nor even on the finger. Indeed, the 
 affection of the finger is occasionally so slight, " that it is 
 neglected, and the patient refers all his suffering to the 
 shoulder and chest. Vessications often appear, and the 
 case may end in desquamation of the cuticle, or in suppu- 
 ration with extensive sloughing, and a discharge of fetid 
 matter, and in many instances, it proves fatal." 
 
 The local treatment of both kinds of the above mention- 
 ed wounds, should be the same, at the moment they are inflict- 
 ed. It consists in applying to the wound a drop of strong 
 mineral acid or of caustic ; the French prefer liquid muri- 
 ate of antimony. But after this has been neglected, and 
 
Xli INTRODUCTION. 
 
 absorption has taken place, indicated by pain, &c. such 
 applications will be of no avail, and may aggravate inflam- 
 mation. The best applications will then be of the soothing 
 kind. Mr. Shaw recommends lint soaked in equal parts 
 of Goulard's extract and laudanum, applied round the finger 
 and along the arm. Emolient cataplasms are also recom- 
 mended, but their weight gives pain and uneasiness. The 
 French recommend leeches to the part. 
 
 According to the same authors, the general treatment 
 should be active aperients, such as rhubarb and jalap, with 
 a little calomel, and to keep the patient at first almost in 
 a state of intoxication, by laudanum and porter. Bleeding, 
 although the pulse be much accelerated, he condemns. 
 
 Should any abrasion or sore previously exist on the fin- 
 gers of the dissector, the utmost care should be taken to 
 shield it from the contact of the dead body, by proper 
 dressing and a slip of bladder bound over it. 
 
 CHOICE OF SUBJECTS. 
 
 This must, of course, vary according to the kind of prep- 
 aration intended to be made. For a perfect skeleton, the 
 subject should be near, or a little passed, middle age, for 
 if younger, the bones are not so fully developed, and in old 
 age they contain oil, which is constantly appearing upon 
 their surface. For exhibiting osteogeny, choose the bones of 
 a foetus ; and for showing the vascularity of bones with 
 minute injection, the bones of a young child are prefera- 
 ble ; To make a preparation of the bones of the head sep- 
 arately, choose the bones of a young subject, before the 
 age of puberty, and for the ossicula? of the ear, a child 
 from birth to one or two years. The tympanum should 
 here be preserved on one side, and partially removed on 
 the other, taking care to preserve its centre, where the 
 maleus is attached. For exhibiting the labyrinth by filing 
 into the petrous portion, the temporal bone of an adult 
 will be best. For exhibiting the deciduous and permanent 
 teeth, choose the head of a child from five to eight years 
 old, and file away the alveolar covering of the front teeth; 
 
INTRODUCTION. Xlll 
 
 To dissect and study the muscles, choose a robust, full 
 grown subject that has died suddenly, and a male in pref- 
 erence to a female. For making dry preparations of the 
 muscles, take a subject of a strong muscular frame, 
 whose death was occasioned by a short, but not putrid dis- 
 ease. Great corpulency, as well as great leanness, and drop- 
 sical subjects, are for obvious reasons unsuitable. 
 
 For dissecting and studying the arteries and veins, 
 choose an adult that is neither very plethoric nor very 
 lean. For making a dry preparation of the blood-vessels of 
 an entire body, an emaciated subject, from two to fourteen 
 years is preferable, as being more easily dissected and dri- 
 ed, and more conveniently handled, and less likely to be- 
 come greasy after it is varnished : For a head or extremi- 
 ties, an adult not much beyond middle age, as after this 
 period there will be a constant issuing of fat upon the sur- 
 face, that will mar the beauty of the preparation ; but as 
 the veins are more developed in advanced age, such sub- 
 jects are best for shewing them upon the head. For minute 
 injection, a full grown foetus is best, and may at the same 
 time serve for exhibiting the foetal circulation, and for mak- 
 ing many handsome preparations, to be hereafter described. 
 
 For a wet or dry preparation of the cerebral nerves, 
 choose an adult emaciated subject, of almost any age ; 
 but for the whole nervous system, a small emaciated subject, 
 as it can be more conveniently preserved in spirit. 
 
 For the lymphatics choose a full grown dropsical subject. 
 
 SURGICAL OPERATIONS. 
 
 Whatever be the kind of subject that has fallen into the 
 hands of the student, and whatever may be his purpose as 
 to its final destination, he should first perform such little 
 operations upon it, as can be done without injuring it for 
 injecting, and which he may be desirous of performing with 
 dexterity upon the living body ; such as introducing the 
 catheter and probang ; passing a fine wire into the puncta 
 lachrymalia, and introducing a probe from the lachrymal 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 sack through the nasal duct ; pinching up the tunica con- 
 junctiva with a pair of small forceps and clipping it with 
 scissors, as is often required for severe opthalmia. After 
 the subject is injected, he may take up the various arteries, 
 as the carotid, subclavian, axillary, external iliac, and those 
 of the extremities. He may also operate for hare-lip, per- 
 form bronchotomy, &c. 
 
 ORDER OF EXAMINATION OF THE LARGE CAVITIES. 
 
 The tendency of the brain and other viscera of the large 
 cavities to rapid putrefaction, requires their early removal. 
 The brain mollifies so soon, that if the student intends 
 examining it minutely, or to make a wet preparation of it, 
 no time is to be lost by delaying the undertaking. 
 
 The next organs to be examined and removed, are, the 
 abdominal viscera, as their presence hastens decomposition. 
 For this purpose make a crucial incision from the sternum 
 to the pubis, and cross it with another near the umbilicus. 
 In this way the viscera are more easily examined and re- 
 moved, but the abdominal muscles are in some measure de- 
 stroyed for dissection. Such however is the intricacy of 
 this piece of dissection, that the student will hardly under- 
 take it at first ; and the parts most interesting to the surgi- 
 cal pupil, as the abdominal ring and surrounding ligaments, 
 are uninjured by it. The viscera are to be examined in 
 their natural situation, and then after passing a ligature 
 round the O3sophagus below the diaphragm, and round the 
 rectum, they are to be removed, by dividing the suspensory 
 ligament of the liver, turning it down from the diaphragm, 
 dividing the O3sophagus above the ligature, and raising the 
 stomach, spleen and pancreas, leaving the branches of the 
 cceliac and mesenteric arteries as long as practicable. The 
 viscera may be subsequently examined, and made into sep- 
 arate preparations, as hereafter directed. 
 
 The chest, it is presumed, has already been opened for the 
 purpose of injecting the subject, if not, proceed as direct- 
 ed for injecting the arteries, and remove such organs as are 
 intended not to be preserved in connexion with the walls of 
 the thorax. 
 
INTRODUCTION. XV 
 
 The contents of the pelvis are to be removed, by dissect- 
 ing the kidneys and passing them downward, or, by divid- 
 ing the ureters, and dissecting round the several organs 
 down to the sphincter ani. But if it is intended to preserve 
 these organs in connexion with the pelvis ; the rectum is to 
 be cleared and stuffed with curled hair, or oiled wool. 
 
 The subject may now be dissected entire, or it may be 
 divided among a class of four or five persons. 
 
 MUSCULAR DISSECTIONS. 
 
 Before he commences dissections, the student is presum- 
 ed to be well acquainted with the skeleton. He is to begin 
 his work by making an incision through the integuments, 
 down to the muscles of each limb, commencing it near the 
 trunk and extending it along in the direction of the large 
 muscles. The limb or part dissected should be so placed as 
 to keep the fibres of the muscles in a state of gentle exten- 
 sion. The integuments are to be raised from the muscles, 
 by drawing them aside, and laying the edge of the knife ob- 
 liquely upon and in direction of the fibres, in order that all 
 cellular substance may be removed without dividing them. 
 The knife may be held in the fingers like a pen, and moved 
 by them, rather than with the wrist or arm. After removing 
 the integuments over muscles, all the cellular substance 
 between them is to be dissected out, taking care not to 
 divide the large nerves or blood-vessels, or such of their 
 branches as are interesting in surgery. When the superfi- 
 cial layer of muscles is fairly cleared of adipose substance, 
 they may be raised or turned aside with hooks, or divided in 
 the middle and turned back, for the purpose of exposing 
 the deep-seated ones for dissection. The integuments are 
 to be raised from the muscles no farther at a time than is 
 necessary for the present dissection, and should afterwards 
 be replaced upon the part, to keep it from drying and 
 to protect it from dust ; and in warm weather the whole 
 should be covered during the interim of dissection with a wet 
 cloth, to keep it cool by evaporation. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 It should be the object of the student to examine tlie 
 muscles separately and in classes, according to their respec- 
 tive offices ; to study their situation and direction with 
 respect to the arteries and nerves, and other parts that are 
 concerned in surgery. If not intended to be preserved, the 
 muscles may after full dissection be removed, and the liga- 
 ments and structure of the joints examined, before the 
 bones are immersed for maceration. 
 
 The student will hardly find it advantageous to make dry 
 preparations of the muscles alone. They require as much 
 attention, and are attended with as great expense, as when 
 prepared with the blood-vessels, and unless he adopts the 
 method of Mr. Swan hereafter described they will change 
 in colour and size so much by drying, as to represent a 
 recent dissection less satisfactorily than good plates. 
 
 COMPARATIVE VALUE OF COLD AND WARM INJECTION. 
 
 The comparative value of the two kinds of injection de- 
 pends somewhat upon the kind of preparation intended to 
 be made. For corroded preparations the cold injection is 
 entirely unsuitable. For wet preparations it is immaterial 
 which kind is used, excepting that the warm kind is attend- 
 ed with loss of time and expense. For common dissec- 
 tions, the cold injection is in most respects preferable, not only 
 on account of the trouble and expense saved in heating the 
 subject, and its not heating and crisping the aorta to the risk 
 of its strength, but also for its withstanding the greatest heat 
 of summer, when the warm kind is apt to liquify and ooze out 
 from the orifices of divided branches. There is, however, a 
 greater smoothness of the vessels that have been filled with the 
 warm kind, which is pleasing to the eye of an anatomist. In 
 respect to fineness, they will, either of them, if properly con- 
 ducted, answer every purpose for surgical reference, 
 though beyond this, I have found the cold injection succeed 
 better than the warm, especially for filling vessels of the hol- 
 low organs, and of the membranes of the large cavities. 
 Therefore as respects utility and convenience I should, 
 except for corroded preparations, prefer the cold injection. 
 

 CONTENTS. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 ON MAKING DRY PREPARATIONS OF THE BLOOD 
 VESSELS. 
 
 SECTION L 
 
 Page 
 Different kinds of injection. _ ....... 1 
 
 SECTION II. 
 Formulae for coarse injections. ' . 2 
 
 SECTION III. 
 Formulae for fine cold injection. - - -4 
 
 SECTION IV. 
 Formulae for cold minute injection. - 4 
 
 SECTION V. 
 Of warm injections. 5 
 
 SECTION VI. 
 Formulas for coarse warm injection. - -7 
 
 SECTION VII. 
 Formulae for fine injection. - . 9 
 
 SECTION VIII. 
 Fomulae for minute warm injection. - 10 
 
 SECTION IX. 
 Swan's plaster of Paris injection. - 12 
 
 SECTION X. 
 Injecting instruments and manner of u^iig them. - 14 
 
 SECTION XI. 
 Directions for using the injecting syringe. - - 15 
 
 SECTION XII. 
 Valves of the arteries and veins. - - - 18 
 
 SECTION XIII. 
 
 Injecting, dissecting and preparing an entire subject to exhibit the arteries and 
 veins by cold injection. . - - 19 
 
 SECTION XIV. 
 
 Injecting, dissecting and preparing an entire subject, to exhibit the arteries and 
 veins by warm injection. ... 24 
 
 C 
 
xviii CONTENTS. 
 
 Page 
 
 SECTION XV. 
 
 Injecting and preparing the blood-vessels of separate portions of the human 
 body. ..... 30 
 
 SECTION XVL 
 Injecting and preparing the head for the blood-vessels. 31 
 
 SECTION XVII. 
 Injecting the extremities for tracing and preserving the blood-vessels. 34 
 
 SECTION XVIII. 
 
 Injecting and preparing the blood-vessels of an upper extremity in connex- 
 ion with one side of the head and thorax. - 36 
 
 SECTION XIX. 
 
 Injecting and preparing the heart in situ with the adjacent vessels and tho- 
 racic duct. ... 39 
 
 SECTION XX. 
 
 Injecting the arteries and veins of the hands and feet with coloured injection 
 for dissection or corrosion. 41 
 
 SECTION. XXL 
 Injecting and preparing the heart. ... 42 
 
 SECTION XXII. 
 Injecting and making a dry preparation of the gravid uterus. 45 
 
 SECTION XXIII. 
 
 Injecting and preparing the uterus in its fullest state of distention. - 47 
 
 Injecting- a Foetus, to shew the course of the circulation in utero. See Ap- 
 pendix, No. 1. 305 
 
 SECTION XXIV. 
 
 Minute injection of the fetus for making several preparations. - 47 
 
 Injecting and preparing Placenta?. See Appendix, No. 2. 307 
 
 SECTION XXV. 
 Injecting of bones, and rendering them transparent, to shew their vascular- 
 
 ity. ..... 50 
 
 SECTION XXVI. 
 
 A minute injection of the cutis, intestines and abdominal viscera generally, to 
 shew their vascularity. _ . _ . 52 
 
 SECTION XXVII. 
 Injecting and preparing the head to preserve its natural and healthy appear- 
 
 SECTION XXVIII. 
 Injecting and preparing the penis. - . . 56 
 
 SECTION XXIX. 
 Injecting and preparing a testicle. - - - 57 
 
 SECTION XXX. 
 Preparation of the bladder, penis, and vesicula? seminales. . 58 
 
 SECTION 
 Preparation of the pelvis. . 6I 
 
CONTENTS. XIX 
 
 SECTION XXXII. Page 
 
 Injecting and preparing the system of the vena port. 62 
 
 SECTION XXXIII. 
 Protecting dried preparations from insects. ... 63 
 
 SECTION XXXIV. 
 Manner of drying preparations. 65 
 
 SECTION XXXV. 
 Varnishing preparations. - 66 
 
 SECTION XXXVI. 
 Composition of varnishes. 68 
 
 SECTION XXXVII. 
 Frames for drying preparations. 69 
 
 SECTION XXXVIII. 
 Preparing old and injured dry preparations. ... 70 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 CORRODED PREPARATIONS. 
 
 SECTION XXXIX. 
 General observations on making corroded preparations. - 72 
 
 SECTION XL. 
 Injecting and corroding the heart and vessels of the lungs. 76 
 
 SECTION XLI. 
 Injecting and corroding the heart. - 77 
 
 SECTION XLII. 
 Injecting and corroding the liver. 78 
 
 SECTION XLIII. 
 Injecting the spleen for corrosion. - 79 
 
 SECTION XLIV. 
 Injecting kidneys for corrosion. - 79 
 
 SECTION XLV. 
 Injecting and corroding placenta?. - - 81 
 
 SECTION XL VI. 
 A corroded preparation of the penis. 82 
 
 SECTION XLVII. 
 Injecting the pancreas for corrosion. 83 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 
 
 SECTION XL VIII. 
 General observations ; injecting instruments. - 84 
 
XX CONTENTS. 
 
 Page 
 
 SECTION XLIX. 
 Injecting the lymphatics with mercury. By Walter. 
 
 SECTION L. 
 Injeeting the lymphatics. By Dumeril. - 
 
 SECTION LI. 
 Injecting the lacteals with quicksilver. - 
 
 SECTION LII. 
 Injecting the parotid gland with quicksilver. 
 
 SECTION LIII. 
 Injecting the lymphatics on the surface of the liver. - 95 
 
 SECTION LIV. 
 Injecting the lymphatics on the surface of the lungs. - 97 
 
 SECTION LV. 
 Injecting the veins in the kidney of a cat. 98 
 
 SECTION LVI. 
 Injecting the arteries and veins of the hand with quicksilver. 99 
 
 SECTION LVH. 
 Injecting the female breast with quicksilver. - 101 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 PREPARATIONS BY DISTENTION. 
 
 SECTION LVIII. 
 Wet preparations by distention with spirits of wine, oil of turpentine, &c. 103 
 
 SECTION LIX. 
 Preparation of the lungs in spirits of wine or oil of turpentine. 104 
 
 SECTION LX. 
 
 Dry preparations by distention with air, hair, wool, cotton, quicksilver and 
 plaster of Paris. - 106 
 
 SECTION LXL 
 Distended dry preparation of the larynx, trachea, pharynx and oesophagus. 107 
 
 SECTION LXII. 
 Distended preparation of the Eustachean tube. 107 
 
 SECTION LXII1. 
 Distended dry preparation of the hymen, bladder and rectum. 1 08 
 
 SECTION LXIV. 
 Distended dry preparation of the heart to shew its internal structure. 109 
 
 SECTION LXV. 
 
 Distendjed dry preparation of the heart by quicksilver to shew its interior 
 structure and the coronary vessels. 1 10 
 
CONTENTS. XXI 
 
 SECTION LXVI. Page 
 
 Distended dry preparation of the uterus, vagina and hymen by quicksil- 
 ver. - 110 
 
 SECTION LXVII. 
 Distended preparations by plaster of Paris. - - - 111 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 WET PREPARATIONS. 
 
 SECTION LXVIII. 
 Various antiseptic liquids. - 113 
 
 SECTION LXIX. 
 Preserving the natural colour of specimens of morbid anatomy. 116 
 
 SECTION LXX. 
 Vessels proper to contain wet preparations. - - 1 18 
 
 SECTION LXXI. 
 Preparing and inclosing wet preparations. - 119 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 PREPARATION AND PRESERVATION OF THE BRAIN 
 AND NERVES. 
 
 SECTION LXXII. 
 
 Preservation of the Brain. - - 124 
 
 SECTION LXXIIL 
 
 Dissection of the nerves of the orbit, face and head to shew their distribu- 
 tion. ... - 12& 
 
 SECTION LXXIV. 
 Dissection of the nerves of the neck and trunk. 12ft 
 
 SECTION LXXV. 
 Preparation of the cerebral nerves after dissolving the bones in an acid. 132 
 
 SECTION LXXVI. 
 Imitation of the cerebral nerves. 133- 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 MACERATED PREPARATIONS. 
 
 SECTION LXXVII. 
 
 Separating and preserving the Chirotheca or Cuticle of the hand, and poda- 
 theca or cuticle of the foot. - - 134 
 
 SECTION LXXVIII. 
 
 Preparing the air vessels of the lungs by maceration. - 135 
 
Xxii CONTENTS. 
 
 Page 
 
 SECTION LXXIX. 
 Macerated preparations of the arteries of the hand and foot with the bones. 136 
 
 SECTION LXXX. 
 Macerating and cleaning bones. 
 
 SECTION LXXXI. 
 Preparing the cancelli of bones. 
 
 SECTION LXXXII. 
 Preparing a natural human skeleton. 
 
 SECTION LXXXIII. 
 
 Maceration and preparation of a natural skeleton of a foetus, or of a very 
 young child. 
 
 SECTION LXXXIV. 
 Preservation of the ligaments in a flexible state when dried. 142 
 
 SECTION LXXXV. 
 Dry preparation of the periosteum. 
 
 SECTION LXXXVI. 
 Rendering bones flexible and transparent. - 145 
 
 SECTION LXXXVII. 
 Cleaning and preparing diseased bones. 146 
 
 SECTION LXXXVI1I. 
 Preparation of bones to display osteogeny. - - 147 
 
 SECTION LXXXIX. 
 
 Cleaning and separating the bones of the head. 148 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 ARTICULATIONS AND SECTIONS OF THE SKELETON. 
 
 SECTION XC. 
 Articulating a skeleton. - 149 
 
 SECTION XCI. 
 Sections of bones to exhibit their cavities and interior structure. - 166 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 MR. SWAN'S NEW METHOD OF MAKING DRIED ANA- 
 TOMICAL PREPARATIONS. 
 
 SECTION XCII. 
 On the advantages of Swan's method. 177 
 
 SECTION XCI1I. 
 
 On the preparation of an arm as a general illustration of Swan's me- 
 thod. ........ 180 
 
CONTENTS. xxiii 
 
 SECTION XCIV. 
 On solutions of oxymuriate of mercury. - 1! 
 
 SECTION XCV. 
 On preparations of the minute nerves. ... 200 
 
 SECTION XCVI. 
 On preparations of the parts concerned in hernia. - - 211 
 
 SECTION XCVII. 
 On preparations of the liver. 
 
 SECTION XCVIII. 
 Preparations of the nose. 
 
 SECTION XCIX. 
 On preparations of the absorbents. 
 
 SECTION C. 
 On preparations of the brain. 217 
 
 SECTION CI. 
 On preparations of the joints. 
 
 SECTION OH. 
 On preparations of the ear. 
 
 SECTION CHI. 
 On preparations of the heart and lungs. 
 
 SECTION CIV. 
 On preparations of animals. 
 
 SECTION CV. 
 On varnishes and paints. 
 
 CHAPTER X. 
 MODELLING. 
 
 SECTION CVL 
 Of the requisite properties, &c. of plaster of Paris for modelling. 
 
 SECTION CVII.* 
 General observations on making models in plaster of Paris. 
 
 SECTION CVIII. 
 
 Making moulds of plaster of Paris on soft bodies and casting their mod- 
 els. 
 
 SECTION CIX.* 
 Making moulds of plaster of Paris on hard bodies. 
 
 SECTION CX.* 
 Seasoning of plaster of Paris moulds. 
 
 SECTION CXI.* 
 Of casting with plaster of Paris. 
 
 SECTION CXIL* 
 Of moulding and casting busts from living subjects. 
 
Xxiv CONTENTS. 
 
 Page 
 
 SECTION CXIII.* 
 A method of representing the outline of any figure in plaster of Paris. 253 
 
 SECTION CXIV.* 
 
 Of making moulds in wax on irregular bodies, and casting in plaister of 
 ' Paris without seams. - - - - - - 254 
 
 SECTION CXV. 
 Of making moulds in putty, and casting with plaster of Paris. 956 
 
 SECTION CXVI.* 
 Of smoothing the surface of plaster models. - 258 
 
 SECTION CXVII.* 
 Of colouring models of plaster of Paris. .... 259 
 
 SECTION CXVIIL* 
 Of repairing injured casts in plaster of Paris. 260 
 
 SECTION CXIX. 
 
 Of casting a model of the labyrinth of the ear with lead and corroding 
 the bone in an acid. - - 262 
 
 CHAPTER XL 
 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 
 
 SECTION CXX. 
 
 Of the methods of catching animals ; and of the primary objects of atten- 
 tion in them. - _ 265 
 
 SECTION CXXI. 
 Of the treatment and preservation of quadrupeds. 270 
 
 SECTION CXXII. 
 Of birds. . . 273 
 
 SECTION CXXIII. 
 
 Of fishes and reptiles. -._.. 274 
 
 SECTION CXXIV. 
 Of Crustacea j and insects. . . 276 
 
 SECTION CXXV. 
 Of eggs. 27g 
 
 SECTION CXXVI. 
 Various observations on the means of preserving different animals. 278 
 
 SECTION CXXVII. 
 Of extraneous fossils. ... 334 
 
 SECTION CXXVIII. 
 
 Natural skeletons of fish, quadrupeds, birds, &c. - . 287 
 
 Frames for skeletons of quadrupeds. See Appendix, No. 3. - - 310 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 288 
 
ANATOMICAL PREPARATIONS. 
 
 CHAPTER I. 
 
 ON MAKING DRY PREPARATIONS OF THE BLOOD-VESSELS. 
 
 SECTION I. 
 Different kinds of Injections. 
 
 IT is highly important to the student of practical 
 anatomy to be able to inject the blood-vessels with 
 success and facility. To do this, he must attend to 
 the quality of the injection and to the condition of 
 the instruments and the subject. Coloured liquids 
 were first used for filling the vessels, and afterwards 
 such substances as were fluid while warm, but which 
 congealed by cooling, as tallow coloured with paints. 
 Ruysch is said to have invented the formula for 
 warm injections now used, which is altogether supe- 
 rior to tallow for making dry preparations of the ar- 
 teries, and is employed more than any other kind. 
 Within a few years another material has been intro- 
 duced, which is liquid when mixed at the common 
 temperature, but becomes solid in a few minutes af- 
 ter. This is termed cold injection, and unlike the 
 1 
 
2 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 other, requires no previous warming, nor that the 
 subject should be heated before it is injected. 
 
 There are six kinds of injection in use, viz. the 
 cold coarse and fine injection, the warm coarse and 
 fine injection, the minute, and the mercurial, to 
 which Mr. Swan would add that of plaster of Paris. 
 The five first kinds are variously coloured according 
 to the design and fancy of the student. 
 
 SECTION II. 
 Formula j or cold coarse Injections* 
 
 This kind consists of colouring matter ground in 
 boiled linseed-oil upon a painter's marble, and made 
 of the consistence of white lead ground in oil as it 
 comes in kegs, or of a medium consistence between 
 thick cream and butter. After being finely levigated, 
 a little lime water, in proportion of two table spoons- 
 ful to a pint, is to be incorporated by stirring. % At 
 the moment of filling the syringe with the injection, 
 there should be added to it about one third of its 
 measure of Venice turpentine, which should be stir- 
 red in briskly, and used immediately, as it very soon 
 hardens. The use of the lime water is, to harden 
 the injection ; but when white lead, (which is almost 
 always adulterated with carbonate of lime,) is used, 
 lime-water is unnecessary. 
 
 The cheapest injection, and one which answers 
 very well for exhibiting the arteries during dissec- 
 tion merely, is lamp-black ground in oil, adding the 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 3 
 
 lime-water and turpentine as above mentioned. Its 
 colour distinguishes the vessels from the other parts, 
 better than other paints. This is employed in the 
 dissecting rooms of Paris, where the great amount of 
 dissections carried on makes its low price worthy of 
 consideration. 
 
 The coarse injection most easily obtained and pre- 
 pared in this country, is white lead ground in oil. It 
 answers every purpose for a temporary exhibition of 
 the arteries, is already ground of the right consis- 
 tence, and requires no addition of lime-water. It 
 would however be unsafe to trust it for minute injec- 
 tion, without further levigation, and is moreover of 
 an unsuitable colour for the blood-vessels of a dried 
 preparation. It answers very well for filling the 
 veins, and where the student is particular about pre- 
 serving their natural colour, he can easily paint them 
 with a pencil-brush, before varnishing them. White 
 lead possesses the right colour for filling the tho- 
 racic duct, and the ureters and pelvis of the kidnies. 
 
 For filling the arteries, to dry and preserve, red 
 lead is the best material, and can always be readily 
 obtained at a low price. Vermillion, however ap- 
 proaches nearer to the colour of arterial blood, but 
 it is not so easily and cheaply obtained. 
 
 To give the injection for the veins a blue colour, 
 white or red lead may be taken as the body sub- 
 stance, and prussian blue added, which, from the in- 
 tenseness of its colour, will convert white or red 
 
4 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 lead to a blue, when the proportion of its weight to 
 either of them, does not exceed a tenth part. The 
 same may be said of kings' yellow, where a yellow 
 colour is desirable. 
 
 SECTION III. 
 Formulae j or jine cold Injections. 
 
 The same ingredients will answer for this as for 
 the coarse kind, previously taking care to levigate 
 the paint more thoroughly, and to add to the Venice 
 turpentine intended to be mixed with it, an equal 
 quantity of spirits of turpentine, to increase its fluid- 
 ity. This is to be thrown in, in small quantities first, 
 and then followed with the above coarse injection. 
 
 When the cold injection once hardens after all its in- 
 gredients are mixed, no use can afterwards be made 
 of it. As it adheres to the syringe, the instruments 
 should be wiped clean immediately after it has been 
 used ; and when this has been neglected, the harden- 
 ed substance must be moistened with spirits of tur- 
 pentine. Should it be desirable to have a large quan- 
 tity of the paint ground and preserved on hand 
 ready for use, the surface of it should be kept cov- 
 ered with clean water. 
 
 SECTION IV. 
 Of Cold minute Injection. 
 
 This may be the same as the warm minute injec- 
 tion hereafter to be mentioned ; or it may consist of 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS- > 
 
 vermillion ground very finely in spirits of turpentine, 
 adding a very small portion of Venice turpentine ; 
 the whole should be as fluid as very thin cream, or 
 like milk, and when thrown in, should be followed 
 by the coarse or fine cold injection. 
 
 SECTION V. 
 Of warm Injections. 
 
 These, like the foregoing, may be used for mak- 
 ing wet and dry arterial and venous preparations, 
 and also for corroded preparations, though for the 
 latter kind, there should be a small change made in 
 the proportion of their ingredients, for the purpose 
 of hardening them, as the heat of summer is apt to 
 soften and dissolve the common warm injection. 
 
 There are, as before observed, three kinds of them, 
 the coarse, fine, and minute. The coarse is used for 
 filling the large arteries and veins, and serves for 
 filling all such vessels as can be dissected, or are 
 worthy of attention in surgical operations. Thejine 
 is used to fill the smaller branches of the principal 
 arteries, as of the hollow organs of the abdomen 
 and pelvis, the periosteum, &c. A portion of this is 
 thrown in first, and is afterwards followed by the 
 coarse fluid, which forces it into the minuter branch- 
 es. Owing to the volatility of turpentine, one of the 
 ingredients, its proportion to the others diminishes 
 every time it is heated, which renders the injection 
 too hard and brittle. To correct this, turpentine var- 
 
6 INJECTED DRV PREPARATIONS- 
 
 nish should be added, in such quantity as will render 
 it a little flexible when dropped in cold water. 
 
 The minute injection is for the purpose of filling 
 the minutest vessels, as of the bones, the tunica con- 
 junctiva, the synovial membranes ; and to give the 
 cutis and other parts their natural colour ; or to show 
 their extreme vascularity, whether healthy or morbid. 
 It will restore the living colour of the lips and cheeks, 
 especially if they are preserved in spirits of wine, 
 oil of turpentine or other antiseptic liquid. 
 
 The colours usually employed for warm injection, 
 are red, yellow, green, blue, black, and white, as 
 the following formula will show. No greater degree 
 of heat should be applied in preparing these formulas 
 than is just sufficient to give them their highest de- 
 gree of fluidity, otherwise their colour will be chang- 
 ed, and the coats of the vessels burnt. So important 
 was this caution in the mind of Pole, that he reite- 
 rates it several times. The best security against it 
 is, to melt the ingredients in vessels placed in hot 
 water, as hereafter directed, and trying it with the 
 end of the finger, as the heat of it should not be 
 greater than can be borne without much suffering. 
 The injections should be warmed in earthen pots, 
 and stirred with wooden pestles, using a separate 
 one for each colour. 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. / 
 
 SECTION VI. 
 
 Formula for coarse warm Injections. 
 
 These are to be found in several books, as Fife's 
 Anatomy, the London Dissector, and Pole's Anatomi- 
 cal Instructor, but are not the less deserving of a 
 place in the present work. 
 
 RED. 
 
 Yellow bees wax, sixteen ounces ; 
 
 White resin, or the lightest common that can be 
 
 obtained, eight ounces ; 
 Turpentine varnish, six ounces ; by measure. 
 Vermillion, three ounces- 
 
 First liquify the w^x, resin and turpentine varnish, 
 in an earthen pot, over a slow fire, or set in a hot wa- 
 ter bath ; then add the vermillion, previously mixing 
 it in another pot, with a very small quantity of the 
 liquified composition, and stirring it well with a 
 wooden pestle, so that the colouring ingredients may 
 be intimately and smoothly blended ; then add, by 
 degrees, the whole of the ingredients, and when they 
 have acquired their due heat, by being placed again 
 over the fire, the injection will be fit for immediate 
 use. These rules are to be observed in preparing 
 all the following Injections. 
 
8 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 YELLOW. 
 
 Yellow bees wax, sixteen ounces ; 
 White resin, eight ounces ; 
 Turpentine varnish, six ounces ; 
 King's yellow, two ounces and a half. 
 
 WHITE. 
 
 Fine white bees wax, sixteen ounces ; 
 White resin, eight ounces ; 
 Turpentine varnish, six ounces ; 
 Best flake-white, five ounces and a half. 
 
 PALE BLUE. 
 
 White bees wax, sixteen ounces ; 
 White resin, eight ounces ; 
 Turpentine varnish, six ounces ; 
 Best flake-white, three ounces and a half ; 
 Fine blue smalt or powder blue, three ounces 
 and a half. 
 
 BLACK. 
 
 Yellow bees wax, sixteen ounces ; 
 White resin, eight ounces ; 
 Turpentine varnish, six ounces ; 
 Lamp-black or ivory black, one ounce. 
 
 GREEN. 
 
 Yellow bees wax, sixteen ounces ; 
 White resin, eight ounces ; 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 9 
 
 Turpentine varnish, six ounces ; 
 
 Crystalized verdigrise finely levigated, four 
 
 ounces and a half; 
 
 Best flake-white, one ounce and a half; 
 Gamboge, finely levigated, one ounce. 
 
 SECTION VIII. 
 Formula for Fine Injection. 
 
 The same rules are to be followed in respect to 
 mixing and beating fine injections as are given for 
 the cold. 
 
 RED. 
 
 Brown spirit varnish, (see varnishes ;) 
 White spirit varnish, of each four ounces ; 
 Turpentine varnish, one ounce ; 
 Vermillion, one ounce- 
 
 YELLOW. 
 
 Brown spirit varnish, (see varnishes ;) 
 White spirit varnish, of each four ounces ; 
 Turpentine varnish, one ounce ; 
 King's yellow, one ounce and a half. 
 
 WHITE. 
 
 Brown spirit varnish, (see varnishes ;) 
 White spirit varnish, of each, four ounces ; 
 Turpentine varnish, one ounce ; 
 Best flake-white, two ounces. 
 
10 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 LIGHT BLUE. 
 
 Brown spirit varnish, (see varnishes ;) 
 White spirit varnish, of each four ounces ; 
 Turpentine varnish, one ounce ; 
 Fine blue smalt, or powder blue, or Prussian 
 
 blue, one ounce and a half ; 
 Best flake-white, one ounce and a quarter, 
 
 DARK BLUE. 
 
 Brown spirit varnish, (see varnishes ;) 
 White spirit varnish, of each four ounces ; 
 Turpentine varnish, one ounce ; 
 Blue verditer, four ounces. 
 
 BLACK. 
 
 Brown spirit varnish, (see varnishes ;) 
 White spirit varnish of each four ounces ; 
 Turpentine varnish, one ounce ; 
 Lamp-black, or Ivory -black, half an ounce. . 
 
 SECTION VIII. 
 Formula for Minute Injection. 
 
 The size which constitutes the principal part of 
 these formulae, is made in the following manner : 
 Take the finest and most transparent glue, one 
 pound, break it into pieces ; put it into an earthen 
 pot and pour on it three pints of cold water, let it 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 11 
 
 stand twenty-four hours ; stiring it now and then 
 with a stick ; then set it over a slow fire for half an 
 hour, or until all the pieces are perfectly dissolved ; 
 skim all the frothy part from the surface, and strain 
 it through a fine canvass cloth, or a flannel ; it will 
 then be fit for the coloured ingredients. 
 
 Isinglass is more colourless than glue, and therefore 
 better for white injections, but its price is higher. 
 The cuttings of parchment make a more delicate 
 size than glue. 
 
 The size which is procured in the shops, under the 
 name of pale double size, runs very minutely ; is 
 very cheap, and already prepared. Dr. Bush, a cel- 
 ebrated anatomist of New York, gives this a decided 
 preference. 
 
 RED. 
 
 Size, one pint ; 
 
 Vermillion, three ounces and a half. 
 
 YELLOW. 
 
 Size, one pint; 
 
 King's yellow, two ounces and a half. 
 
 WHITE. 
 
 Size, one pint ; 
 
 Best flake-white, three ounces and a half. 
 
 BLUE. 
 
 Size, one pint ; 
 Fine blue smalt, six ounces. 
 
12 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 GREEN. 
 
 Size, one pint ; 
 
 Crystallized verdigris, two ounces. 
 Best flake-white. 
 
 Gamboge, finely levigated, of each eight scru- 
 ples. 
 
 BLACK. 
 
 Size, one pint ; 
 
 Lamp black, one ounce, to which may be first 
 added a little spirits of wine. 
 
 Great care is necessary in the levigation of the 
 colouring matter of each formulas, to have it as thor- 
 ough as possible. 
 
 When intended to precede the cold injection, the 
 minute injection need not be warmed ; but unless 
 warmed when used with the warm injection, the lat- 
 ter will be congealed by it. 
 
 SECTION IX. 
 Swan's Plaster Injection. 
 
 To the above kinds of injection may be added 
 one made of plaster of Paris used by Mr. Swan, 
 which he terms cold injection. The way in which 
 he uses it is the following. The pipes being fixed in 
 the blood-vessels at which the injection is to enter, 
 plaster of Paris, to which some colouring matter has 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 13 
 
 been added, as red lead or Prussian blue, must be 
 put into a common basin, or mortar, and rubbed with 
 a pestle a little, so as to break down any lumps that it 
 contains ; then water is to be added very gradually, 
 until it has the consistence of cream ; as soon as it is 
 mixed, (for it sets in a few minutes), it is to be drawn 
 into the syringe, and immediately injected. A ves- 
 sel containing cold water must be in readiness, that 
 the syringe may be washed out as soon as the in- 
 jection has been used, otherwise it will set in so 
 hard as to make it necessary to take the syringe in 
 pieces in order to clean it, which cannot be done 
 without very great trouble- If a little oil is occa- 
 sionally drawn into the syringe, it will easily be kept 
 clean by the means I have already stated. As soon 
 as the injection sets, which will be known by observ- 
 ing that in the pipe, the pipe may be removed, which 
 should be immediately cleaned, and this will be ea- 
 sily done by holding it in water, and at the same time 
 passing a wire through it. 
 
 I would further observe, that for making corroded 
 preparations of the kidney, the fusible metal may be 
 thrown into the arteries, after heating the organ in 
 water until it acquires throughout nearly the temper- 
 ature of boiling water. The pipe is to be previously 
 introduced, and the hot water is to cover the kidney, 
 but not the artery, as this would crisp it and render 
 it brittle. The same material may be injected into 
 the air vessels of small lungs. The high price of fu- 
 sible metal will, however, preclude its extensive use. 
 
14 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 SECTION X. 
 
 Injecting Instruments. 
 
 There are three kinds of apparatus used in making 
 injected preparations. One is for the coarse, fine 
 and minute injection, whether cold or hot, another 
 called the oyster syringe, is for filling detached por- 
 tions, generally with the minute injection, and a third 
 for injecting with quicksilver. 
 
 The first kind consists of a brass syringe, made of 
 various sizes according to the magnitude of the sub- 
 ject or part that is to be filled. As a medium size 
 however, for those who wish to be at the expense of 
 purchasing but one, that which holds near a pint is 
 preferable. The nozzle of the syringe is adapted 
 to pipes, into which it is to be inserted, several of 
 which pipes are usually sold with it, and a short pipe, 
 having a stop-cock, is also furnished, which is to be 
 applied between the syringe and either of the pipes. 
 The whole apparatus with the manner of using it, as 
 
 NOTE. As it is sometimes desirable to inject a subject for private arterial dis- 
 sections, in situations where a brass syringe is not to be had, it may be well to 
 know what substitute can be employed. Having been placed in such circumstan- 
 ces while employed during the last war upon the Lakes, I made use of a common 
 enema syringe for cold injection, and with uniform success. For this purpose, the 
 nozzle was filed into a tapering shape, though this it not indispensible, and the 
 piston was examined and fitted to work very closely. The principal difficulty 
 experienced, is the want of suitable pipes. If it is intended to wyect the veins, one 
 or two pipes should be made by a brass founder or copper smith. For the large 
 arteries I have cast one of pewter or lead, shaped like the large brass one in the 
 plate that has answered perfectly well. And have also used a jewellers blow-pipe 
 with success, cutting it into three pieces, and using either of them that is best 
 adapted to the size of the artery or vein. 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATONS. 15 
 
 described by Pole, is exhibited in plate No. 1. and is 
 accompanied with explanations. 
 
 The oyster syringe is shaped like the common brass 
 syringe, but is so small, that when the syringe is in the 
 hand and filled, its piston, having a ring at the end, 
 may be used by the thumb to throw its contents into 
 a preparation held in the other hand. Its pipe is 
 very small. 
 
 The instrument for injecting quicksilver, consists 
 of glass tubes after the plan described by Marjolin, 
 or of a long glass tube with a steel end, and having a 
 steel pipe extremely fine, that is to be screwed upon 
 it. Both kinds are exhibited in plate No. 2. and the 
 manner of using them, is given under the head of 
 making quicksilver preparations. Neither of these 
 nor the oyster syringe, are much used in private dis- 
 sections, and in public dissecting establishments they 
 are generally in the possession of the teacher. 
 
 SECTION XI. 
 Directions for using the Syringe. 
 
 Experience in using the syringe is so essential for 
 success, that the student must not be surprised if he 
 fails in his first attempt to inject a subject. If possi- 
 ble, he should first assist an experienced person in 
 the operation. When the cold injection is to be us- 
 ed, the subject if entire may be laid upon the floor 
 and its chest a little raised with a block. As the col- 
 ouring matter of the injection will gravitate a little 
 
16 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 when thrown in, the subject should be turned upon 
 its face as soon as injected, in order that a front view 
 may give a bright colour to the vessels after they are 
 prepared. Every thing should be in readiness, as 
 ligatures, forceps, scissars, sponge, &c. as the want 
 of some trifling article at the moment of injecting, 
 might frustrate the whole process. The pipes should 
 be inserted into the vessels and confined with strong 
 ligatures. Some might suppose that the air which 
 fills the arteries, before the injection is thrown in, 
 would oppose its progress, and mix with it ; but this 
 is not the case, for both air and water in the vessels 
 are pressed forward by the injection into the cellular 
 membrane. A mixture of air with the injection in 
 the syringe, is however, to be carefully guarded 
 against, as it will produce interruptions and spaces in 
 the largest vessels. To avoid this, immerse the noz- 
 zle of the syringe deep in the injection, that no froth 
 may be drawn up with it, arid after it is filled, hold the 
 nozzle upward, and press up the piston till all the 
 air and froth are ejected ; then introduce the nozzle 
 into the pipe, which an assistant is to hold in readi- 
 ness, and taking the pipe between the fingers of the 
 left hand, depress the piston with the right, steadily 
 and equably, till a resistance is felt to its passage. 
 The arteries of young subjects possess an elasticity 
 that enables them to bear the push of the injection, 
 and which denotes when to lessen the pressure. But 
 the arteries of elderly subjects, possess a rigidness 
 and want of elasticity, which allows the piston to 
 go easily at first, then stops it, and if forced, the in- 
 jection most probably bursts the artery, and destroys 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 17 
 
 the subject for dry preparations. This accident will 
 be known by a sudden yielding of the resistance, and 
 it will then be useless making any further attempt to 
 fill the vessels, unless the rupture happens where the 
 part may be secured by the thumb and finger of an 
 assistant, or by a ligature, or it is so small as to allow 
 very little injection to escape. 
 
 After a prudent force has been employed for a 
 short time, the syringe is to be withdrawn, previous- 
 ly securing the vessel, by turning the stop-cock, or 
 with a plug or ligature, and the remaining injection 
 is to be forced back into the vessel. Should the first 
 syringe full not be sufficient to fill the vessel, it is to 
 be immediately followed by a second. When inject- 
 ing through a very small pipe, the slow passage of 
 the injection may lead the inexperienced to suspect, 
 that an obstruction exists in the pipe, and induce him 
 to desist, when he should steadily continue the pres- 
 sure. 
 
 The foregoing directions respecting cold injection 
 will apply also to warm injection. When the latter 
 kind is employed, the syringe should be kept in warm 
 water until ready for filling, and the subject should be 
 continued there during the injecting, as taking it out 
 will chill the superficial vessels before they are filled. 
 It is worthy of remark that rupture of the large ar- 
 teries occurs oftener from warm, than from cold 
 injection, the former oftentimes weakening the 
 strength of the vessel by its heat, especially near the 
 syringe. A sponge with cold water should be at 
 3 
 
18 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 hand in using warm injection, which may be laid 
 upon a ruptured or divided small blood-vessel, from 
 which the injection is escaping, to congeal it. 
 
 Mr. C. Bell recommends pushing the piston slow- 
 ly and gradually in throwing in fine and minute injec- 
 tion, thus insinuating the fluid into the more deli- 
 cate vessels, which are easily ruptured. 
 
 SECTION XII. 
 Valves of the Arteries and Veins. 
 
 The arteries have no valves except near the heart, 
 and are therefore easily injected in any direction, and 
 as they are always found empty after death, they re- 
 quire no previous washing out. In both these re- 
 spects they differ from the veins, which have numer- 
 ous valves, that prevent the flow of injection from 
 the heart, and are always found distended with coag- 
 ulated blood, that must be washed out before they 
 can be injected ; and as this must be done in the di- 
 rection of the circulation, small pipes are to be in- 
 troduced into remote parts, as the hand, foot, or head ; 
 and warm water is thrown into them towards the 
 heart, to wash out the coagula, which may be made 
 to escape through a small incision made with a lancet 
 in the tip of the right auricle. Through the s ame 
 pipes, an injection of a different colour from that of 
 the arteries is to be thrown in, until it appears at 
 the opening in the heart. Before filling the last ve- 
 nous pipe, a pin may be passed through the lips of 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 19 
 
 the incision in the auricle, and a ligature tied round 
 so as to close the opening ; the pin is to prevent its 
 slipping off from the tip of the auricle. 
 
 Some veins are destitute of valves, as those of the 
 uterus, kidnies, liver, lungs, (sometimes, but not al- 
 ways,) spleen, pancreas, mesentery, coronary veins 
 on the surface of the heart, the internal veins of the 
 head, placenta, &c., and these may be separately in- 
 jected in a direction contrary to their circulation, pre- 
 viously washing out their coagula. 
 
 SECTION XIII. 
 
 Injecting, dissecting and preparing an entire subject, 
 to exhibit the Arteries and Veins by Cold Injection. 
 
 For this purpose a subject between the age of two 
 and fourteen years is preferable, on account of the 
 saving of time and expense in preparing and preserv- 
 ing, and greater convenience in examining and study- 
 ing it. If ematiated, the subject is more easily pre- 
 pared and preserved. 
 
 It is best, on all accounts, to inject a subject entire 
 from the aorta, whether it be the intention to prepare 
 an entire subject, or to make separate preparations. 
 But in respect to the veins, when they are to be pre- 
 served in separate portions of the body, as of a limb 
 or the head, they should be injected, in an adult sub- 
 ject, after the arteries are filled and the subject di- 
 
20 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 vided, as they are more easily washed out from sepa- 
 rate limbs, than from the whole system entire. 
 
 The subject may be laid upon the floor with a block 
 under the thorax. A longitudinal incision is to be 
 made along the sternum, and the bone sawn through the 
 centre ; or, dissect off the integuments each way 
 from the sternum, to the junction of the ribs with 
 their cartilages, and then divide each cartilage with a 
 strong scalpel near the rib, and also the junction of 
 the clavicle with the sternum. The cartilages and 
 sternum being separated from the diaphragm and 
 short ribs, are to be turned up toward the face. But 
 if the first plan be adopted, of sawing the sternum 
 through, it is to be separated by wedges and pulling 
 of a strong assistant on each side, until sufficient 
 room is made for opening the pericardium, and intro- 
 ducing a pipe ; and it is to be kept open by introduc- 
 ing a prop at the upper and lower end of the ster- 
 num. Professor Horner has invented an instrument 
 for separating and retaining asunder the divided ster- 
 num, that every practical anatomist should be pro- 
 vided with. " It consists of two bars of iron, rather 
 larger than the sternum, each one being furnish- 
 ed with two flat hooks, s and one having two screws 
 which work in pivot holes in the other. The bars 
 are separable. To apply the instrument, saw through 
 the middle of the sternum, then fix the bars one after 
 the other by hooking them on the cut edge of the 
 bone, and adjusting the points of the screws in the 
 pivot holes. By turning the handle of the screws the 
 two halves of the sternum may be separated to any 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 21 
 
 requisite extent." A drawing of the instrument is 
 given in No. 5. of the American Journal of Medical 
 Sciences, page 242. 
 
 The pericardium being opened, and the serum ab- 
 sorbed from it with a sponge, the aorta is to be sep- 
 arated from the pulmonary artery with the index fin- 
 ger. The young student often mistakes the pulmo- 
 nary artery for the aorta ; to prevent which he should 
 recollect, that the pulmonary artery near the heart 
 is most prominent, and that the aorta passes behind 
 it, and emerging on the right, mounts upward to 
 form the arch. A small longitudinal incision is to be 
 made as near the heart as convenient, and the larg- 
 est sized pipe introduced, which is to be secured 
 with a firm ligature, passed twice round the aorta 
 and tied with a hard knot, and the ends are then 
 brought up round the horns of the pipe, crossed, 
 and then carried once or twice round the pipe below 
 the horns, as represented in figure 1 1, plate 1. The 
 subject being thus prepared is ready for the cold in- 
 injection. It is unnecessary to heat the body, though 
 the superficial vessels will be better filled, if the body 
 has been a little time in a warm room. But it is par- 
 ticularly necessary if the subject is frozen, to thaw it 
 perfectly before injecting. 
 
 The injection made of red lead or vermillion ground 
 in boiled oil to such a consistence, that when heaped 
 up in a vessel it will be some time in settling to a level 
 surface, and having lime water to the amount of two 
 table-spoonfuls to a pint minutely incorporated with 
 it, is placed by the side of the subject ; and also a 
 
22 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 bottle of Venice turpentine, and an empty earthen 
 basin, with a wooden stick to stir with. The syringe 
 being in perfect order and every thing in readiness, 
 the operator puts three parts of the ground paint 
 into the empty basin, and adds to it one part of the 
 Venice turpentine and stirs them together briskly. 
 If the intention be to inject finely, there should be 
 added to the mixture one part of spirits of turpentine, 
 to give it greater fluidity, and only half the pro- 
 bable quantity necessary to fill the vessels, should 
 be mixed and thrown in ; which is to be followed 
 with as much more mixed without the spirits of tur- 
 pentine. And if the minute injection made of size 
 is wanted, this should be prepared and thrown in first 
 in the same quantity, and instead of the above mention- 
 ed fine injection. It is probable that in cold weather, 
 a little warming of the subject, by laying it many 
 hours in a warm room, and warm sponging with wa- 
 ter at the moment of injection, will cause the size in- 
 jection to run more minutely. 
 
 To guard against throwing in air with the injection, 
 the nozzle of the syringe when filled is pointed up- 
 ward, and the air expelled by pressing the piston 
 until the injection appears ; then introducing it into 
 the pipe, the operator takes the horns of the pipe into 
 the fingers of the left hand, and presses the piston 
 with his right, or with his breast, until he feels a re- 
 sistance. The assistants are then to press with their 
 hands the femoral and brachial arteries forcibly down- 
 wards, and the steady firm pressure of the syringe is 
 again renewed and continued as long as it will move, 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 23 
 
 replenishing it when emptied. The stop-cock is turn- 
 ed, or if therebe none, the syringe is withdrawn and 
 the pipe plugged, and the subject is turned upon its 
 face, until the injection is set, for the purpose of in- 
 creasing the bright colour of the vessels, for a front 
 view. 
 
 The arteries are less likely to burst with the same 
 force applied to the syringe, where the size or fine 
 injection precedes the coarse, than where the coarse 
 is used alone. 
 
 Eor injecting the veins of an entire subject in con- 
 nection with the arteries to make dry preparations, it 
 is better to choose an adult, on account of the small- 
 ness of the veins of children. Pipes are introduced 
 one or more into the back of the hand, and of the 
 foot, and one into the angular vein near the inner an- 
 gle of the eye. The sinuses of the dura mater will 
 not be filled by this last vein, nor is it perhaps de- 
 sirable, since these sinuses, and the vena azygos, and 
 the system of the vena porta?, are better injected and 
 exhibited in separate preparations. An incision is 
 made with a lancet in the tip of the left auricle of the 
 heart, and the coagulated blood is drawn out. Warm 
 water is then injected into the several pipes, until the 
 blood of the veins is washed out through the same 
 opening in the auricle. Cold coarse injection, vary- 
 ing in colour from that of the arteries, according to 
 the fancy of the student, and prepared in the same 
 manner as the cold arterial injection, is thrown into 
 each pipe, until it reaches the heart, and before the 
 
24 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 last venous pipe is filled, the orifice in the auricle of 
 the heart should be closed, by passing a pin through 
 its lips, and a ligature round back of the pin, and ty- 
 ing it firmly ; after which the injection by the last 
 pipe should be continued longer, until the right auri- 
 cle, ventricle and pulmonary arteries are filled. 
 
 SECTION XIV. 
 
 Injecting, dissecting and preparing an entire Subject, 
 to exhibit the arteries and veins by warm injection. 
 
 Proceed as directed in the last section, where cold 
 injection is used. After the large pipe is introduced 
 into the aorta, and the small ones into the veins, (in 
 case they are to be injected,) the subject is immersed 
 in water as warm as the fingers can bear, and contin- 
 ued in this temperature three or four hours. The 
 veins are washed out by injecting through their pipes 
 while the subject is in the water, and the syringe is 
 to be immersed in the water until wanted for the in- 
 jection. The red coarse injection for the arteries, 
 and blue or other colour for the veins are to be pre- 
 pared in separate pots ; and after being liquified 
 are kept in a large basin surrounded by hot water ; 
 and if the fine warm injection or the minute size in- 
 jection is intended for the arteries, a vessel containing 
 it may be set in the same pan of water. Care should 
 be taken to have all the injections as warm as the 
 finger can bear without giving much suffering ; as 
 greater heat may crisp and destroy the vessels. Each 
 pot of injection should have a wooden pestle to stir 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 25 
 
 it with, at the moment of filling the syringe. The 
 injection is to be conducted according to the man- 
 ner described in the last section. In case of a 
 rupture of a small vessel, its contents may be con- 
 gealed by the application of cold water. 
 
 The vessels being injected, lay the body in cold 
 water with the face downward, the object of which 
 is, to keep the colouring matter from gravitating from 
 the front part of the arteries, and thus lessening the 
 brightness of their colour. 
 
 The next part of the process is the dissection, the 
 usual method of conducting which is, first, to open 
 the abdomen, from the incision already made in the 
 thorax, longitudinally to the pubis ; and then to re- 
 move the abdominal and thoracic viscera in the fol- 
 lowing manner : The stomach and intestines, by 
 cutting the mesentery close to the latter, so as to 
 leave the mesenteric arteries as long as possible ; 
 the liver is to be next carefully dissected away, 
 leaving as many of the ramifications of the hepatic 
 artery as may be conveniently done ; and the kid- 
 nies may be removed in the same way ; though 
 sometimes they are dried entire in the subject ; the 
 spleen will, of course, be removed with the stomach. 
 All the vessels left in the abdomen should be care- 
 fully freed from the surrounding cellular membrane, 
 adeps, and peritoneum, that they may be rendered 
 as visible as possible. The urinary bladder is some- 
 times, especially in the male, inflated and preserved 
 in its natural situation. The rectum, cellular mem- 
 brane, &c. should be removed from the pelvis, and 
 4 
 
26 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 the internal pudendal artery, so interesting in litho- 
 tomy, exposed, running on the inner side of the 
 branch of the ischium. Care should be taken in 
 dissecting the abdominal viscera, to preserve the 
 spermatic arteries which are given off from the aor- 
 ta, a little below the emulgents, and are continued 
 downward, through the abdominal ring to the testes. 
 In the female they run to the broad ligaments of the 
 uterus. 
 
 The thoracic viscera are removed with much less 
 difficulty and labour, than the abdominal. The heart 
 and lungs, in the common way of fixing the pipe, 
 receive no injection, and are therefore to be entirely 
 removed, as also the oesophagus. The same plan is 
 to be pursued in clearing the thoracic as the abdom- 
 inal vessels, rendering them as conspicuous as pos- 
 sible ; and to free the intercostal vessels from obscu- 
 rity by stripping off the surrounding adeps and 
 pleura. 
 
 " The divided sternum is usually bent back on each 
 side, to shew the internal mammary arteries, coming 
 off from the subclavians ; for this purpose the carti- 
 lages of the ribs should be partly cut through on 
 the inside, to suffer the sternum to lay back, and to 
 expose the cavity of the thorax. The subclavians, 
 carotids, &c, going off from the arch of the aorta, 
 should be distinctly seen, and their ramifications 
 traced over the head ; in doing which, great care, 
 time, and patience, are necessary to make a good 
 preparation. The integuments covering the muscles 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 27 
 
 and blood-vessels should be carefully raised, making 
 it an invariable rule, never to raise more on this, or 
 any other part of the body, than, from time to time, 
 may be necessary for carrying on the dissection, oth- 
 erwise the parts exposed to the air will become dry, 
 and difficult of dissection." 
 
 In dissecting the blood-vessels, they will sufficient- 
 ly guide the dissector, if he traces them from their 
 trunks to their large and small ramifications. The 
 dissecting scissors and forceps are much used in this 
 part of the work, especially for the superficial veins, 
 The cheeks and lips are to be stuffed with oiled 
 wool, or curled hair, and the superficial arteries 
 and veins about the face and head may be dissected 
 by cutting down upon them. In the arms the integ- 
 uments are to be raised and the vessels traced from 
 the axilla to the extremities of the fingers ; and in 
 the lower extremities, from the groin to the toes ; 
 separating and raising the muscles carefully from 
 each other, freeing the surfaces of them every where 
 from the adeps and cellular membrane, but not sep- 
 arating any of them from their attachments ; except 
 in some parts of the body, where the course of the 
 vessels cannot be exhibited without it, as on one side 
 of the neck, when the sterno mastoideus, and other 
 muscles, passing over the carotid artery and trans- 
 verse processes of the vertebrae, may be removed, 
 and the cervical artery traced from the subclavian, 
 through the processes to the occiput. The pectoral 
 muscles should also be raised from the thorax, and 
 turned back, to shew the axillary vessels and exter* 
 
28 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 nal mammaries. The glutei muscles should be 
 elevated or partly removed, to shew some large 
 branches going to them from the internal iliacs. 
 The integuments being removed from the posterior 
 muscles of the trunk, the superficial layer of muscles 
 should be removed, and the next layer a little elevat- 
 ed to facilitate drying. The brain may be removed 
 by trepanning in one or more places in the vertex of 
 the head, only sawing out a portion by a vertical 
 and horizontal section, the former running parallel 
 with the sagital suture ; and the brain is to be 
 washed out with a syringe. 
 
 The dissection being finished, the body may be 
 immersed in a solution of corrosive sublimate as di- 
 rected for preserving dry preparations'* from insects. 
 The next step is to suspend the body by a cord at- 
 tached to the top of the cranium, in some situation 
 where there is a free current of cool air. The mus- 
 cles are to be separated to a moderate distance 
 from each other, and supported by small pieces of 
 wood, so as to give the best view of the course of 
 the vessels, which is the great object of the prepara- 
 tion. The thorax and abdomen are in like manner 
 to be kept open. In thus separating the muscles, 
 thorax and abdomen, regard should be had to the 
 natural figure and situation of parts, not to distort 
 them more than is necessary to shew the vessels. The 
 mesentery should be spread out on a piece of oiled 
 pasteboard, the arteries of which as well as the other 
 arteries, entering the abdominal viscera, are to be 
 placed in proper positions. The legs and arms are 
 
' INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 29 
 
 to be put in such points of view as are most favoura- 
 ble for exhibiting the arteries that interest a surgeon, 
 or which a pupil may wish to inspect. The attitude 
 most favourable for this purpose, and which is most 
 compact and convenient for transportation is, to ele- 
 vate one arm with the hand over the head, the palm 
 inclining forward ; thus exposing to view the axillary 
 vessels, as well as the brachial, ulnar, radial, &c. 
 The other arm may hang perpendicularly, with the 
 palm directly forward. The inferior extremities may 
 be suffered to remain in their natural situation, as no 
 benefit can be derived from so unnatural a separation 
 as is commonly given them. 
 
 Whilst these preparations are drying, they should 
 be frequently attended to, to keep the parts in their 
 proper positions. If, through unfavourable weather 
 for drying, or by the subject having been long under 
 dissection, putrefaction should take place, and a dark 
 coloured clammy mucus exude from the surface of 
 the muscles, it may be washed off with a solution of 
 pearlash, and a soft painter's brush. 
 
 It will improve the appearance of the preparation 
 very much to wash it several k times, especially wher- 
 ever a gummy matter exudes, and the bones that are 
 entirely exposed should be scrubbed with a sponge 
 dipped in pearlash water, and afterwards in clean 
 water. There is very little danger that frequent 
 washing will destroy the protective power of the cor- 
 rosive sublimate against insects after it has laid in a 
 solution of it some hours. 
 
30 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS- 
 
 When the preparation is perfectly dry, it should be 
 varnished without delay, as directed in Section 25. 
 
 SECTION XV. 
 
 Injecting and preparing the blood vessels of separate 
 portions of the human body. 
 
 I have already remarked in Sect 13, that it is bet- 
 ter to inject the whole arterial system at once, from 
 the aorta, and then if the subject be an adult, to di- 
 vide it into several portions. If the veins as well as 
 the arteries are to be filled with the warm injection, it 
 must be done for both at the same time ; as it would 
 liquify the arterial injection to heat the subject or any 
 portion of it a second time for the purpose of filling the 
 veins. A subject may, however, be divided into sep- 
 arate portions before it is injected, and each portion 
 may then be injected, both arteries and veins, with 
 the warm injection, taking care to secure all the large 
 branches of the parts that have been divided, where 
 it is separated from the body. But if the cold injec- 
 tion be used, the whole subject may be filled at once, 
 and the veins of different parts may afterwards be in- 
 jected, either whilst the subject is entire, or after it is 
 divided into separate parts. Or the subject may 
 be divided in like manner, and then each portion be 
 separately injected, both arteries and veins. 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 31 
 
 SECTION XVI. 
 
 Injecting and preparing the head for the blood ves- 
 sels. 
 
 The head is to be separated from the body by a 
 transverse incision about the 6th or 7th vertebra. If 
 the warm injection is to be used, the part should be 
 immersed in warm water four hours, and the various 
 directions attended to as described in Section 14. A 
 forked pipe may be previously introduced into the 
 carotids, or a separate pipe into each, and the jugu- 
 lar veins are to have pipes inserted in like manner. 
 Secure the vertebral arteries by ligatures, and pass 
 a cord round the neck over the pipes that are insert- 
 ed and draw it tight, for the purpose of preventing 
 the escape of the injection by inosculating branches. 
 
 The red fine injection should be first thrown into 
 the arteries, as directed, Section 14, for the purpose 
 of displaying the vascularity of the schneiderian 
 membrane, and of the tunica conjunctira and this is 
 to be followed with the coarse injection. The jugu- 
 lars should be filled with yellow, white, or blue in- 
 jection ; using the fine injection first. This will fill a 
 great portion of the veins, though to insure complete 
 success, the subject should be passed middle age 
 and the sinuses of the dura mater jugulars must be 
 previously cleared of their contents, by making a 
 small opening into the longitudinal sinus, near the 
 fontanel and injecting water backwards, towards the 
 
32 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 occipital bone, and plugging tip the opening as soon 
 as the venous injection appears at the part. 
 
 If the cold injection is employed, which I should 
 decidedly prefer, the same steps are to be followed 
 as for the warm injection, with the exception of em- 
 ploying heat in any part of it. 
 
 The vertebral arteries will be filled by the carotids, 
 the connexion being established between them by the 
 basilary artery. 
 
 The dissection is to be performed according to the 
 rules laid down in Section 13, for dissecting the entire 
 subject. It will be necessary to remove, with a fine 
 saw, a portion of the jaw bone, to shew the course of 
 the internal carotids ; the section may be made im- 
 mediately posterior to the last dens molaris ; and on 
 the same side, the muscles &c. should be dissected 
 away between the transverse processes of the cervical 
 vertebra, to shew the course of the cervical artery 
 ascending perpendicularly through them. On the 
 other side of the head, the muscles should only be 
 raised, and cleared from all the surrounding adeps and 
 cellular membrane ; and so placed, as may best show 
 the course of all the vessels. The platisma myoides 
 must be sacrificed on both sides. 
 
 The external parts of the head being finished, vari- 
 ous sections may be made with a saw about the sum- 
 mit of the cranium to exhibit vessels, sinuses mem- 
 branes, &c : of the internal part, according to the 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS* 3$ 
 
 intention of the anatomist, taking care not to wound 
 the membranes, which must be divided with a knife 
 or scissors* Sometimes a perpendicular section is 
 made about half an inch to the right, or left of the sa- 
 gittal suture, and carried down to within about ian 
 inch of the orbit, anteriorly, and as far as the lambdoi- 
 dal suture, posteriorly ; then sawing horizontally 
 through the upper edge of the temporal bone, so as 
 to meet the extremities of the first section, by which 
 an elliptic portion of the cranium will be removed ; 
 sometimes it is made on both sides of the sagittal su- 
 ture, by which the sinuses and processes of the dura 
 mater, &c. will be seen in their natural situation 
 when the brain is carefully washed away, being first 
 cautiously broken down with the fingers* Sometimes 
 a horizontal section is made through the whole sum- 
 mit of the cranium, 
 
 But as useful a section as can be made to shew 
 the internal parts, is perpendicularly through the 
 whole head and cervical vertebra?, beginning about 
 a quarter of an inch on one side of the sagittal suture* 
 just so as to escape the longitudinal sinus, and sep- 
 tum nasi ; then inclining the saw toward the centre 
 of the foramen magnum, saw through the cervical ver- 
 tebras. The frontal sinus may be laid open, by remov- 
 ing a portion of the external table with a small tre- 
 phine. If the preparation is made merely for the ex- 
 ternal vessels, then no section is required, and the 
 brain may be extracted in the following manner. 
 " Make one or two perforations with a trephine, any 
 where in the posterior part of the cranium ; break 
 5 
 
34 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS, 
 
 down the texture of the brain with a stick, ex- 
 tract a small part and then throw in water, and stir 
 it about so as to mix it with the brain, which will easi- 
 ly wash away. Putting in a few large shot and shak- 
 ing them about, in the manner of washing bottles, 
 will greatly assist in destroying the brain." 
 
 SECTION XVII. 
 
 Injecting Extremities for Tracing and Preserv- 
 ing the Blood-vessels. 
 
 It may seem superfluous to repeat, that the 
 arteries of the whole system, are injected from the 
 aorta with more facility and success than individual 
 portions can be separately. This is particularly 
 the case with the upper and lower extremities, 
 for if injected after they are separated from the 
 trunk, the injection will be sure to flow out of some 
 recurrent branches, at the place of separation. When 
 however it becomes necessary to inject an arm after it 
 has been separated from the body, or after other parts 
 of the body have been cut upon, the pipe may be intro- 
 duced into the subclavian axillary artery. The lower 
 extremities may be injected from the aorta before it 
 divides into the iliacs, or one of them alone, from 
 one of the common iliacs. 
 
 The arm may be separated from the trunk, whe- 
 ther before or after injection, by raising the clavicle 
 from the sternum, and passing the knife under it to 
 the articulation, including the greater part of the pec- 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 35 
 
 toral muscle ; thence dissect under the scapula, so as 
 to remove with the arm, the clavicle, scapula, and 
 subscapularis muscle. If not previously injected, 
 a pipe may be introduced into the artery where 
 it is divided, and a small one into the vein in 
 the back of the hand, and the veins will be better 
 displayed if two pipes are introduced. The veins 
 are to be washed out with water, pressed along 
 from the pipes. Red injection is to be thrown into 
 the artery, taking care to secure any recurrent 
 branches from which it appears to escape, and some 
 other colour into the veins. A dark blue looks most 
 natural, king's yellow most beautiful, but white or 
 common white lead is used with most facility. That 
 which is sold in shops already ground in oil, is of the 
 right consistence, and needs no addition of lime wa- 
 ter ; but it should be levigated a little with a spa- 
 tula, before it is thrown in, as a single small lump 
 might obstruct the pipe and defeat the injection. 
 Should the student prefer some other colour to white, 
 he might easily paint the vessels afterwards, before 
 he varnishes. An assistant should be ready with a 
 ligature to tie the veins, as soon as the injection ap- 
 proaches the opening of the great vein. The dissec- 
 tion should be conducted in such a manner as will 
 display the arteries and veins, and (where it can be 
 done) the nerves. The muscles should be separated 
 with props, or cut away where they conceal an im- 
 portant artery or branch. The steeping in corrosive 
 sublimate, drying, and varnishing, are described un- 
 der their respective heads. 
 
36 IXJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS* 
 
 Of the lower extremity little need be said, A sec- 
 tion may be made through the sympyhsis pubis, and 
 the ligaments connecting the ilium and sacrum, so as 
 to remove with each, one side of the pelvis ; or the 
 sacrum and coxygis may be sawn through their cen- 
 tre. If the arteries are not previously injected, the 
 pipe may be inserted into the iliac, and a small pipe 
 on the top of the foot. To dissect, preserve from in- 
 sects, dry and varnish it, see directions under their 
 respective sections. 
 
 SECTION XYIIt 
 
 Inspecting and Preparing the Blood vessels of the 
 Upper Extremity in connexion with one side of 
 the Head and Thorax* 
 
 Separate the upper from the lower part of the bo- 
 dy, by a transverse incision across the abdomen 
 down to the spine, and between the lumbar verte- 
 brae. The injection may however precede this divi- 
 sion of the body. Introduce a large pipe into the 
 aorta in the abdomen^ and secure with ligatures any 
 branches given off between the pipe and the dia- 
 phragm. Pole recommends inserting the pipe 
 above the cceliac artery, Divide the sternum with a 
 saw and separate it with wedges ; or cut it out by 
 dividing the sterno-costal cartilages at their junction 
 with the ribs, as directed in section 13* Introduce a 
 pipe into a vein on the back of the hand, and anoth- 
 er into the longitudinal sinus at the fontanella, as di- 
 rected in section 13. If the veins of the face are to 
 be injected* introduce a pipe into the vein at the in- 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 37 
 
 ner angle of the eye. Divide the descending cava 
 at the diaphragm, and inject water through the ve- 
 nous pipes to wash out the veins ; but instead of 
 opening the apex of the right auricle for the water 
 and coagula to escape, the whole may be forced 
 out through the lower cava, around the mouth of 
 which a ligature is to be placed ready to tie, when the 
 injection reaches it. If the warm injection is to be 
 used, immerse the parts in warm water as directed 
 in section 12, and inject the arteries with red, and 
 the veins with blue, yellow or white. When the ar- 
 terial injection reaches the heart, the valves of the 
 aorta are to be pressed down, and by a little knead- 
 ing with the fingers the heart will be filled. By 
 kneading the heart, between the left auricle and 
 ventricle, the mitral valves will also be overcome, and 
 the left auricle and pulmonary veins will be filled ; so 
 that, when the other side of the heart is filled from 
 the venous pipes, the heart and lungs will serve to 
 make a separate preparation, but are to be removed 
 with care, to prevent their vessels being broken. 
 But should the lungs on opening the thorax be found 
 diseased, it will be better not to attempt their injec- 
 tion from the aorta. Inject the veins from the hand 
 and head, as directed in Section 14 and 15. 
 
 Dissect the arms, head and neck, as directed in 
 section 15. The two sides may be divided by a saw 
 passing down near one side of the sagittal suture, 
 through the head, neck and spine ; but the spine 
 will preserve its natural shape better, if the division 
 is deferred till after the preparation is dried. In the 
 
38 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 latter case the brain may remain in, till the dissection 
 is finished, and then be broken down with a stick and 
 washed out with a syringe, introduced through circu- 
 lar openings made in each parietal bone ; or by mak- 
 ing a horizontal and a vertical incision on each side 
 of the sagittal suture with a common saw ; or, the 
 vertical incision before mentioned ma} r be carried 
 through the head before drying, through which the 
 brain can be washed out, and the remainder of the 
 incision through the spine be deferred until after 
 drying. 
 
 Suspend the preparation while drying, by a wire 
 introduced into the cranium back of the fontenella. 
 Previous to which the whole may be immersed in a 
 solution of corrosive sublimate to preserve it from 
 insects, as directed in section 33. If the whole is to 
 be dried together, the arms may be extended in a 
 line, and secured by a strip of lath, passing along 
 the back to the ends of the fingers, to which they 
 may be attached with twine. After drying, the 
 whole is to be washed with a solution of carbonate of 
 potash, and then with clean water, taking care to 
 scrub the bones wherever they are bare to increase 
 their whiteness, as this is one of the principal beau- 
 ties of dry vascular preparations. 
 
 For two persons, engaged in dissecting the same 
 subject, this will be found the most valuable and eco- 
 nomical preparation that can be made, each half com- 
 prising a great amount of surgical anatomy. 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 39 
 
 SECTION XIX. 
 
 Injecting and preparing the Heart in Situ with the 
 adjacent Blood Vessels, and Thoracic Duct. 
 
 This is an important preparation. Inject the aorta, 
 from just above its division into iliacs, as directed in 
 the last section. Proceed in like manner with the 
 veins, though if the dissector be not particularly de- 
 sirous of preparing the veins of the head and arms, he 
 may insert a pipe into one of the jugular or brachial 
 veins, and having washed out the veins and right 
 auricle through the descending cava, (which is to be 
 divided at the same length as the aorta) ; or, if it be 
 found impracticable to force the coagula down through 
 the cava from the heart, he may discharge them 
 through an opening made in the tip of the righ auri- 
 cle and then close the passage. Having injected the 
 veins and right side of the heart with dark blue, and 
 tied the open vena cava, seek for the thoracic duct 
 which is generally collapsed and with difficulty dis- 
 covered. It may however be raised into view by 
 bio wing into some of the small glands at the root of 
 the mesentery. Its bulbous part, called the recepta- 
 culum chili, lies near the root of the mesentery, and 
 its course is along between the aorta and vena azygos. 
 Small and transparent as it may seem before injection, 
 it afterward appears as large as a small goose-quill. 
 Insert a pipe into this duct and inject it with white 
 lead cold injection. The vena azygos if not inject- 
 
40 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS* 
 
 ed from the other veins, may have a pipe inserted 
 into it, as low down as convenient, previous to which, 
 it may facilitate the process to remove the right lung 
 near its root, and afterwards to remove the other 
 lung. 
 
 Dissect the head, arms and neck as directed in 
 last section, and remove all the muscles from the 
 back, then wash and steep in corrosive sublimate and 
 dry, and having it ready for varnishing, amputate 
 the head and arms near the trunk, to form separate 
 preparations. Saw through the ribs, from the first 
 to the last, in a straight line, about midway between 
 the spine and sternum, by which means, the impor- 
 tant vessels running along the spine will be better 
 exhibited. 
 
 The head and arms may be preserved as directed 
 in last section, and if more convenient for the dissec- 
 tors they may be amputated before their dissection 
 begins. 
 
 The thorax and its contents, after being duly pre- 
 pared and varnished several times, should be pre- 
 served in a glass case. 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 41 
 
 SECTION XX. 
 
 Injection of the Arteries and Veins of the Hands and 
 Feet with coloured Injection for Dissection or Cor- 
 rosion, 
 
 These preparations have, I believe, never been 
 made by any one but myself. Quicksilver has long 
 been used for filling such veins, by supporting a col- 
 umn of it for some days in an artery going to the 
 hand or foot, and then twisting a cord round the 
 wrist or ankle, and drying it, and planting the pre- 
 paration in a pedestal of wax or plaster of Paris, 
 with the fingers and toes upwards. Such a prepara- 
 tion exhibits the superficial vessels very beautifully, 
 and especially the nourishing arteries in the roots of 
 the nails. No coloured injection has however, with- 
 in my knowledge been made of the veins of the fin- 
 gers and toes, that will admit of their dissection. 
 
 Proceed in doing this as in the foregoing case, 
 more particularly described in Section 56. When 
 the arteries and veins are filled to running over, in- 
 sert a pipe into one or two of the largest veins, and 
 without tying the cord, let the part dry as soon as 
 practicable ; then shave a thin portion from the ends 
 of the thumb and fingers or toes and let the quick- 
 silver run out, from them, and also from the pipes, 
 by inverting the part. Then inject the arterial pipes 
 with coarse cold red injection, and the venous pipes 
 with yellow, white or dark blue, continuing the pres- 
 6 
 
42 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 sure till the injection appears at the ends of the fin- 
 gers. Pass a cord round the wrist, and immerse the 
 part in tepid water for a day or two, to restore the 
 softness, so as to admit of dissection ; or if the ob- 
 ject be to make a corroded preparation, macerate for 
 some months, and wash away the soft parts by 
 a stream of water directed upon it, as described in 
 directions for making natural skeletons of small ani- 
 mals. 
 
 The obstacle that has hitherto presented itself to 
 injecting the veins of the hand and foot is their 
 valves. But here, the quicksilver by its upward 
 pressure, if continued until the valves are dried, 
 throws them open, so that the injection flows contra- 
 ry to the current of blood with perfect facility. 
 
 SECTION XXI. 
 Injection and Preparation of the Heart. 
 
 To make a preparation of the heart that will ex- 
 hibit its natural form and appearance, it is necessary 
 that its cavities should be injected, as the process of 
 drying will otherwise cause it to shrink and lose its 
 natural appearance. To fill the cavities of the heart 
 with either cold or warm injection, is a simple pro- 
 cess, and should be one of the first attempts of the 
 student to make dry preparations. 
 
 The heart maybe injected either before or after re- 
 moving from the chest. Sections 13, and 14, describe 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 43 
 
 the process of doing it within the body, at the time 
 the vessels leading to and from the heart are inject- 
 ed. To inject it when removed with the lungs from 
 the chest, care should be taken in dissecting it out, 
 to divide all the vessels so as to leave them as long 
 as convenient. After opening the thorax as directed 
 in section 13, divide the trachea, oesophagus, caro- 
 tids and jugulars at the bottom of the neck, the sub- 
 clavian arteries and veins under the clavicle, and 
 pass a knife down each side of the spine, to divide 
 the intercostals. Dissect, and draw down the ves- 
 sels from the neck into the chest, and divide the 
 aorta and vena cava at the diaphragm, and remove 
 the whole from the chest. 
 
 Insert a pipe into one of the pulmonary veins, and 
 another into one of the jugulars or subclavians. In- 
 ject water, to wash out the coagula from both sides 
 of the heart through the inferior cava and the aorta ; 
 tie up all the other vessels, and put a ligature round 
 the root of each lung, and one of the ligatures may 
 surround and include the pipe in the pulmonary vein, 
 after which the lungs beyond the ligature may be 
 cut away. If the warm injection is designed to be 
 used, immerse the heart in a bucket of water, as 
 warm as the hand can bear, for two hours. 
 
 Prepare the injection, and proceed to fill the pipe 
 in the pulmonary vein, the left auricle, ventricle and 
 aorta ; and when the injection reaches the arch of 
 the aorta, it should be pressed backward with the 
 thumb and finger for the purpose of forcing it into 
 
44 IJTJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS- 
 
 the coronary arteries. Having filled the aorta and 
 secured it, and all its branches with ligatures, with- 
 draw the syringe and stop the pipe. Should the 
 warm injection ooze out from any small branch that 
 has not been discovered, cold water should be ap- 
 plied to it. 
 
 Having filled the left side of the heart, proceed in 
 the same manner to fill the right side with blue or 
 yellow warm injection ; and having succeeded, lay the 
 anterior part of the heart downwards, and fill the 
 bucket with cold water. 
 
 If the cold injection is used, the process is the 
 same, except that the heart is not to be steeped in 
 warm water, and the formula for cold injection cor- 
 responding to the above colours are to be employed. 
 For further directions how to use cold injection, see 
 section 8, 11, 12, 13. 
 
 The coronary arteries we have seen will be inject- 
 ed with the aorta, but the coronary vein is not so 
 easily filled. This vein opens into the right auricle, 
 between the inferior cava and the passage into the 
 ventricle, and is furnished with a semilunar valve to 
 prevent the blood from flowing back into it. In 
 order to fill this vein with red injection, the tip of the 
 right auricle must be opened with a lancet, and a 
 long pipe introduced to break down the valve, and a 
 little blue or yellow cold injection, may then be forc- 
 ed in through the pipe. The tip of the auricle is 
 then closed, by passing a pin through the lips of the 
 incision, and winding round a thread back of it; or 
 
INJECTED BRY PREPARATIONS. 45 
 
 it may be closed with a suture. This injecting of the 
 coronary vein must of course precede the injection of 
 the right side of the heart. There is however a 
 better mode of exhibiting the coronary veins of the 
 heart, while making a hollow preparation of it with 
 quicksilver. 
 
 Having succeeded in the injection of the heart,, 
 clear it of superfluous matter ; then soak it in corro- 
 sive sublimate, dry and varnish it, as directed in sec- 
 tions 33, 34, 35, and preserve it in a glass case. 
 
 SECTION XXII. 
 
 Injecting and making a dry preparation of the 
 Gravid Uterus. 
 
 Although every artery in the body deriving its 
 blood from the aorta, may be injected from it, yet the 
 uterus is so far removed, that its tortuous vessels are 
 in danger of not being properly filled. It is better 
 therefore to inject it from the spermatic arteries, gen- 
 erally coming off from the aorta below the emulgents 
 and entering the broad ligaments on each side of the 
 uterus, and from each hypogastric artery, entering 
 just above the cervix uteri. These arteries and their 
 corresponding veins are to be divided as far as prac- 
 ticable from the uterus, and the uterus, bladder, va- 
 gina and external parts of generation are to be re- 
 moved together. Four pipes are to be introduced 
 into the above mentioned arteries, and four into the 
 
46 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 corresponding veins. Each pipe should then be in- 
 flated, to see if the vessels are all secure, particularly 
 those of the vagina. Inject red into the arteries, 
 and yellow into the veins. Dissect away all superflu- 
 ous matter in order to render the vessels conspicuous. 
 The ligamentum rotundum may also be dissected to 
 shew the arteries, and a vein running through it 
 beautifully convoluted. 
 
 Distend the vagina and uterus with horse-hair, 
 introducing it through the vagina. If the foetus be 
 present, remove it by a longitudinal incision through 
 its anterior parietes (unless the placenta be attached to 
 this part which may be known by the greater number 
 of its vessels) and through the membranes ; cut the 
 umbilicus close to the foetus, and after maceration in 
 clean water, fix a pipe in the umbilical artery and 
 another in the umbilical vein. The artery carrying 
 black blood should be filled with yellow, and the vein 
 with red injection, and the cord laid round the pla- 
 centa. Fill the Fallopian tubes with cotton dipt in 
 oil, and the whole cavity of the uterus with baked 
 horse-hair, and close the parietes with a suture. 
 Immerse the organ in a solution of corrosive subli- 
 mate, as directed in section 33, and then dry it, and 
 having cut it open again, varnish it as directed in 
 section 35, and suspend it in a glass case, or a frame, 
 having a glass front and back. 
 
 If the placenta has been discharged, the cavity of 
 the uterus and vagina are to be filled with hair, and 
 the Fallopian tubes with cotton as above directed. 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 47 
 
 The uterine vessels may be injected in this case as 
 in the other, since the communication between the 
 maternal vessels and those of the foetus is so slight, 
 that the injection whether coarse or fine, will not 
 escape from the spermatic and hypogastric arteries 
 into the cavity of the uterus. 
 
 SECTION XXIII. 
 
 Injecting and preparing the Uterus in its state of 
 fullest Detention. 
 
 Take the uterus of a woman dying from flooding, 
 and after soaking it introduce an ox bladder previ- 
 ously soaked, into its cavity, and inflate it with a pair 
 of bellows. It may be dried in this state, or it may 
 be injected as directed in last section. 
 
 In dissecting it, avoid wounding the bladder, as it 
 would injure the vessels to have the organ collapse, 
 and undergo a second distention. Dry and varnish 
 as directed in sections 34 and 35. 
 
 SECTION XXIV. 
 
 Minute Injection of the Fcstus Jor making several 
 Preparations. 
 
 Preparation. No water should be thrown into 
 the vessels. Fix a pipe with a stop-cock into the 
 umbilical vein, arid tie the arteries in the liga- 
 ture. 
 
48 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 Red minute injection is always chosen for this pur- 
 pose ; and is to be thrown with great care, until the 
 abdomen and skin all over become very tumid. 
 First mucus comes from the mouth and nose, then 
 the meconium from the anus, and often pure size. 
 
 Cut off the head from the shoulders, the arms be- 
 low the shoulder joint, and the legs below the 
 aretabulum : then preserve a small portion of the 
 integuments around the navel, and remove all the 
 interior parietes of the abdomen and chest, so as to 
 exhibit the thoracic and abdominal viscera. Cut 
 away the integuments and posterior part of the 
 theca vertebralis, to exhibit the medulla spinalis. 
 
 Soak out the blood, and preserve it in proof-spirit, 
 to shew the viscera and their vascularity. 
 
 From a well injected foetus may be obtained the 
 following preparations. 
 
 1. If the foetus be about seven months old, the 
 membrana pupilaris. 
 
 2. If it be made of this age, the testicle in the ab- 
 domen. 
 
 3. 'The vascular and radiated fibres of the parietal 
 bones. 
 
 4. The vascular membrane, including the teeth- 
 
 5. The viscera of the chest separate, if better in- 
 jected than those of the abdomen, showing the vascu- 
 larity of the lungs, thymus gland, and heart. 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 49 
 
 6. The stomach, which is to be inverted, to show 
 its vascular and villous coat. 
 
 7. The intestines, which are to be separated from 
 the mesentery, and inverted-, to show their villous 
 
 coat. 
 
 8. The glandulte revales and kidneys together, to 
 
 exhibit their relative size, and the lobulated struc- 
 ture of the kidney. 
 
 9. The uterus and its appendages, to shew the 
 long ovaria and plica3 of the neck of the uterus and 
 vagina. 
 
 10. The external parts of the female organs of 
 generation, to show the hymen. 
 
 1 1. A red portion of the skin, to exhibit its vascu- 
 larity. 
 
 12. The medulla spinalis, to shew its vessels, and 
 the cauda equina. 
 
 13. The membrana tympani, to exhibit its vas- 
 cularity. 
 
 14. The cavity of the tympanum, to show its vascu- 
 larity, and that of the periosteum of its bones, 
 
 15. The vestibulum and cochlea, to show the mem- 
 branous semicircular canals of the former, with their 
 ampullaB injected, and the vascularity of the zona 
 mollis. 
 
 16. The head, to show the natural appearance of 
 the face, the papillae of the lips, tongue, &c. 
 
 17. The hand, to show its natural colour. 
 
 The above preparations are all to be well soaked 
 from their blood, and preserved in proof spirit. 
 7 
 
50 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 18. A portion of skin, freed from its adeps, to show 
 its vascularity. 
 
 19. The membrana tympani, to show its vessels. 
 
 20. The heart 9 to show the foramen ovale, by dis- 
 tending the cavities with air ; and, when dry, cutting 
 away the outermost sides of the auricles, and intro- 
 ducing a bristle. 
 
 21. Any large muscle, freed from its cellular mem- 
 brane and fat, and dried, to show the vascularity of 
 the muscle. 
 
 The four last are to be dried and varnished, and 
 preserved under glasses. 
 
 SECTION XXV. 
 
 Injecting of Bones, and rendering them transparent, 
 to show their Vasculariiy- 
 
 BONES are injected, either to show their natural 
 vascularity in their healthy state, or the distention of 
 the vessels in the state of inflamation ; this must al- 
 ways be done with the minute Injection : there is no 
 possibility of filling the vessels of a single bone, but 
 by injecting at least the whole extremity. 
 
 An extremity for this purpose being removed from 
 the body, a suitable sized pipe is to be properly fixed 
 into the principal artery, and the part thoroughly 
 hfeated in hot water ; then proceed to inject accord- 
 ing to the rules prescribed in Section 11. To prevent 
 any of the Injection escaping from the vessels divid- 
 ed in the removal of the part from the body, a liga- 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 5i 
 
 ture may be made just below the incision, with any 
 kind of cord, and tightened by a twisting stick, in the 
 manner of a tourniquette : care should be taken not 
 to compress the artery through which the Injection 
 is to pass ; this is to be avoided by placing the pipe 
 below the ligature. It must be remembered, that the 
 object of this experiment, the bone, is frequently sit- 
 uated at a considerable distance from the surface ; 
 and that the part must be thoroughly heated before 
 the operation is attempted, and therefore should lay 
 several hours in the hot water, as by neglect of this, 
 the whole intention will be defeated ; the surface of 
 an extremity will feel sufficiently heated, whilst the 
 centre remains, but very little, if at all affected : and 
 again, if the Injection is not made thoroughly fluid, it 
 will equally tend to frustrate the purpose of the ope- 
 rator. 
 
 After the part has been properly injected, and suf- 
 fered to become cold, all the surrounding parts may 
 be removed from the bone as clean as possible, and 
 then laid in clean water for a few days, changing it 
 daily, until the blood is fully extracted ; it is then to 
 be immersed in a weak acid liquor, made of one ounce 
 of the muriatic acid, and one quart of water, in a 
 glass vessel ; in which liquor it is to lay two, three, or 
 four months ; the acid, thus diluted, will gradually 
 unite with, and dissolve the earthy part of the bone, 
 and not injure the animal fibres, or destroy the fine 
 vascular organization ; but as the acid becomes neu- 
 tralized by the earth of the bone, it will be necessary 
 to add a little more from time to time, to keep up its 
 
62 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 original strength. This process should never be has- 
 tened, by the addition of too much acid, for that will 
 destroy the animal fibres, and ruin the preparation ; 
 an unpleasant circumstance, when every thing has 
 previously gone on well. The bones should always 
 be suffered to lay in the liquor a sufficient length of 
 time to complete the process of removing the earthy 
 part, or otherwise they never can be made so trans- 
 parent, nor of course will they shew their beautiful 
 vascularity to such advantage. When this process is 
 effected, they will become soft and flexible. It should 
 be then taken from the liquor, and suspended in the 
 air till perfectly dry ; then immersed in a glass vessel 
 filled with fine oil of turpentine, when it will immedi- 
 ately assume a beautiful transparency, and shew innu- 
 merable minute vessels passing through its most solid 
 parts, in as great abundance as any of the soft or 
 fleshy parts of the body. The vessel being closed 
 according to the directions given in the proper Sec- 
 tion, it should be kept from the heat of the sun, 
 which is very liable to burst vessels filled with oil of 
 turpentine. 
 
 SECTION XXVI. 
 
 Jl minute Injection of the Culls, Intestines, and other 
 Abdominal Viscera, to shew their Vascularity. 
 
 For this purpose, very young subjects are gener- 
 ally chosen ; and the easiest and most common mode 
 of injecting the cutis, or viscera, is by the ascending 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 53 
 
 aorta, as for an entire subject, with this difference 
 only, that the minute Injection is to be used in this 
 case : if the cutis is the object of the experiment, 
 such part of it as is intended for preservation, after it 
 is injected, must be laid in clean water, and changed 
 every day, as long as it imparts a bloody tinge, and 
 then is to remain in maceration, without changing the 
 water, until the cuticle will easily peel off; by the 
 removal of which, the vascularity is much more beau- 
 tifully exhibited : after the removal of the cuticle, 
 proceed with regard to its preservation, either by 
 placing it in its recent state, in a vessel of spirits of 
 wine, or by drying, and placing it in oil of turpen- 
 tine, or preserving it by varnish. 
 
 With presect to the abdominal viscera, such 
 parts as are to be preserved, must be treated in a 
 manner similar to the cutis, by cleansing and preserv- 
 ing them in spirits of wine, or oil of turpentine, or by 
 varnishing ; but it is to be remembered, that such only 
 may be preserved in turpentine, or by varnishing, as 
 are thin, and capable of being previously dried, as 
 the stomach, intestines, urinary bladder, &c. the 
 more bulky parts, as the liver, spleen, kidneys, pan- 
 creas, &c. cannot be preserved in turpentine, unless 
 thin sections of them are made, so as to render them 
 capable of being dried without putrefaction. 
 
 Portions of the peritoneum, pleura, periosteum, 
 tunica, conjunctiva and dura mater, may also be dried 
 and preserved in oil of turpentine, or by varnishing. 
 
54 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 SECTION XXVII. 
 
 Injecting and preparing the Head, to preserve its 
 natural and healthy Appearance. 
 
 Young children are the most proper subjects for 
 this purpose ; the head is to be separated from the 
 body, as low as the fifth or sixth cervical vertebra ; 
 then thoroughly heated in hot water, and injected by 
 the carotid arteries only, with the double pipe (see 
 Plate I. Fig. 9) previously securing the vertebrals : 
 for this preparation, red minute Injection is always 
 to be used ; and if thrown in with freedom, and as 
 much force as will be prudent, considering the dan- 
 ger of rupturing the vessels, it will pass so perfectly 
 into the cutaneous vessels, as to give the natural and 
 healthy complexion. When the part is become cold, 
 remove the pipes, and suffer it to lay in clean water, 
 not only to extract the blood, but to promote putre- 
 faction, so that the cuticle will easily peel off, which 
 is to be removed from all such parts as are not co- 
 vered with hair ; this gives a brightness to the com- 
 plexion, exhibits the vascularity of the cutis, and villi 
 of the lips. If the cuticle be removed from such 
 parts as are covered with hair, the hair will come off 
 with it, and occasion an unnatural appearance. In 
 the putrefaction, attention should be paid to the ear- 
 liest period, when the cuticle will peel off, otherwise 
 the colour of the cutis will be liable to change, 
 and disfigure the preparation. The globes of the 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 55 
 
 eyes will never retain their natural appearance in 
 preparation, owing to the crystaline humour and 
 transparent cornea becoming opaque ; for which 
 reason they should be removed, and the head suppli- 
 ed with artificial ones of glass, which are sold by the 
 wax figure makers, or by the bead makers. 
 
 The preparation being thus far finished, it is to be 
 preserved in spirits of wine, either entire, or in two 
 parts ; if the latter, a section is to be made perpendicu- 
 larly through the middle, or rather a little on one side 
 of the forehead, nose, mouth, chin, trachea, &c. and 
 posteriorly through the craneum, sagittal suture, oc- 
 ciput, and middle of the cervical vertabree ; the brain 
 may then be easily removed, when the larger portion 
 will afford a good view of the internal cavities, mem- 
 branes, &c. The design in dividing the head a little 
 on one side of the middle, is to preserve (in the larg- 
 est portion) the falciform process of the dura mater, 
 septum narium, &c. 
 
 This section should be made, first with a knife, 
 through the soft parts ; the bones will require a saw ; 
 and for the internal membranes, scissors will be more 
 convenient. 
 
56 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 SECTION XXVIII. 
 
 Injecting and preparing the Penis. 
 
 A large penis is always preferred, and it should 
 be removed from the body. In doing this, the knife 
 is to be carried close to the branches of the ischium, 
 to which it is connected by two crura : a neglect 
 of this precaution may occasion a wound of the 
 crura, and escape of the injection. The scrotum is 
 to be divided from the rapha to the urethra, and a 
 transverse incision of the latter in the perineum, just 
 before the prostate, and the whole removed. A 
 narrow bladed knife is now thrust into the end of 
 one of the crura, and a large pipe inserted, through 
 which warm water is to be injected and pressed out 
 again, which is to be repeated as long as it returns 
 bloody. A small pipe is then introduced into the 
 vena magna ipsius penis, which runs along the back 
 of the penis between the two corpora cavernosa. 
 This vein is to be distinguished from the vena tegu- 
 mentorum by its being deeper seated and not mov- 
 able with the prepuce. Introduce a probe through 
 the pipe to the glans penis and break down the 
 valves, and inject water to wash out grumous blood, 
 as directed for clearing the cavernosa. Then im- 
 merse the whole in water to soak out the blood. 
 Coarse yellow injection may be thrown into the cor- 
 pora cavernosa, and if it escapes from the other crus, 
 a ligature should be applied as near the end as possi- 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 57 
 
 ble, and the pipe should be stopt. The vena magna 
 may be injected with red. After this the integu- 
 ments are to be dissected away and the preparation 
 dried. 
 
 I have modified this by inflating the corpora ca- 
 vernosa forcibly, and tying a ligature firmly around 
 the crura, and filling the vena magna with coloured 
 injection of red, or dark blue ; and instead of this col- 
 oured injection I have supported a column of quick- 
 silver on the vena magna till the injection filled 
 the corpus spungiosum. The preparation should in 
 this case be dried as soon as possible and varnished ; 
 as the weight of quicksilver in the glands, will other- 
 wise distend it enormously. Pass a thread round 
 the penis, immediately behind the corona glandis, to 
 compress any vessels that inosculate with the pre- 
 puce, and then divide the prepuce back of the thread 
 and remove it. Previous to drying, it may be pro- 
 tected from insects, as directed in section 33, and 
 after drying varnished. 
 
 SECTION XXIX. 
 Injecting and preparing a Testicle. 
 
 A testicle of an adult should be chosen free from 
 disease, and great care is requisite in removing it 
 from the body. First enlarge the abdominal ring, 
 push the testicle through from the scrotum ; and sep- 
 arate its cellular connecting substance ; then cut the 
 8 
 
58 INJECTED DRY PRPEARATIONS- 
 
 spermatic artery, and pampiniformis plexus, as high 
 as possible, and then the vas deferens. 
 
 When well soaked, press out the blood from the 
 veins ; put a pipe into the spermatic artery, and 
 another into a vein ; and secure all other open 
 mouths. 
 
 The artery is to be filled with red injection, and 
 the vein, which is without valves, .with yellow or blue. 
 Then fix the quicksilver tube in the vas deferens, and 
 suspend it in water ; this done, fill it with mercury, 
 making the column of it extend as high as convenient 
 and continuing it two days, when it may be removed 
 and dissected. 
 
 Cut away the tunica vaginalis, and the tunica albu- 
 ginea, which requires great care : then remove all 
 the cellular and adipose membrane, and dry it on a 
 board previously waxed. 
 
 Preserve it in a common preparation glass on a 
 blue or green paper ground. 
 
 SECTION XXX. 
 
 Preparation of the Bladder, Penis, and Vesicula 
 Seminales. 
 
 Make an incision from the top of the pubis down 
 each side of the penis, scrotum, and anus to the 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 59 
 
 coccygis, and dissect each side along the inner surface 
 of each branch of the ischium and back of the rec- 
 tum, and divide the crura of the penis close to the 
 bone ; then begin within the pelvis and dissect down 
 round the bladder and rectum, so as to meet the 
 former dissection, and draw the contents of the pel- 
 vis down and outward. Or if no value is attached 
 to the pubis, as making part of the skeleton, it will 
 be better to saw through the pubis two inches from 
 the symphysis into the centre of the thyroid hole, and 
 through each branch of the ischium, in a line with the 
 foregoing, leaving the crura of the penis attach- 
 ed ; then press the pubis into the pelvis, and dis- 
 sect round inside of each tuberosity of the ischium 
 and behind the rectum, and draw the contents of 
 the pelvis with the pubis down. Dissect the rectum 
 from the bladder and remove the perineum, scrotum, 
 and prepuce, and all unnecessary muscular and adi- 
 pose substance, and inject or inflate the corpora caver- 
 nosa as directed in section 25. Find the two vasa def- 
 erentia, passing down behind the bladder, from each 
 side, and converging towards its neck, and introduce 
 a very small pipe into each, and by blowing, the vesi- 
 culaB seminales will be inflated, especially if the fingers 
 be pressed upon the urethra forward of the prostate 
 and on the neck of the bladder. Separate the vesic- 
 ula3 where they approach each other between the 
 prostate and urethra, and carefully avoid wounding, 
 by inclining the knife to either side, and pass a strong 
 thread with a needle under each of their converging 
 extremities, then support a column of quicksilver in 
 each pipe, and the fluid will run into the vesicula?, 
 
60 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 and when filled, the threads are to be tied. The 
 vasa deferentia may also be tied near the vesicula3 
 with a needle and thread, to prevent the flow of 
 quicksilver into the urethra ; and after passing threads 
 round where the pipes are inserted, these are to be 
 withdrawn. While injecting the vesicula?, the bladder 
 should be partially inflated. Instead of introducing 
 quicksilver into the vesiculse seminales, they may be 
 simply inflated, and dried, and afterwards cut open 
 to exhibit their cells. 
 
 Introduce a wire into the urethra to the blad- 
 der, and having curved it like a catheter, inflate 
 the bladder by a pipe introduced by the side of the 
 wire, and then pass a strong ligature round the ure- 
 thra at its bulb between the crura, so as to retain the 
 air, and withdraw the pipe. Inject the vena magna, 
 as directed in section 25, by supporting a column 
 of quicksilver in it, till the glands, penis and corpus 
 spongiosum are filled. The advantage of the pubis 
 in connexion with this preparation is, the support it 
 gives to the bladder and root of the penis and its af- 
 fordkig firm points of attachment for supporting the 
 whole in a frame. 
 
 The testicle may easily be injected and preserved 
 in connexion with the above organs. In this case it 
 is best to retain the os pubis, in connection, and in saw- 
 ing it, cut to avoid the spermatic cord, by sawing out- 
 side of the abdominal ring. After the above-mention- 
 ed parts are prepared, a column of quicksilver may 
 be supported in a small pipe inserted into the vas 
 deferens at the pubis, and directed to the testicle, 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 61 
 
 which should be kept immersed in >yater while re- 
 ceiving the quicksilver. 
 
 Immerse the whole preparation in clear water for 
 two days, changing the water frequently ; then soak 
 it one day in a solution of corrosive sublimate, to pre- 
 serve it from insects as directed in section 33. The 
 organs may be supported in their natural relative po- 
 sition by four wires or strings attached to the ends of 
 the bones, and fastened to the top and bottom of a 
 square frame. Or if the pubis is not preserved in 
 connexion with it, the wire in the urethra may serve 
 as a point of support. Place it in a situation favour- 
 able for drying, where the inflated bladder will not 
 be exposed to changes of temperature, and varnish it 
 asd irected in section 35. After the first coat of var- 
 nish has dried, an opening may be made in the blad- 
 der, and varnish poured into it, and the whole var- 
 nished over again. 
 
 SECTION XXXI. 
 Preparation of the Pelvis. 
 
 Having injected an adult subject as directed in sect. 
 12 & 13, divide the trunk near the top of the sacrum, 
 ileum and umbilicus, leaving the rectum in its place. 
 Amputate the thighs after they have been dissected, 
 and exhibit the ligaments concerned in hernia, with 
 the epigastric artery, the spermatic cord, passing 
 from the ring into the testes, inject the testes as di- 
 
62 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 reeled in sect. 26, and inflate corpora cavernosa from 
 one of the crura of the penis, without detaching it 
 from the ramus of the ischium and inject the vena 
 magna. Inflate the bladder, and fill the rectum with 
 curled hair. Bend a strong wire or piece of whale 
 bone into a circular form, and rest it upon the top 
 of the bones of the pelvis, and sew the abdominal 
 muscles to it in front, from the umbilicus to each 
 spine of the ileum. Some of the muscles of the pe- 
 rineum may be advantageously exhibited in this pre- 
 paration 
 
 A preparation like the foregoing, may, after dry- 
 ing and before varnishing, be divided at the junction 
 of the ileum with the sacrum. 
 
 SECTION XXXII. 
 
 Injection and Preparation of the system of the Ve- 
 na Port a. 
 
 Choose a subject that is very much emaciated, and 
 inject it with fine and coarse injection, from the aor- 
 ta ; which, when well conducted, never fails of filling 
 all the arteries of the mesentery and of the hollow 
 organs of the abdomen. Remove all the viscera 
 from the diaphragm down to the rectum, which is to 
 be tied with two ligatures and divided between them. 
 There are no valves in the veins of these organs, 
 and hence Pole directs them to be injected from 
 their roots, where they open into the cava. The 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 63 
 
 blood contained in the veins of the mesentery should 
 however be pressed out before injection. Having 
 fixed pipes in all the large veins, inflate them for the 
 purpose of discovering any that are divided. Throw 
 in blue or yellow fine injection, which will fill the 
 mesenteric, splenic, and hemorrhoidal veins, and also 
 the vena portaB. 
 
 Remove all the hollow organs, the stomach to 
 make a preparation by itself, and also the intestines, 
 leaving the mesenteries entire, and the spleen to dis- 
 sect by itself; trace the branches of the vena portaa 
 into the liver, and then remove nearly all that viscus. 
 
 These organs after being soaked in clean water, 
 and afterwards in a solution of corrosive sublimate to 
 preserve them from insects as directed in section 33, 
 are to be dried, the hollow ones being inflated, and 
 the others spread out on waxed paper. 
 
 SECTION XXXIII. 
 
 Means of protecting dried preparations from Insects. 
 
 Every anatomist knows how liable his dry prepa- 
 rations are to depredation and destruction by insects. 
 To prevent this, varnishing avails but little, for unless 
 repeated two or three times a year, they are soon 
 destroyed. The chief value of common varnishing 
 is, to preserve them from moisture and to give them 
 a handsome lustre. To prevent the ravages of insects 
 some anatomists mix finely pulverized corrosive sub- 
 
64 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 lirnate with the varnish, in proportion of about a 
 quarter of an ounce to a pint. The only objec- 
 tion to it is, that it imparts a dusty appearance. 
 Another method is, to lay the recent preparation 
 after it is ready for drying in sublimate water, about 
 twenty-four hours, then slightly wiping the most 
 prominent parts with clean water and a sponge, by 
 which enough will remain absorbed into the sub- 
 stance to protect it, whilst it will be less likely to 
 shew itself after the preparation dries, and is varnish- 
 ed. The sublimate water is made by dissolving 
 finely pulverized corrosive sublimate in distilled or 
 rain water, in the proportion of one ounce to a gal- 
 lon. Arsenic in very small quantity may be used 
 instead of the corrosive sublimate, Daubenton re- 
 commends the application of vinegar, with the addi- 
 tion of a little nitric acid, to the surface of prepara- 
 tions whilst drying, by steeping them in it for some 
 hours. Camphor has been recommended, but its 
 influence is temporary, and it mars the lustre of the 
 surface. The French also use a composition com- 
 posed of many ingredients, called the vestamental es- 
 sense of Dupleix. But this also injures the colour 
 and lustre of the preparation, and is more applicable 
 to the preservation of stuffed animals applied within. 
 Becoeur recommends an alcoholic solution of arseni- 
 cal soap. Marjolin prefers to either, the liquor of 
 Nicholas, prepared in the following mariner : 
 
 White soap cut in thin slices, one ounce ; 
 Pulverized camphor, two ounces ; 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 65 
 
 Colocynth coarsely pulverised, two ounces ; 
 Rectified alcohol, two pounds. 
 
 Mix and macerate four or five days in a bottle, 
 agitating frequently and strain it through paper, and 
 preserve it in a close bottle. 
 
 SECTION XXXIV. 
 
 Manner of drying Preparations. 
 
 Before this is commenced, the adeps should every 
 where be removed, otherwise they will present a 
 greasy surface very unfavourable to the drying and 
 subsequent lustre of the varnish. And after it is 
 dried, the whole surface of a preparation should be 
 washed with a strong solution of carbonate of potash 
 or pearlash ; and where any bony portions are laid 
 bare, they should be scrubbed several times with 
 this liquor, to give them a high degree of whiteness, 
 which when varnished, contrasts very handsomely 
 with the coloured blood vessels and muscles. The 
 alkaline solution is next to be washed off thoroughly 
 with clean water. 
 
 The drying should be conducted with expedition, 
 unless, as is sometimes the case, putrefaction is de- 
 sired. If a part is very thick, as large muscles, it 
 will favour the drying to wet them frequently with 
 9 
 
66 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 pure alcohol, which, by its affinity for water, will 
 correct its putrefactive tendency. 
 
 Anatomical preparations should be dried in the 
 shade, where there is no dust, and where there is a 
 thorough draught of air. If the weather be damp, 
 they should be dried in a room moderately warmed 
 by a stove, for if much heated, the injection may li- 
 quify and ooze out through the branches of the ves- 
 sels ; and if the preparations are hollow, the rarefac- 
 tion of their contained air may over distend, if not 
 burst them. Membranes may be stretched out upon 
 a board previously waxed, or covered with waxed 
 paper, and may be confined with pins. 
 
 SECTION XXXV. 
 Of Varnishing Preparations. 
 
 This is done to prevent their becoming mouldy, and 
 to protect them from insects, (which it however does 
 only partially,) to increase the transparency of the 
 membranes, tendons and ligaments, and give a bet- 
 ter view of their vascularity. 
 
 White spirit copal varnish of the shops, is suitable 
 for inflexible preparations, as bony or muscular parts, 
 but on account of its friability, it is unsuitable for such 
 as are thin and flexible, as bladders, intestines, mem- 
 branes, &c. the handling of which causes the varnish 
 to crumble, and produces opacity, and it is moreover 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 67 
 
 not so good a security against moisture. For these 
 reasons, oil copal varnish is preferable, is a better 
 preservative against insects, and admits of the pre- 
 parations being washed Without injury, with soap and 
 water. Whatever varnish is used, it should be done 
 after all greasiness is removed, and the preparation 
 perfectly dried ; and it should be applied two or 
 three times successively, allowing each coat to be 
 perfectly dried, before another is applied. 
 
 Varnish should always be laid on with a fine cam- 
 el's-hair pencil-brush, about the size of the finger or 
 smaller, as occasion may require. Hollow prepara- 
 tions should have the varnish poured into them, and 
 after turning them about in all directions, it is to be 
 drained out as clean as possible. Varnish brushes af- 
 ter being used for oil copal varnish, should be immers- 
 ed immediately after in oil of turpentine, and for 
 spirituous copal varnish in alcohol, as they will oth- 
 erwise soon be destroyed. 
 
 Corroded preparations should be varnished, by 
 pouring it on them in all directions and holding them 
 over a basin, until it all drains off, taking care to re- 
 move drops that collect on the most depending ex- 
 tremities of the vessels. When properly done and 
 repeated, it strengthens the branches and increases 
 their beauty. 
 
68 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 SECTION XXXVI. 
 
 COMPOSITION OF VARNISHES. 
 
 Spirituous Copal Varnish. 
 
 Recipe. Take of fine gum copal, reduced to a 
 powder, and clean white sand of each one ounce, put 
 them into a pint bottle, then pour in three ounces of 
 the highest rectified spirit of wine. Shake them 
 briskly until the gum is dissolved, when the sand 
 will settle to the bottom and the spirit appear yellow* 
 After it stands sometime, it will be fine and transpa- 
 rent, and fit for use. 
 
 Brown Spirit Varnish. 
 
 This is mentioned in the formulas for warm injec- 
 tions and is made like the foregoing, using a coarse 
 dark coloured gum copal. When bought at the shops 
 ready made, its price, compared with that of the 
 white spirit varnish, is very low. 
 
 Oil Copal Varnish. 
 
 Reduce fine gum copal to a powder, and liquify it 
 over a well regulated fire in a copper vessel, then 
 add to it about two thirds its quantity of clean linseed 
 oil, and as much oil or spirits of turpentine as will 
 give it, when cold, the consistence of syrup. This 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 69 
 
 varnish if made in a small quantity, is not likely to be 
 so good, and its quality will be much improved by 
 standing twelve months. The whiteness of this, as 
 well as of the spirit varnish, depends ^chiefly on the 
 whiteness and purity of the gum and other ingredi- 
 ents. The solvents used are of so inflammable a na- 
 ture, that great caution is required in making it. It 
 is better to apply to chaise makers for it, who require 
 it in its greatest purity. If too viscid it may be easi- 
 ly diluted with a little spirits of turpentine. 
 
 Turpentine Varnish. 
 
 Turpentine varnish is made by melting Venice 
 turpentine over a slow fire, and adding to it as much 
 spirits of turpentine, as will reduce it to the consis- 
 tence of syrup, and stirring them well together. 
 
 There are other varnishes, recommended by 
 Swan, which will be noticed hereafter, when giving 
 his new method of making anatomical preparations. 
 
 SECTION XXXVII. 
 Frames for drying Preparations. 
 
 When a preparation is drying, it should be fasten- 
 ed in a frame of suitable dimensions in which it may 
 remain till varnished, or longer. These frames may 
 be made of different shapes ; for an extremity it 
 should represent a four sided pyramid, and the cor- 
 
70 INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 
 
 ners should be connected together with cross bars 
 near each end ; for a head, heart, and genital organs, 
 it may be of a cube shape. When the dissection and 
 washing of a preparation is finished, it is to be fas- 
 tened in this frame in the proper position, and secur- 
 ed with twine. 
 
 SECTION XXXVIII. 
 
 Manner of repairing old and injured dry Prepara- 
 tions. 
 
 Such pieces as are too valuable to be lost, but 
 have been defaced by handling, or by insects, or time, 
 may be in some degree restored. Injected pieces 
 that require cleaning, should be plunged for some 
 hours in warm water. A solution of carbonate of 
 potash is then to be affplied extensively with a com- 
 mon painter's brush, rubbing every part. After re- 
 peated washings in this manner, the alkali is to be 
 thoroughly washed off in clean water, in which the 
 piece is to soak for some hours, and then taken out 
 and dried. The vessels that are broken may be re- 
 paired with glazier's putty, or gum mastich, or wax, 
 the same may be done with injured muscles. Mem- 
 branous pieces, when partially destroyed by insects 
 or otherwise, should be carefully cleaned with a dry 
 brush, or washed, if they re quire it, and mended with 
 pieces of bladder of suitable thickness, or some pie- 
 ces of the same kind of membranes, cut to a proper 
 
INJECTED DRY PREPARATIONS. 71 
 
 shape and size, and fastened round the ^edges with 
 gum arabic or isinglass. 
 
 Having repaired the part, blood vessels may be 
 covered of suitable colours with a pencil brush, and 
 those of the membranes can be traced over the mem- 
 branous patches. Having applied the colours, the 
 pieces are next to be varnished. For these old re- 
 paired preparations, a little corrosive sublimate ad- 
 ded to spirit copal varnish, should be used. 
 
72 
 
 CHAPTER II, 
 
 CORRODED PREPARATIONS. 
 
 SECTION XXXIX. 
 
 General observations on- making and preserving 
 Corroded Preparations. 
 
 THESE are among the most beautiful ornaments 
 of an anatomist's cabinet, and when the student has 
 acquired dexterity by long experience, they are very 
 easily prepared. They are generally made of the 
 injections of solid viscera, as the heart, lungs, liver, 
 kidney, and spleen ; and as full grown organs are with 
 more difficulty corroded and preserved without any 
 corresponding advantage, those of small subjects are 
 preferable. They should always be injected after 
 they are removed from the body, as the handling of 
 them while dissecting them from their natural situa- 
 tion, will, if previously injected, be almost sure to 
 break some of their branches. There is no necessity 
 for using the fine injection, for even the common 
 coarse warm injection is apt to run too minutely for 
 giving a favourable view of the vessels. The cold 
 injection is altogether unsuitable for such prepara- 
 tions, and the warm kind requires an increased pro- 
 
CORRODED PREPARATIONS. 73 
 
 portion of resin and wax, to prevent liquefaction in 
 hot weather. The liquor for corrosion should consist 
 of three parts of muriatic or nitric acid and one of 
 water and as its strength is diminished by use, a little 
 acid should occasionally be added. The vessel for 
 corrosion should be of glass or well glazed stone ware, 
 having a top to it of like material. For a heart, a 
 goblet-shaped vessel is best, and for larger organs as 
 the lungs, a bucket-shaped vessel. The preparation 
 may be suspended in the vessel by a slip of lead 
 attached to a leaden or glass cross-bar, resting on the 
 edge of the vessel, or a leaden hook may pass down 
 through the cover to hold it. 
 
 Dissect the organ from the body without wound- 
 ing it or any of the large vessels that are to receive 
 the pipes. The veins having no valves are easily in- 
 jected. Pipes being inserted into the blood-vessels 
 and one into the excretory duct, if the organ has 
 one, immerse the part in water as warm as the fingers 
 can bear, from two to four hours, according to its 
 size. The vessel should be so deep, that when the 
 organ is raised to bring out the pipes, no part of it 
 may rest on the bottom. The ligature that secures 
 the pipes, should have its ends left of such length 
 as to form a loop, through which a rod may pass to 
 support it by resting on the edge of the vessel during 
 the heating and injecting. After throwing in the 
 injections pour cold water into the vessel, and when 
 cooled pass a slip of sheet lead round one of the 
 principal vessels to move and suspend the organ by, 
 as before mentioned, because twine might cut into 
 10 
 
74 CORRODED PREPARATIONS* 
 
 the injection, and would be destroyed by the acid. 
 The pipes are now removed and the organ is im- 
 mersed in corroding liquor, from three to six weeks, 
 or until its texture is entirely destroyed and reduced 
 to a pulpy state. 
 
 When dissolved, remove the part from the acid by 
 the leaden slip, and lay it in a basin filled with clean 
 water. In that situation, direct a gentle stream of 
 water upon it until cleaned, and should portions ap- 
 pear to be undissolved, immerse it again for a week 
 or ten days in the acid, and force a stream upon it 
 from a syringe, and by holding it under a stream of 
 water. When perfectly cleaned, immerse the ves- 
 sels in clean water, to remove adhering acid and sus- 
 pend it to dry. Varnish it by holding it over a vessel, 
 and pouring the varnish over it, and letting it drain 
 off. The varnish will increase the strength of the 
 vessels. When finished, their bases or trunks may 
 be planted in pedestals of plaster of Paris, or they 
 may be laid in a glass case, on soft silk cushions. 
 
 These preparations require great care and much 
 time to complete them, and when finished, are of all 
 others most liable to be demolished by trivial acci- 
 dents ; it is therefore expedient to defend them as 
 much as possible from injuries ; for this purpose they 
 are to be fixed upon pedestals of Plaster of Paris ; a 
 hole is to be made in the top of the pedestal, large 
 enough to receive the trunks which ramify through 
 the gland, or other part prepared ; then this hole 
 should have a proper quantity of fluid plaster poured 
 
CORRODED PREPARATIONS. 75 
 
 into it, the preparation immediately placed in the 
 pedestal, and held in a proper position, until the plas- 
 ter has become hard enough to support it. These 
 pedestals are then commonly fixed with glue on a 
 mahogany stand, and covered with a glass vessel ; but 
 this method is not a sufficient security, unless the glass 
 cover is cemented down, as its occasional removal will 
 endanger the preparation : for persons who have not 
 made them are not always satisfied with looking, but 
 every now and then trying their strength by the finger, 
 at the expense of destroying its most beautiful parts ; 
 neither does the moveable cover sufficiently exclude 
 the dust. The most effectual method of preserving 
 them from accidents, dust, and officious hands, is, to 
 fix them in box frames, which may be oval or square ; 
 the ovals are the neatest but th^ most expensive, they 
 may be glazed in front, or front and back. The glass 
 should be let in upon an outside rabbet,* and confin- 
 ed by slips of paper being pasted along the outside 
 of the same rabbet, extending over the edge of the 
 glass. These frames should be lined with white pa- 
 per, or any coloured paper, if necessary, to be con- 
 trasted to the colour of the Injection ; the outside is 
 generally blacked. 
 
 These preparations, when thus finished, should be 
 kept from the rays of the sun, and heat of the fire ; 
 which, if the injection is not very hard, will be likely 
 to soften it, so that the branches will become flexible, 
 and bend by their own weight. 
 
 * A term used among mechanics, to imply a channel in the edge of a, 
 board, &c. 
 
76 CORRODED PREPARATIONS. 
 
 SECTION XL.* 
 
 Injecting and Corroding the Heart and Vessels of 
 the Lungs. 
 
 For this purpose, those of young subjects should 
 be chosen, on account of the inconvenient size of 
 adult parts. 
 
 The first part of the process is to remove as much 
 as possible the coagula from the cavities of the heart 
 and adjacent blood vessels, that it may not obstruct 
 the passage of the Injection. The right side of the 
 heart and pulmonary artery, may be injected by ei- 
 ther of the vena cava3, fixing a pipe in one of them, 
 and securing the other by a ligature : its left side and 
 pulmonary veins may be injected by the aorta de- 
 scendens, securing by ligature the subclavian and ca- 
 rotid arteries. The Injection by the aorta will be 
 retrograde to the circulation ; but we find that, in the 
 dead subject, the valves do not so completely per- 
 form their office, as in the living, and that the Injec- 
 tion will in general readily pass into the heart, 
 though contrary to the natural circulation ; but to 
 avoid any risque," they may be perforated or broken 
 down by some proper instrument introduced into the 
 aorta. The air cells are next to be injected by the 
 trachea ; this is to be done with great care, for if the 
 Injection is forced beyond a certain degree, it will 
 form extravasations on the surface. The two sides 
 of the heart, and the air-cells should be injected with 
 
CORRODED PREPARATIONS. 77 
 
 different colours, which, when finished, the parts plac- 
 ed in a natural position, and the pipes removed, the 
 preparation may be put immediately into the acid 
 liquor for corrosion, ancl finished according to the 
 rules already laid down. 
 
 SECTION XLL* 
 Injecting and Corroding the Heart- 
 
 A heart for the purpose of corrosion need not to 
 be chosen free from fat, as is directed in most other 
 injected preparations of this viscus ; for in the present 
 case the heart and vessels are to be destroyed by the 
 acid liquor. 
 
 The mode of conducting the process is, first, the 
 heart being taken out, wash its cavities very clean, 
 taking care that there be no coagulum left : more 
 care is required in this respect, than any other 
 preparation of the heart. Drain out the water 
 thoroughly, and fix a pipe in the superior cava, to 
 inject the right side and another in one of the pul- 
 monary veins, to inject the left side of the heart ; 
 then secure the mouths of all the other vessels by a 
 ligature, and inject the two sides of the heart with 
 two different coloured injections ; when cold, re- 
 move the pipes, and put the part into the acid liquor 
 for Corrosion, which, when completed, and the 
 preparation washed, gives the exact model of the 
 internal parts of the heart and the large adjacent 
 
78 CORRODED PREPARATIONS. 
 
 blood-vessels. This preparation should be varnish- 
 ed and preserved under a glass cover from dust and 
 other injuries. 
 
 SECTION XLII.* 
 Injecting and Corroding the Liver. 
 
 For the purpose of making a complete corroded 
 preparation of the liver, it will require four pipes, and 
 as many different coloured Injections. The vessels 
 by which this viscus is to be injected, are, the hepa- 
 tic artery coming off from the cseliaca, the vena por- 
 tse, the vena cava ascendens, and the ductus hsepati- 
 cus, through which the bile is conveyed to the gall 
 bladder. The vena cava on the superior surface of 
 the liver, should be secured by a ligature, after the 
 blood is washed out as clean as possible. The injec- 
 tions consisting of red for the arteries, blue for the 
 hepatic veins, black for the vena portaB, and yellow 
 for the biliary vessels, are to be conducted according 
 to the general rules ; when this process is finished, 
 remove the pipes, and put the liver into the acid li- 
 quor for Corrosion, before the Injection becomes 
 cold and brittle, and never let it be handled till it is 
 perfectly corroded ; then let it be washed clean, and 
 when dry, varnished and fixed upon a proper pedes- 
 tal, securing it from dust and other injuries by a glass 
 cover. 
 
CORRODED PREPARATIONS. 79 
 
 SECTION XLIIL* 
 Injecting the Spleen for Corrosion. 
 
 A Spleen chosen for the purpose of Corrosion, 
 should always be very recent, as its texture is soon 
 broken down by putrefaction. This is to be injected 
 by the artery and vein only, having no excretory 
 duct. If the spleen is very fresh, it will shew the ex- 
 tremities of the veins uniformly rounded. The pro- 
 cess of corroding, cleaning, varnishing, &c. are de- 
 scribed under their proper heads. First inject water 
 frequently by the arter y which returns ordinarily with 
 the veins and clears them. 
 
 SECTION XLIV.* 
 Injecting Kidneys for Corrosion. 
 
 A Kidney for a successful experiment of this kind, 
 should be in a perfectly sound state, and free from 
 any calculi. 
 
 The general intention of injecting the kidneys of 
 the human subject, as well as of other animals, is 
 for Corrosion, as the ramifications of their vessels 
 cannot be so well shown in any other way. This is 
 one of the most simple operations of the kind. There 
 are three orders of vessels to be injected : the arte- 
 
80 CORRODED PREPARATIONS. 
 
 ries, veins, and urinary duct. The artery is distin- 
 guishable from the vein, in this as in most other parts 
 of the body, by its greater thickness and elasticity ; 
 and also by being generally (in its healthy state) 
 smaller than the vein, which vessel it bears the great- 
 est resemblance to ; and the duct, by the enlarge- 
 ment near its entrance into the kidney, it being situ- 
 ated more inferiorly, and in general is much longer 
 than the vein or artery ; but this last depends upon 
 accidental circumstances. Proper sized pipes being 
 fixed into the vessels, proceed according to the gen- 
 eral rules, to fill each with a different coloured Injec- 
 tion; and after removing the pipes, immerse the 
 kidney in diluted muriatic acid, for five or six 
 weeks, or until the texture of every part of the kid- 
 ney is so thoroughly destroyed, that it may be entire- 
 ly washed away by a gentle stream of water. 
 
 Kidneys for the purpose of injecting, should be re- 
 moved from the body with care, that neither the part 
 itself, or its vessels, may be in the least degree 
 wounded; as by such an accident the Injection will 
 escape. Neither should we be solicitous to remove 
 the surrounding adeps and cellular membrane, more 
 than may be just sufficient for fixing the pipes, on 
 account of the numerous small branches which are 
 frequently going off from the emulgents into the sur- 
 rounding substance. 
 
 A variety of beautiful and elegant preparations may 
 be made of the kidneys of different animals. The 
 sheep's is very similar to the human in figure and 
 
CORRODED PREPARATIONS. 81 
 
 structure ; the hog's is more extended than the 
 sheep's ; the dog's ramify different from either, and 
 the vessels more superficial ; the horse's varies much 
 in its external figure, but makes a noble and beautiful 
 preparation ; the cow's differs in figure and structure 
 from either of the former ; the tyger's has and order 
 of superficial vessels, beautifully ramifying from the 
 trunk of the emulgent in a radiate direction over 
 those deeper seated. Thus by collecting from 
 different animals, we may form a most pleasing col- 
 lection. 
 
 SECTION XLV.* 
 Injecting and Corroding Placenta. 
 
 A Placenta chosen for this purpose, should have 
 large vessels, and the substance of it should be en- 
 tire and not torn, so as to admit the Injection to es- 
 cape ; particular care should be taken that the arte- 
 ries and veins are washed very clean from blood, and 
 the water forced out of them again, by throwing in 
 repeatedly a syringe full of air : the vessels should 
 be particularly well injected for the purpose of Cor- 
 rosion ; for if there are only one or two breaks or 
 separations of the Injection in any of the larger 
 branches, by means of blood or water remaining in 
 the vessels, or by any other cause, it will render it 
 unfit for this particular purpose ; and in such case it 
 may be made a different preparation of, and with this 
 view the membranes ought always to be preserved 
 11 
 
82 CORRODED PREPARATIONS. 
 
 until it is seen how we succeed with the injection ; 
 which is to be performed in the same manner as di- 
 rected in the above section. If the Injection has 
 succeeded, then place the umbilical chord in such a 
 position, as will be least inconvenient when the pre- 
 paration is finished, for it cannot well be placed af- 
 ter it is corroded. It should be then put into the 
 acid liquor, before the Injection becomes cold and 
 liable to break ; to guard against this, let it be hand- 
 led as little as possible. We should not attempt 
 washing it until it is completely corroded, and then 
 handled with the greatest caution; for this is a pre- 
 paration of all others most liable to be destroyed by 
 the smallest accident ; to guard more effectually 
 against which, it should not be taken out of the ves- 
 sel in which it is corroded, until it is completely wash- 
 ed ; for the hands cannot easily support uniformly 
 so broad a body ; so that the weight of si.ch parts as 
 are not properly supported, will be liable to break the 
 vessels, the surrounding fleshy parts having lost all 
 their strength, by being reduced to a pulp. 
 
 SECTION XLVI.* 
 A Corroded Preparation of the Penis. 
 
 Nothing more need be said upon the subject of in- 
 jecting the Penis for Corrosion, than what is already 
 given in a former section, as the Injection will in ev- 
 ery respect be the same ; when this is done, the part 
 is to be put in the muriatic acid, until all the cuticu- 
 
CORRODED PREPARATIONS. 83 
 
 lar and membranous parts are fully destroyed ; then 
 it is to be removed from the acid, and washed as oth- 
 er corroded preparations, taking particular care not 
 to break the vena magna, or any of its branches. 
 
 SECTION XLVIL* 
 Injecting the Pancreas for Corrosion. 
 
 The duct is all that can be readily injected in 
 this viscus ; it may be'found entering the duodenum 
 with the ductus communis, but in some instances a 
 little below it ; the part being carefully removed from 
 the body, fix a pipe of the proper size in the duct, 
 and conduct the Injection as usual. 
 
 To this gland we have no proper artery or vein, it 
 being supplied only by branches from the splenic 
 vessels ; for which reason it is difficult to preserve 
 by corrosion more than the excretory duct, unless 
 we inject and corrode the splenic vessels with it. 
 
84 
 
 CHAPTER III. 
 
 aUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 
 
 SECTION XLVIII. 
 
 . 
 
 General Observations. 
 
 The fluidity, specific gravity, and metalic lustre of 
 quicksilver, render it valuable for displaying minute 
 vessels. The principal objection to its general use 
 for filling such vessels is, the continuance of its 
 fluidity, which renders d issection impracticable. 
 Its great specific gravity when supported in a 
 column is such, as to exert strong pressure upon 
 a blood-vessel, or lymphatic that receives it from 
 the column and renders a syringe unnecessary. 
 It is to be borne in mind that the force of the injec- 
 tion depends upon the perpendicular height of the 
 column, and not its diameter, and the former may be 
 such as to burst the vessel. The part should always 
 be injected in a proper tray, that the mercury may be 
 easily collected. If a lymphatic preparation, provide 
 very small lancets, straight and delicately pointed, 
 
QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 85 
 
 fine needles, both straight and curved, and armed 
 with waxed threads. For common blood-vessel 
 preparations, glass tubes of the shape of a straight 
 blowpipe are wanted, as metallic pipes are many of 
 them unsuitable, on account of their liability to be 
 acted upon by mercury. The tubes arid pipes used 
 for injecting the lymphatics and lacteals are general- 
 ly either Walter's, Mascagni's or Dameril's. The 
 first is most commonly used in this country and in 
 England, but the other kinds are preferred on the 
 continent. Plates and descriptions of these are giv- 
 en at the end of the book. 
 
 SECTION XLIX. 
 Injecting the Lymphatics with Mercury. 
 
 The following is from the pen of an assistant of 
 Mr. Charles Bell, who aided in making the splendid 
 collection of lymphatic preparations in Windmill 
 Street, London. They are superior to the directions 
 of Pole, or any other writer, so far as I am able to 
 judge from my own experience. 
 
 In injecting Lymphatics, our success depends, per- 
 haps, more on the body we choose, than on any other 
 circumstance. It has been commonly said, that drop- 
 sical bodies were the best for making lymphatic pre- 
 parations from ; but it will be found, that bodies but 
 slightly anasarcous, if they be emaciated, are the 
 best. In a patient dying of consumption, or any dis- 
 
86 QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 
 
 ease by which the fat of the body has been absorb- 
 ed, we shall succeed perhaps better than in any 
 other. It is not merely the finding the lymphatics 
 easily, and filling them with mercury, (for this may 
 be done in almost any body) that the success of the 
 preparation depends, but more on the quickness of 
 drying the parts after the vessels are injected. 
 
 From the valvular structure of the lymphatics, it is 
 necessary to inject from the extremities towards the 
 trunk. In injecting an arm, or leg, we ought to be- 
 gin as near the fingers, or toes, as possible ; though 
 we never can expect to inject the lymphatics as far 
 down as they are represented in some anatomical 
 plates. 
 
 There is a very great difficulty in discovering lym- 
 phatics, which is owing to several causes. They are 
 very small, but it is their being generally empty, and 
 their coats being transparent, that form the great dif- 
 ficulty. It is advised by some, to make use of mag- 
 nifying glasses ; but these will be found of little or 
 no service, as it is not so much their small size, as 
 their transparency, that is the cause of their obscuri- 
 ty. Small branches of nerves, and small veins, are 
 very often mistaken for them ; and even the most ex- 
 perienced eye will not always discover his mistake, 
 until he attempts to fill them with mercury. 
 
 It is almost in vain for any one to attempt injecting 
 lymphatics without an assistant ; there are so many 
 things requisite, besides merely the holding the tube 
 
QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 87 
 
 in the vessel, that he will find he can make little pro- 
 gress by himself. 
 
 It is necessary before beginning, to see that there 
 is within his reach, sharp-pointed scissors, knives, 
 forceps, lancets, pokers for tubes, needles, and wax- 
 ed thread, so arranged that they canbe used instant- 
 ly ; for it will often happen, that it will be almost im- 
 possible for either the assistant or the operator to 
 take his eye for a moment off the vessel, without los- 
 ing it. It is very requisite, also, that the assistant be 
 very dexterous, as his office is often one of greater 
 difficulty than that of the principal operator. 
 
 Having every thing arranged, place the foot or 
 hand in a tray, to catch the mercury that may fall. 
 The foot ought to be a little more elevated than the 
 groin, to assist the flow of the mercury towards that 
 part. With a sharp scapel, cut off a portion of the 
 skin horizontally, so as to expose the loose cellular 
 texture ; for in this texture are the superficial lym- 
 phatics generally situated. If there is not one to be 
 found near the toes, which is very often the case, it 
 will probably be possible to find one running across 
 the saphena magna, on the instep. Having found 
 one, take hold of it with the forceps, dissect it from 
 the surrounding substance, and, to secure the keep- 
 ing of it, put a needle with a fine waxed silk thread 
 under it. Having still hold of it with the forceps, 
 snip it half across with fine scissors, and into the cut 
 made by the scissors, introduce the fine poker, 
 (which is made for clearing the pipes.) Take now, 
 
88 QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 
 
 from the assistant's hand, the tube containing the 
 mercury, with the* stopcock already turned, and let 
 the stream of mercury play on the side of the poker, 
 which generally so directs the stream that it enters 
 the vessel ; and when once you have succeeded in 
 getting a few drops of mercury into the lymphatic, it 
 will be easy to get the pipe into the open mouth of 
 the vessel, and then the poker may be withdrawn. 
 
 There is an apparent clumsiness in this method of 
 filling the vessels ; but in this manner the smallest 
 vessels may be injected, when it will be found quite 
 impossible to inject them in the old way of punctur- 
 ing the lymphatic with a lancet, and introducing the 
 point of the tube into it. The scissors make a better 
 kind of cut than the lancet, though there is a great 
 deal of nicety required in using them, as we are very 
 apt to cut the vessel completely through. The 
 poker is of very great service, as by it, it is always 
 possible to know whether it is a lymphatic or a small 
 nerve that we have got; if it be a lymphatic, the 
 poker passes on smoothly ; if a nerve, it does not 
 pass on smoothly, but tears the nerve into fibres. 
 When introduced into a lymphatic, it holds aside the 
 lips of the cut, so that the mercury passes into the 
 vessel by the side of it. 
 
 If the vessel be a large one, into which the pipe is in- 
 troduced, it ought to be tied round the pipe with the 
 thread which was previously put under it. The mercu- 
 ry is to be pressed on by the assistant, with the handle 
 of the knife, while the injector ought never to take his 
 
QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 89 
 
 eye off his pipe, and according to the direction of 
 his assistant, elevate or depress the tube containing 
 the mercury, which will regulate the force of the in- 
 jection. The mouth of the vessel ought to be moist- 
 ened at intervals, to prevent its getting dry, which im- 
 pedes the flow of the mercury. This lymphatic may 
 have chanced to fill a considerable number of vessels 
 on the thigh the mercury is still to be pressed on to 
 the glands in the groin, taking care that the foot is not 
 too much elevated, as by that, the column of mercury 
 would be elevated higher than the vessels in the 
 glands could bear, especially as the lymphatics at this 
 part seem to be more easily burst than at any other. 
 We ought now to discover as many lymphatics as we 
 can, in the neighbourhood of the first, and proceed 
 with them in the same manner. If the glands are 
 not completely filled, we ought to endeavour to find 
 for each gland, the vessel that has the most influence 
 in filling it, (for there generally appears to be one 
 vessel which fills the gland more quickly than the 
 others.) Having found it, we secure the other ves- 
 sels, and fill up the gland from its principal vessel. 
 If we want to make a good display of the glands at 
 the groin, we ought to tie the secondary vessels aris- 
 ing from them, as the mercury often passes into the 
 secondary vessels, before it fills the gland itself. 
 
 These vessels ought to be dissected and dried as 
 
 quickly as possible ; for if the limb becomes putrid, 
 
 the mercury in the lymphatics is very apt to become 
 
 black. After exposing them, they ought to be tied 
 
 12 
 
90 QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 
 
 at regular intervals, and always kept in the horizon- 
 tal position, as they are very apt to burst when dry. 
 
 In injecting the lymphatics of the liver, or the lac- 
 teals of the intestines, by merely puncturing the 
 vessel with the lancet, we may generally succeed ; 
 for then there is a surface opposed to the vessel, 
 which keeps it more steady than the vessels in the 
 limbs. 
 
 By blowing air into the lymphatics, we may inject 
 them more easily ; but, there is always the disadvan- 
 tage attending this method, that the air prevents the 
 flow of the mercury into the glands. 
 
 These preparations are attended with so much 
 trouble in their making, that it is of some conse- 
 quence to be able to preserve them. If we endea- 
 vour to do this by merely varnishing and drying them, 
 we shall soon see our labour defeated ; for the 
 change from the horizontal position, or a change of 
 temperature, will, in all probability, burst the vessels. 
 By preserving them in spirits of turpentine, we not 
 only avoid the changes of temperature, and the de- 
 struction by insects, but add much to their beauty. 
 
 In the foregoing directions it is supposed the dis- 
 sector is using Walter's steel pipes, but the following 
 remarks are by Mascagni who used glass pipes, and 
 although they are partly a repetition of the other 
 yet his great celebrity in this department of anatomy 
 warrents their being added. Separate a layer of 
 
QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 91 
 
 skin from the back of the hand or foot, or other 
 part to be injected, laying bare a very small portion 
 at a time, lest the lymphatics exposed to the air 
 should dry and disappear. This being done, a great 
 number of little vessels may be seen, filled with a 
 transparent humour ; these anastomosing togeth- 
 er, become larger branches, the reunion of which 
 forms trunks, into which the glass pipe can be 
 introduced. This being done, you take in one 
 hand, continues Mascagni, the part to be prepar- 
 ed, and in the other a little lancet ; the fore arm 
 being supported, you cut the vessel lengthways, and 
 avoid plunging through it, as this will render the 
 introduction of the pipe more difficult. Keep your 
 eye upon the incision you have made, while an assis- 
 tant hands you a tube having a little mercury in it to 
 prevent air from obstructing the current of the metal. 
 Introduce the little extremity of the tube into the 
 incision, and unless the pipe fills the tube, pass a 
 thread round the vessel and pipe with a needle ; but 
 great care is necessary in doing this, or the point of 
 the pipe will be broken ; and other pipes should be 
 ready at hand, in case such accident should happen. 
 The assistant fills the tube with mercury, which by 
 its weight runs gradually through the lymphatic, fill- 
 ing it to the glands. When the mercury will no long- 
 er pass, tie the vessel with the thread, and withdraw 
 the tube. Proceed in the same manner with other 
 trunks. I have in this way injected eighteen upon 
 the back of the foot, and twenty three upon the back 
 and palm of the hand. 
 
92 QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 
 SECTION L. 
 
 Injection of the Lymphatics, by Dumeril. 
 
 Marjolin directs the improved tube of Dumeril to 
 be used thus. The vessel being exposed to view 
 as above directed, and the instrument three-fourths 
 full of mercury, the anatomist takes hold of it as with 
 a pen to write, at the place where the tubes unite, 
 and leaning upon his forearm, he brings the point of 
 the pipe horizontally to the vessel, and introduces 
 it by a gentle movement of the fingers. 
 
 SECTION LL* 
 Injecting the Lacteals ivith Quicksilver. 
 
 The Lacteals are an extremely delicate and trans- 
 parent set of vessels, which arise from every part of 
 the intestines, and pass through the mesentery 
 towards its root, in order to convey the chyle from 
 the intestines to the thoracic duct; in the human sub- 
 ject, they are very similar to the lymphatics, and like 
 them, numerously supplied with valves, which pre- 
 vent them from being injected contrary to the course 
 of the chyle. They are more visible in subjects that 
 have died suddenly, soon after eating a full meal, be- 
 ing then distended with the chyle, produced by the 
 
QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 93 
 
 aliment recently taken in. They are to be injected 
 in the following manner : take a small portion of the 
 intestine and mesentery, and make an incision in one 
 of the most conspicuous Lacteals, as near as possible 
 to its origin in the intestine ; then introduce the point 
 of the injecting pipe, and conduct the operation 
 agreeable to the rules before described in the pre- 
 ceding articles ; when the quicksilver flows out of any 
 of the divided vessels, they are to be stopped by an 
 assistant (see plate II. fig. 5 ;) when as many of the 
 lacteals are filled as will receive the quicksilver from 
 this orifice, introduce the pipe into another, and re- 
 peat the process as before, and so on until as many of 
 them are filled as can be ; then inflate the intestine, 
 and suspend it in the air to dry, or if there should be 
 any orifice through which the air may escape, let it 
 be distended with wool ; the part being perfectly 
 dried, the wool should be removed, or the air evacu- 
 ated, by cutting off the two ends of the intestines, as 
 also to give access to the oil of turpentine, in which 
 it is to be kept ; or it may be preserved by varnish- 
 ing, both inside and out. 
 
 The intestines of the turtle are very favourable for 
 preparations of this kind, as in them the lacteals are 
 much larger in proportion to the animal, than in the 
 human subject, and sometimes may be injected con- 
 trary to the course of the lymph. The lacteals in 
 fishes have no valves. 
 
 The beauty of these preparations will be much 
 
94 QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 
 
 increased, by the arteries being also injected with 
 the fine and coarse red injection, and the veins with 
 yellow. 
 
 SECTION LIL* 
 Injecting the Parotid Gland with Quicksilver. 
 
 THE Parotid Gland is situated posterior to the 
 masseter muscle, and anterior to the lower part of the 
 ear ; it extends from the zygomatic arch to the angle 
 of the lower jaw ; its duct passes over the masseter, 
 and through the buccinator into the mouth. . 
 
 This gland should be injected in situ, on account of 
 the numerous branches which it is giving off on all 
 sides, and which are so transparent, as to escape the 
 eye of a common dissector, unless they are rendered 
 more visible, by being first filled with quicksilver. In 
 conducting this operation, raise the cutis on the side 
 of the face, from the ear to the mouth, and from the 
 temporal muscle to the neck, taking care to keep the 
 knife close to the skin, that it may not wound the 
 gland ; then with the utmost caution, dissect away the 
 adeps and cellular membrane, from the masseter 
 muscle, in search of the duct, a tube of about two 
 inches in length, and the size of a crow quill, easily 
 eluding the search of an inexperienced student: 
 when discovered, make an opening into it with the 
 point of a lancet, sufficiently large to introduce the 
 point of the steel injecting pipe, as distant from the 
 
QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 95 
 
 gland as possible ; and when introduced, confine the 
 duct upon it by a ligature, with a single knot, that it 
 may serve, when the pipe is withdrawn, to secure 
 the quicksilver in the gland ; and that if any acci- 
 dent should render it necessary to relax or remove 
 it, it may be done with the less difficulty, or without 
 danger of injuring the duct, When the gland has 
 received as much of the quicksilver as it can contain, 
 the pipe withdrawn, and duct secured, proceed with 
 all possible care to dissect it from its situation, re- 
 membering a slight wound in the gland would be 
 likely to destroy it ; in this process, the numerous 
 branches going off to the surrounding parts, should be 
 secured by a very small curved needle and single lig- 
 ature, after which they may be divided with safety ; 
 when the gland is thus removed from its situation, lay 
 it in a dish, and take away as much of the surround- 
 ing useless parts as possible, without endangering it ; 
 then lay it in clean water for a day or two, to extract 
 the bloody colour ; after which it is to be spread up- 
 on a piece of pasteboard, and placed in the air until 
 perfectly dry ; then remove it from the pasteboard, 
 and preserve it in a glass vessel of fine oil of turpen- 
 tine. 
 
 SECTION LIII.* 
 
 Injecting the Lymphatics on the Surface of the 
 Liver, with Quicksilver. 
 
 Procure the liver of an anasarcous subject, take a 
 portion of it about the size of a hand, upon which the 
 
96 QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 
 
 lymphatics are most visible ; they are small, and al- 
 most imperceptible whitish lines, running plentifully 
 on the surface ; the part to be injected should be 
 laid in a dish, or the injecting tray, to catch the 
 quicksilver, which would otherwise be lost ; then 
 with the point of a lancet, puncture one of the larg- 
 est of them, sufficient to introduce the pipe of the 
 injecting tube with ease ; the curved pipe should be 
 used for this purpose, that its point may stand hori- 
 zontally, corresponding with the direction of the 
 vessel, whilst the upper part of the tube is inclined 
 obliquely toward the shoulder of the operator, 
 as a pen is held in the act of writing ; the column 
 of quicksilver in the tube may be raised to 
 about five or six inches ; when it begins to flow, it 
 will be necessary to prevent its escape from the ves- 
 sel, by pressing the finger gently upon the ori- 
 fice, or by a ligature upon the pipe, taking care not 
 to obstruct the flow of the quicksilver ; if, when a 
 small portion has passed into the lymphatics, it 
 seems inclined to stop, it will then be necessary to 
 force it forward, by a gentle pressure with the edge 
 of a steel spatula, urging it in that direction in \\hich 
 it seems most inclined to run ; by this the valves 
 will be broken down ; being in this viscus particular- 
 ly weak, so that we may inject without regard to the 
 course of circulation ; when the quicksilver is pretty 
 uniformly distributed over the surface, remove the 
 pipe, and secure the orifice as usual ; then cut the in- 
 jected portion of liver, from that part which is not in- 
 tended to be preserved, taking care to keep the knife 
 at a sufficient distance from the injected lymphatics, 
 
QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 97 
 
 as wounding them would occasion the escape of the 
 quicksilver, and greatly injure, if not ruin, the pre- 
 paration ; remove also from the under side of it, as 
 much of the liver, as will leave it not more than half 
 an inch in thickness ; then pin it out smooth upon a 
 piece of pasteboard, with the injected surface out- 
 ward, and suspend it in a current of air, until it is 
 perfectly dry; then take it from the pasteboard, 
 make its edges even, and preserve it in a glass vessel 
 of fine oil of turpentine. When the preparation is 
 dried without putrefaction, there is a lively and beauti- 
 ful contrast of colour between the quicksilver and the 
 dark brown of the liver ; but this preparation will be 
 still improved by the peritonseal vessels being inject- 
 ed with a bright red. 
 
 SECTION LIV.* 
 
 Injecting the Lymphatics on the Surface of the Lungs, 
 with Quicksilver. 
 
 The Lungs of an anasarcous subject are to be pre- 
 ferred for this purpose, as the lymphatics on these are 
 much larger, though not so easily discovered, as those 
 of the liver ; nor can they, as in the liver, be injected 
 contrary to the circulation of the lymph, on account 
 of the valves being much firmer, and not so easily 
 broken down : for this reason, the mercury should 
 be injected from the inferior part of the lungs, when 
 it will pass with facility toward their root. The lym- 
 13 
 
98 QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 
 
 phatics of this viscus, take a direction different from 
 those of the liver, and run in a circuitous direction. 
 What further regards the introduction of the pipe, 
 the manner of injecting, drying, preserving, &c. por- 
 tions of the lungs, need not differ from what has been 
 said in the preceding section respecting the liver. 
 
 SECTION LV.* 
 
 Injecting the Veins in the Kidney of a Cal, with 
 Quicksilver. 
 
 The veins in the kidney of a cat run very superfi- 
 cial, and branch out in a manner peculiarly beautiful, 
 which is the only inducement to make this prepara- 
 tion. The manner of injecting it is very simple ; 
 nothing more is necessary than to fix the straight 
 pipe of the quicksilver injecting tube into the vein by 
 a ligature, and inject with a short column ; it should 
 be suspended in water, that it may have time to in- 
 sinuate itself into all the small ramifications ; then re- 
 move the pipe, and secure the quicksilver in the 
 vein, as usual ; dissect away the surrounding cellu- 
 lar membrane and adeps, and preserve it in spirits of 
 wine. 
 
 These vessels may be injected with coloured mi- 
 nute Injection, to give the same appearance ; but a 
 very small syringe and pipe should be used for the 
 purpose. 
 
QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 99 
 
 SECTION LVL* 
 
 Injecting the Arteries and Veins of the Hand, with 
 Quicksilver. 
 
 For this purpose, a hand should be chosen the 
 most emaciated, such as are generally found upon 
 aged persons, who have died of some lingering dis- 
 ease, and upon women rather than men. The fore- 
 arm should be separated by a transverse section, 
 about three inches above the wrist, and the steel 
 pipe fixed in the radial artery, with a ligature ; then 
 pour the quicksilver into the tube, and conduct the 
 process as before described ; as soon as they get fill- 
 ed, it will begin to flow out of the other vessels, 
 where the section is made ; then let the arteries be 
 first secured, by taking hold of them with the dis- 
 secting forceps, whilst an assistant ties them with a 
 ligature, and afterwards the veins in the same man- 
 ner ; if they cannot be perfectly stopped by this 
 means, apply a strong cord round the arm, a little be- 
 low the incision, and tighten it in the manner of a 
 common twisted tourniquet ; but care should be taken 
 not to make the compression with the cord so great as 
 to obstruct the quicksilver from passing in ; this may 
 be easily regulated ; for a descending column in the 
 tube will overcome a much stronger resistance than the 
 ascending column in the vessels of the hand, on account 
 of the greater perpendicular height of the former. 
 
100 QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS- 
 
 When all the vessels are secured, the hand should be 
 properly suspended in water (see Plate III.) with the 
 tube and column of quicksilver, so as to continue the 
 Injection for a day or two, to give it full time to pass 
 into the minute vessels ; then remove the pipe, 
 secure the artery by a ligature, and twist the cord 
 tighter : the preparation is to remain in water, till 
 putrefaction takes place, so that the cuticle may be 
 easily peeled off, otherwise the hand would not dry ; 
 and if it should, with the cuticle on, it would tend in a 
 great degree, to obscure the injected vessels. The 
 preparation is then to be hung in the air, and, when 
 dry, should be carefully varnished, and fixed on a 
 pedestal of Plaster of Paris, secured from the dust 
 by a glass cover. 
 
 These preparations, when well managed, are very 
 beautiful ; for the quicksilver passing from the arte- 
 ries into the veins, affords a most elegant display of 
 the vessels, and there is no other way by which the 
 veins of the hand can be readily injected with minute- 
 ness. 
 
 The reason why I have not mentioned securing the 
 divided vessels before the Injection was attempted, is, 
 that the quicksilver, by passing out, may have oppor- 
 tunity of removing from the vessels any coagula 
 which might tend to stain the quicksilver, and mar 
 the beauty of the preparation. 
 
QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 101 
 
 SECTION LVIL* 
 Injecting the Female Breast with Quicksilver. 
 
 It requires no small share of time and patience, to 
 make a complete preparation of this kind. The man- 
 ner of conducting the operation is, first, to remove 
 the breast from the subject, by an incision carried 
 round its basis, so distant as to avoid wounding the 
 lactiferous tubes, which will be more evident, and 
 much better adapted to this purpose, if they have been 
 recently distended with milk. Next examine the 
 nipple for the excretory ducts, and introduce a bristle 
 into each, about ten or fifteen in number ; afterwards 
 withdraw one of them, and cautiously introducing the 
 strait pipe, distend the tubes with quicksilver : when 
 completely filled, secure its orifice by replacing the 
 bristle, then withdraw the next, introduce the pipe, 
 and distend the tubes as before, and so on until they 
 are all injected, and the orifices of their ducts secured 
 by a ligature, embracing the whole nipple, when 
 the bristles may be withdrawn ; for it must be re- 
 membered, that the lactiferous tubes do not anasto- 
 mose, that is, the tubes terminating in one excretory 
 duct, have no communication with those belonging 
 to a nother ; which circumstance renders it always 
 necessary to inject by each duct separately. 
 
 As sometimes, notwithstanding all the care that can 
 be taken in removing the breast, some small tubes 
 
102 QUICKSILVER INJECTIONS AND PREPARATIONS. 
 
 branching into the surrounding adeps, at a considera- 
 ble distance, will be divided, through which the 
 quicksilver will escape on the posterior surface ; these 
 must be secured by a ligature, whenever they occur 
 in the course of the operation ; this being effected, 
 carefully dissect away all the adeps, cellular mem- 
 brane, &c. from the posterior side ; the integuments 
 are also to be removed, and the adeps situated be- 
 tween them and the lactiferous vessels : this will re- 
 quire great care not to wound them. The part should 
 then be macerated, to free it as much as possible 
 from blood, taking care to avoid putrefaction, which 
 would weaken the vessels, and occasion the escape 
 of the quicksilver: after which, let it be exposed to 
 a current of air, to dry as soon as possible ; when ef- 
 fected, preserve it in fine oil of turpentine, which will 
 give it a transparency, and render the distribution of 
 the lactiferous tubes very visible. 
 
103 
 
 CHAPTER IV. 
 
 PREPARATIONS BY DISTENTION. 
 
 HOLLOW organs may be distended for preservation 
 with antiseptic liquids, air, wool, hair, cotton, plaster, 
 quicksilver, &c. 
 
 SECTION LVIII. 
 
 Wet Preparations by distention with Spirits of 
 Wine, Oil of Turpentine. 
 
 The intention in distending preparations by spir- 
 its, is, to give them their natural figure, to exhibit 
 more fully the parts of which they are composed, 
 their vascularity, and occasionally some morbid or 
 preternatural appearances. The parts most com- 
 monly prepared in this way are the lungs, intestines, 
 urinary bladder, biliary cyst, corpora cavernosa and 
 spongiosa of the penis, chirotheca, podotheca, ova, 
 hydatids, &c. these when distended, are to be im- 
 mersed in spirits, for a few days or a week, when 
 they will acquire a considerable degree of hardness, 
 and be disposed to retain the form given them by the 
 distention : after which, any part may be removed, 
 
104 PREPARATIONS BY D1STENTION, 
 
 or opened, to shew their internal structure, or pecu- 
 liar appearance ; such preparations are then to be 
 properly suspended in a glass vessel of clear spirit, 
 that is perfectly transparent and colourless, or in 
 clear oil of turpentine. 
 
 SECTION LIX. 
 
 Preparations of the Lungs in Spirits of Wine or 
 Oil of Turpentine. 
 
 The air-cells in the lungs of amphibious animals, 
 are much larger than in those of others ; and the 
 most beautiful preparations of this kind are made of 
 the lungs of the sea turtle. These will be much im- 
 proved, by filling the pulmonary arteries and veins 
 with red coloured minute injection ; then immersing 
 the part in a vessel containing spirits of wine, of suffi- 
 cient size to accommodate the lungs without com- 
 pressing them, and injecting into them by the tra- 
 chea, such a quantity of the spirits of wine, as will 
 fully dilate them, without danger of rupture. This 
 is to be confined in the cells by a ligature on the tra- 
 chea, and after the preparation has remained for a 
 few days, it is to be divided with a sharp knife into 
 longitudinal slices, through which the spirits will 
 freely escape from the cells. It should be cautious- 
 ly handled, as pressure will tend to close up the 
 cells. Suspend it in a glass vessel of rectified spi- 
 
PREPARATIONS BY DISTEWTION. 105 
 
 rits, and it will exhibit not only air cells, but also 
 their extremely minute vascularity. 
 
 To preserve the lungs in oil of turpentine, select 
 those that are very small to fill with quicksilver, as 
 large lungs will not sustain the great weight of quick- 
 silver necessary to fill them. Their arteries and 
 veins are to be injected as above directed, and their 
 air cells filled with quicksilver, which is to remain in 
 the air cells until they are perfectly dried, which re- 
 quires considerable length of time. If previously 
 immersed and filled with spirits of wine for a day or 
 two, they will be less liable to putrefy. When dried, 
 they are to be divided by incisions and preserved in 
 a glass vessel of oil of turpentine. 
 
 When lungs are too large for quicksilver distention, 
 they may be filled with air, though this is apt to es- 
 cape from the vessels when greatly distended, but it 
 is much the most convenient mode of filling them for 
 the purpose of drying. When dried they may be 
 divided into longitudinal and transverse slices, and 
 preserved in fine oil of turpentine. In this way they 
 are rendered transparent, and exhibit a beautiful vas- 
 cularity. 
 
 The intestines, when minutely injected may be dis- 
 tended with spirits of wine, in portions six inches 
 long, and after they have hardened a few days, in 
 pure spirits of wine, a portion may be cut away from 
 one side in order to exhibit their vascularity and val- 
 vulae conniventes. 
 14 
 
106 PREPARATIONS BY DISTENTION, 
 
 SECTION LX. 
 
 Dry preparations by distention with JUr, Hair, Wool, 
 Cotton, Quicksilver, Plaster of Paris. 
 
 In the many parts which require to be distended, 
 in order to drying them in their natural form, such 
 as bladders, hydatids, intestines, large blood-vessels, 
 larynx and pharynx, vagina uterus corpora caver- 
 nosa of the penis, &c. and where the nature of the 
 case will admit of it , air is always the best, as the 
 distention is more uniform ; for inflation the organ 
 must be entire, or nearly so ; but if it should have 
 small holes, they may be secured by passing a pin 
 through the edges, and winding a ligature round the 
 pin, which prevents its slipping off; the sharp end of 
 the pin is then to be clipped off to prevent its tearing 
 other places. The organ is to be cautiously distend- 
 ed, and if its blood-vessels have been previously 
 injected, it should be warmed before distention, as 
 the injection, if very cold, may break into innumer- 
 able pieces by the inflation. 
 
 When parts will not admit of inflation, for the 
 purpose of drying, and are large in substance, as 
 dropsical ovaria?, large arteries, aneurisms, the uterus, 
 the rectum, the large capsular ligaments, &c. they 
 may be distended with curled hair, such as is common- 
 ly used for stuffing chair bottoms, which may be had 
 
PREPARATIONS BY DISTENTION. 107 
 
 of the cabinet-makers and saddlers. For more deli- 
 cate preparations, as the Eustachian tube, the pha- 
 rynx, a small uterus, vagina, Fallopian tubes, and the 
 small capsular ligaments, we may use wool or cotton, 
 well oiled, to prevent its sticking to the part. Thus 
 prepared, they may be suspended in a current of 
 air to dry ; afterwards the hair, wool, or cotton, should 
 be removed as clean as possible, and the preparation 
 varnished. 
 
 SECTION LXL 
 
 The Larynx and Trachea and the Pharynx and oeso- 
 phagus may be preserved by surrounding the top of 
 the pharynx with a wire, fastening the same with a 
 needle and thread, so as to preserve the expanded 
 form, and then stuffing it, and the esophagus with oil- 
 ed cotton. The epiglottis will remain elevated so as 
 to exhibit the rima glottidis. When perfectly dried, 
 wash the cartilages of the larynx, to give them their 
 natural whiteness, and when dried again, remove the 
 distending substance and varnish. The short mus- 
 cles running over the larynx may be preserved. The 
 oshyoides may also be preserved in connexion with 
 the larynx. 
 
 SECTION LXII. 
 
 The Eustachian Tube is best exhibited in a head 
 divided vertically from the saggittal suture. Its 
 
108 PREPARATIONS BY DISTENTIOIT 
 
 mouth is very near the tonsil, and may be distended 
 with oiled cotton ; but generally, the common pro- 
 cess of drying leaves it sufficiently opened without 
 the aid of distention. 
 
 SECTION LXIII. 
 
 The vagina, hymen, bladder and rectum, may be pre- 
 pared in the following manner. 
 
 Make an incision from the pubis of a small subject 
 round each side of the labia and anus, about one inch 
 from them, and extend it to the coxcygis. Divide 
 the rectum four or five inches from the anus, and 
 dissect down round it and the bladder, to meet the 
 former outside incision. Draw the organs out of the 
 pelvis, and after repeated washings introduce a cork 
 into the anus, and surround it with a ligature, corres- 
 ponding to the sphincter ani, and stuff the/ectum with 
 curled hair or oiled cotton. Introduce a blowpipe 
 into the urethra, and secure it with a ligature ; then 
 inflate the bladder, and stop the pipe with a plug. 
 Distend the vagina with oiled cotton, so as to exhibit 
 the hymen ; and after dissecting away all cellular 
 substance, surround the skin of the perineum with a 
 wire, so as to preserve an expanded form of it, and 
 dry the preparation. Afterwards withdraw the dis- 
 tending substances and blowpipe, and varnish, and 
 afterwards cut open the bladder and varnish the in- 
 side of it. 
 
PREPARATIONS BY DISTENTION. 109 
 
 SECTION LXIV. 
 
 A dry preparation of the heart, to shew its cavities, 
 valves, chorda tendinea, fyc. 
 
 A heart for this purpose should be chosen free 
 from fat, and it is not necessary to preserve any con- 
 siderable length of the vessels. Macerate in water 
 several days, changing it frequently, to make the or- 
 gan as transparent as possible. When thus prepar- 
 ed, tie up the extremities of the vessels ; first fixing 
 a pipe in the superior cava, entering the right auri- 
 cle, to fill the right side of the heart, and another in 
 one of the pulmonary veins, entering the left auricle, 
 to fill the left side ; then inject with melted tallow 
 and suspend it in the air to dry ; the time necessary 
 for which will be several weeks, especially for the 
 inside. The next part of the process is, to cut off 
 the extremities of the vessels, and make such open- 
 ings into the auricles and ventricles, as will afford 
 the best view of the internal parts ; then place it at 
 a proper distance from the fire, and in such posi- 
 tions as may be best adapted for melting and drain- 
 ing out the tallow from the cavities and vessels ; or 
 it may be removed in part when in a cold state, by 
 breaking the tallow with a stick. Varnish with the 
 white spirit varnish, on account of its drying more 
 readily on a greasy surface. 
 
110 PREPARATIONS BY DISTENTION- 
 
 Organs may be distended with quicksilver, and af- 
 ter drying may have the same discharged. 
 
 SECTION LXV. 
 
 Dry Preparation of the Heart by Quicksilver Disten- 
 
 tion. 
 
 Fill .the heart with quicksilver, from the superior 
 vena cava and pulmonary vein, and tying every ves- 
 sel that leaks. It should be supported while drying 
 over a tray, as directed for the hand when injected 
 with quicksilver. The coronary vessels become 
 finely injected by this method, and the mercury may 
 be retained in them, by a small ligature passed round 
 them, near their mouths, or by pressing into them 
 a little common injection or wax behind the quick- 
 silver. 
 
 To fill the lungs in like manner with quicksilver, 
 see section 54. 
 
 SECTION LXVI. 
 
 Dry Preparation of the Uterus, Vagina and Hymen, 
 by Distention with Quicksilver. 
 
 Remove the vagina and uterus of a young subject, 
 encircle the labia with a wire fastening it to the os 
 externum with sutures, and suspend the preparation 
 
PREPARATIONS BY DISTENTION. Ill 
 
 in a frame, having the wire surrounding the labia, 
 most elevated. Remove all superfluous cellular sub- 
 stance, and tie the Fallapian tubes, then fill the uterus 
 and vagina with mercury till it reaches the hymen, 
 and place the preparation in a current of cool air to 
 dry, and afterwards pour out the mercury and var- 
 nish. 
 
 SECTION LXVII. 
 
 Distending Hollow Preparations with Plaster of Pa- 
 ris. 
 
 Parts may be distended with Plaster of Paris, 
 where either its removal is not afterwards necessary, 
 (as is generally intended, when quicksilver, tal- 
 low, c are used,) or where the quantity required is 
 so large, as to render it expensive to distend with 
 injection, as in case of distending the bladder, sto- 
 mach, dura mater, intestines, &c. The intention in 
 filling such parts with plaster is in some instances, 
 merely to give their natural figure, in others, a suffi- 
 cient firmness and resistance for the convenience of 
 making models to shew their external figure. Plas- 
 ter is particularly convenient, where winding canals 
 prevent the use of wool, hair, &c. or where the part 
 is so thin as to assume a rough, irregular, and unnat- 
 ural surface, from the unequal distention made by 
 those articles ; and it may be used with less incon- 
 venience than any other fluid material, when the 
 parts have been lacerated and sewed together again, 
 
112 PREPARATIONS BY DISTENTIOff. 
 
 being less disposed than air to escape through the 
 stitches. Thin injected preparations are also dis- 
 tended with it, to shew the distribution of blood-ves- 
 sels upon the white ground ; but the various purpo- 
 ses for which this material may be employed will 
 suggest themselves to one as he becomes acquainted 
 with its use. 
 
 Mix it so that it shall not be lumpy, and make it 
 rather thinner than for the common purpose of cast- 
 ing, so that it may run freely into all parts, and if in- 
 tended to fill fine tubes, as in distending the lungs, 
 strain it through a coarse cloth; but this should be 
 done as quickly as possible, or it will soon harden 
 and frustrate the intention. 
 
 Free the part from blood, air, and water, and rinse 
 the plaster in a glazed vessel, and pour it into the 
 part through a paper funnel ; or if a common funnel 
 is used, throw it into watef immediately before it 
 hardens. Secure the vessel when filled, with a liga- 
 ture, and if the mixture has not passed equally, move 
 it with the hand, and shake it before it loses its fluid- 
 ity. In distending the lungs, and other parts having 
 numerous fine tubes, it is necessary to force the part 
 with a bladder or large injecting syringe, and it should 
 contain the requisite quantity to fill them at once, as 
 the time necessary for replenishing the instrument 
 would allow the first portion to harden, and prevent 
 the passage of any more. 
 
113 
 
 CHAPTER V. 
 
 WET PREPARATIONS. 
 SECTION LXVIII. 
 
 Antiseptic Menstrua. 
 
 MANY preparations, and almost all pathological 
 ones, are best preserved in some antiseptic liquid. 
 Those generally employed are, 1. Alcohol, either 
 pure or diluted in the form of proof spirit ; 2. Al- 
 coholic solutions of a metallic, an alkaline, or an 
 earthy salt; 3. Aqueous solutions of the same salts; 
 4. Oils, particularly oil of turpentine ; 5. Acids ; 
 6. Acids and alcohol ; 7. Alcohol and oils ; 8. Am- 
 monia. 
 
 The alcohol used for preserving specimens may 
 vary in strength, according to their size and thick- 
 ness. All those that are thick and massy, should be 
 put into pure rectified spirits ; smaller ones may re- 
 quire only half the quantity of alcohol with water, 
 and such as are thin, as membranes, require only 
 common proof spirit. 
 15 
 
114 WET PREPARATIONS. 
 
 The salts usually added to proof spirit, to increase 
 its antiseptic quality, are, muriate of mercury, nitrate 
 of potash, muriate of soda, muriate of ammonia and 
 allum. When muriate of mercury is used, its weight 
 should be equal to one fourth of that of the prepara- 
 tion. The other salts may be considerably short of 
 the strength of saturated solutions, especially when 
 dissolved in spirit, as the unavoidable evaporation of 
 spirit will cause the salt to crystallize. 
 
 The essential or volatile oils, and especially that 
 of turpentine, are recommended for cartilages, fibro- 
 cartilages, tendons, and fibrous membranes to give 
 them a beautiful transparency. They also preserve 
 heads better. Many that were preserved by Ruysch 
 himself are now in the museum of natural history 
 in Paris, and still present the vividness of their natu- 
 ral colours. All those parts that are injected with 
 matter that is soluble in alcohol, or which have 
 bones in them, which acids would destroy, may be 
 preserved in volatile oils, provided they are not 
 bulky. 
 
 The acids used, are sulphuric, nitric, muriatic, 
 acetic and pyroligneous, diluted very much with dis- 
 tilled water. Sir Humphrey Davy suggested an 
 economical and convenient preparation of sulphuric 
 acid, which consists in burning sulphur matches over 
 water, in any glass or leaden vessel, agitating it 
 whenever the matches cease to burn ; and when the 
 water is sufficiently impregnated, filtering it, to render 
 
WET PREPARATIONS. 115 
 
 it clear and transparent. The only objection 1 have 
 heard to it is, that after a time, sulphur in form of a 
 fine powder is apt to appear in the glass. Mr. Hay- 
 den, Surgeon Dentist in Baltimore, has succeeded in 
 preserving anatomical specimens in a superior man- 
 ner with pyroligneous acid.* It should be rectified 
 and then diluted with water. Vinegar holding arse- 
 nic or corrosive sublimate in solution is useful. Chlo- 
 rate of lime or common bleaching salts greatly dilut- 
 ed has been tried with success. Acids are however 
 inadmissible where the preparation contains bone, 
 and they are apt to give the soft parts a glutinous 
 covering. 
 
 Proof spirit with a small portion of sulphuric, ni- 
 tric, or muriatic acid is valuable for preserving the 
 brain and nerves. 
 
 Alcohol and volatile oils are valuable for pre- 
 serving the brain and muscles. The lungs, liver and 
 ligaments, when long immersed, are not only preserv- 
 ed from putrefaction, but according to the experi- 
 ments of M. Bogros, this mixture will preserve their 
 flexibility. 
 
 The fluid used for wet preparations, whatever be its 
 kind, should always be clear and free from colour. 
 Generally speaking, proof spirit is found to be the 
 best of the foregoing, for almost all common purpo- 
 ses. They all destroy the colour of raw surfaces, and 
 thus change their natural appearance, and destroy the 
 
 * Medical Recorder for Jan. 1824, page 223. 
 
116 WET PREPARATIONS. 
 
 distinctive hue of the different textures. They are 
 the only means however of preserving morbid speci- 
 mens although they materially alter their natural ap- 
 pearance. It has long been a desideratum, therefore, 
 to have some fluid that would preserve not only the 
 form but the exact colours of soft parts removed in 
 surgical operations. The following is the only thing 
 that has within my knowledge been suggested, and 
 includes the last of the antiseptic fluids mentioned at 
 the head of this section. 
 
 SECTION LXIX. 
 
 To preserve the natural colours of specimens of 
 Morbid Anatomy. 
 
 Mr. Gaskoin, in the London Medical Gazette 
 1828, recommends the following means for preserv- 
 ing the appearances of diseased parts : 
 
 "Having removed the diseased part from the 
 body, it should be as little handled or dissected as 
 possible, especially when the effects of inflammation, 
 congestion &c. are to be preserved, as the blood may 
 be pressed from, or disturbed in, the minute vessels. 
 Let the blood which may have escaped from cut ves- 
 sels, be gently washed off from the surface, by a solu- 
 tion of the muriate of ammonia, or be absorbed by a 
 soft sponge, lighily applied. The part should then be 
 wrapped with care in old linen, and be immersed 
 
WET PREPARATIONS. 117 
 
 in one part of a saturated solution of the muriate of 
 
 ammonia, (common sal ammonise) and two of recti- 
 
 jfted spirits of wine. After two or three days the linen 
 
 may be removed, and the part restored to the fluid* 
 
 " Should the preparation be large, or from the 
 nature of the disease, contain a large quantity of 
 aqueous fluid, then an additional portion of the 
 muriate of ammonia in powder should be added, to 
 meet the excess of aqueous menstruum. 
 
 " The time necessary for maceration, will mainly 
 depend upon the size of the part to be preserved ; 
 but generally, from ten to fifteen days will be found 
 sufficient, although nothing can be lost by an extension 
 of the time. Being taken from the macerating fluid, 
 it should be again washed in a solution of the muri- 
 ate of ammonise, then dissected as much as requisite, 
 and be put up at once, in equal quantities of a saturated 
 solution of the above, with salt, in distilled water and 
 rectified spirit of wine. I should observe that, in 
 these proportions, the part is somewhat corrugated, 
 which is not the case if one-third of the saline solu- 
 tion be used with two of spirit ; yet, in the former 
 quantities, I have some reason to think the appear- 
 ances of disease may be more securely preserved.'* 
 
 This solution, he says, seems to have the property 
 of fixing the blood in the extreme ramifications, 
 without constringing the vessels themselves ; while 
 rectified spirit corrogating the delicate membranes 
 
118 WET PREPARATIONS. 
 
 of the minutest vessels, repels their contents into 
 the larger, the thicker coats of which are easily act- 
 ed on, and thus reduces the appearances of inflama- 
 tion, &e. 
 
 SECTION LXX. 
 Vessels to contain wet preparations. 
 
 These should be made cylindrical, in the form of 
 specie jars, varying in height and diameter according 
 to the form and magnitude of the pieces to be pre- 
 served. For broad thin pieces, jars may be flatten- 
 ed, giving their caliber an oval shape. The bottom 
 should expand to give them a safer standing, espe- 
 cially if they are tall and slender, and they should be 
 slightly contracted near the top, to give security to 
 the twine that is to bind the covering, and also to af- 
 ford a resting place for the ends of a cross bar of 
 white wood, or lead, or glass, to which the twine that 
 suspends the preparation may be attached ; above 
 this contraction, the mouth of the vessel may expand 
 again. Professor Horner of Philadelphia uses a tu- 
 bulated jar, formed like the above, but having a tube 
 in one side near the mouth, through which the jar 
 may be replenished, and thus save the trouble of re- 
 moving and replacing the covering. This small tube 
 is stopped with a ground stopper. 
 
WET PREPARATIONS. 119 
 
 Some jars are wanted of a broad and flat shape, to 
 preserve placentae, female breasts, &c- which may be 
 covered with plates of window glass, cut into a shape 
 to correspond with the edges of the basin- 
 
 A useful appendage to some of these jars is, glass 
 globes or floats, resembling the shape of a watch, and 
 having a glass loop on one side, like the eye of a but- 
 ton, to which light preparations may be attached by 
 a thread. 
 
 Very small portions that are to be immersed in 
 jars, may be attached to a thin plate of wax, wood or 
 glass, by pins or threads. 
 
 A small cross bar of lead, wood, or glass, is used 
 to suspend the preparation from, and is placed across 
 the mouth of the vessel as above mentioned. Or a 
 circular glass plate cut to suit the mouth of the jar, 
 may have a small glass loop like the eye of a button in 
 the centre of the plate, to which a thread that sus- 
 pends the preparation may be attached. 
 
 SECTION LXXI. 
 
 Manner of preparing and inclosing wet prepara- 
 tions. 
 
 All parts intended for preservation, should be first 
 macerated in water as long as they impart colour to 
 
120 WET PREPARATIONS. 
 
 it, and should be cleared of all unnecessary matter 
 that may obscure what is intended to be shown. It 
 should then be suspended in spirits, in a position the 
 most favourable for exhibiting the essential parts. If 
 hollow, as a bladder, hydatid,' intestine, &c. or if it 
 has any hollow parts, cavities or sinuses, necessary 
 to be shown, distend them with curled hair, wool, 
 cotton, or the like, and small ducts and vessels are 
 exhibited by the introduction of bristles, quills, or 
 bougies. The several parts being thus put in their 
 natural position, and suspended in spirits for a week 
 or ten days, become much harder and firmer in their 
 texture ; so that they will retain their position when 
 the hair, wool, and cotton are withdrawn to shew the 
 hollow parts that have been distended by them. The 
 preparation should then be put into a jar of the right 
 size and figure, filled with spirits or other liquid and 
 inclosed. 
 
 It is found to be attended with no small difficulty, 
 to enclose wet preparations in glasses, so as to pre- 
 vent effectually the evaporation of the spirits, which 
 occasions very considerable trouble, and no small 
 expense to keep a large anatomical collection in 
 good order. The method now commonly used is to 
 suspend them by a thread, which is brought over the 
 rim of the glass, and fastened to another, round the 
 neck ; but the thread so placed acts as a capillery 
 siphon, and leads the spirits out of the glass to the 
 neck, where it has an opportunity of evaporating, 
 and therefore is improper A better method is to 
 
WET PREPARATIONS. 121 
 
 suspend them by means of a glass float (as described 
 in Plate VII. Fig. 6 ) instead of a cork float, used by 
 some Anatomists, which is apt to colour the spirits. 
 When the mouth of the glass is small enough, a cork 
 may be fitted to it, and the suspending thread carried 
 through it, and secured on the top ; but such a cork 
 should be chosen as will not be likely to colour the 
 spirits, and should not stand above the brim. Some 
 place a piece of stick across the mouth of the glass, 
 and fasten the suspending thread to that ; either of 
 which may be used according to our convenience or 
 choice : oil has been sometimes used to cover the 
 surface of the spirits, in order to prevent its evapo- 
 ration ; but this will also sometimes stain the spirits, 
 or render it turbid, by being agitated together from 
 time to time. The floating globe, where the prepa- 
 ration is not too heavy, is undoubtedly the best meth- 
 od, as by it those several inconveniences are avoided. 
 The preparation being then properly suspended, the 
 edge of the glass is to be covered with mucilage of 
 gum arabic, a wet bladder drawn smooth and tight 
 over it, and bound down by fine packthread, wound 
 six or eight times round the neck of the glass ; this 
 being suffered to dry, is to be lightly rubbed over 
 with mucilage, and covered with a fine piece of tin 
 foil, cut so as to extend but just over the edge of the 
 glass, and rubbed down to it as close as possible ; 
 over this a second bladder is drawn tight as before, 
 and carefully bound down by as many regular turns 
 of packthread as will extend from the rim to the bulge 
 of the glass ; this second bladder should smoothly 
 16 
 
122 WET PREPARATIONS, 
 
 cover the bulge of the glass, and be confined in that 
 situation by a cord, binding it below until it is dry, 
 when the edges may be cut smooth, as shewn in Plate 
 VII. Sometimes the tin foil is put on first, and the 
 bladders over it ;* and I think that much the best 
 method : care should be taken that there are no holes 
 in the foil or bladders. 
 
 There is a mode of securing the spirits, which I 
 have found from many years' experience, more effectu- 
 al than those in present general use, which is to cover 
 the edge or rim of the glass, with fine soft Glazier's 
 putty ; then cover the mouth completely with a 
 piece of flat common window glass, cut to the exact 
 circumference of the rim of the vessel it is designed 
 to cover ; the putty should be laid on with great 
 smoothness, so as to guard against any air-holes ; 
 the surfaces of the glass to come in contact with the 
 putty, should be previously rubbed with a little boil- 
 ed linseed oil, the glass cover should be then care- 
 fully applied ; over this may be stretched a bladder 
 or two, and bound as before described, covering the 
 bulge of the vessel: when perfectly dry, the edge of 
 the bladder round the bulge, should be cut even with 
 a knife, and the bladder covered with a black var- 
 nisht, to make it more secure, defend it from wet, 
 and give it a neater appearance ; or the glass ves- 
 sels may be made with covers, fitted on with putty. 
 
 * We cannot in this way prevent the spirits from evaporation, so well as by 
 putting on a bladder first, as the bladder sticks firmly to the glass, which the 
 lead does not. 
 
 t Black varnish is made by mixing as much lamp black with the copal, or oil 
 rarnish, as will make it opaque. 
 
WET PREPARATION!. 12S 
 
 If the liquid in the jar contains an acid, the putty 
 will not answer, being liable to decomposition ; and 
 an objection exists against putty where spirits of tur- 
 pentine is used, on account of its tendency to pene- 
 trate and combine with the putty, keeping it soft and 
 miscible with the liquid. A lute may in such cases be 
 made of finely powered, and dry brick dust, four parts ; 
 common rosin, three parts ; yellow wax with suffi- 
 cient spirits of turpentine to mix it, one part. 
 
 Mr. Breschel thinks that for pure alcohol, the lute 
 ought to be made of gum mastich, chalk, and the white 
 of an egg. 
 
 Mr. Peron recommends for glass containing spi- 
 rits, a lute composed of common resin, red ochre, 
 yellow wax, and oil of turpentine. 
 
 India Rubber was expected for a time to come in- 
 to use as a covering to anatomical jars, but experi- 
 ence has proved, that spirits, and especially oil of 
 turpentine, dissolve it, and render it useless. 
 
124 
 
 CHAPTER VI. 
 
 DISSECTION, AND PREPARATION OF THE BRAIN AND NERVE*. 
 
 SECTION LXXII. 
 
 Preservation of the Brain. 
 
 The Brain and spinal marrow are preserved in 
 different fluids. The one most used is an alcoholic 
 solution of oxymuriate of mercury, made with two 
 ounces of the salt, to sixteen ounces of the alcohol. 
 In about twenty or thirty days the brain may be 
 withdrawn from the liquid and dried. The cerebral 
 and spinal nerves should be dissected with care, and 
 be drawn out with small pins ; the spinal marrow 
 may be spread out on a waxed board. 
 
 Mr. Lobstein, principal of the anatomical depart- 
 ment of Strasbourg, employs with success for pre- 
 serving the brain, a solution of white sugar in un- 
 coloured brandy. 
 
 Dr. Bush, an eminent anatomist in New York, 
 informs me, that his method of preserving the brain 
 is, to inclose it in muslin and then immerse it in 
 boiling oil for some time, and afterwards in alcohol. 
 
BRAIN AND NERVES- 125 
 
 M. Bogros of Paris immerses the brain in a mix- 
 ture of two parts of spirits of turpentine and one of 
 alcohol, which on account of their tendency to sep- 
 arate from each other, will require frequent agitation 
 with a syringe, drawing it out of the vessel and eject- 
 ing it back again. After a month the brain may be re- 
 moved and frequently covered with spirit-varnish 
 while it is drying. I have employed this means with 
 the most happy success. 
 
 Some anatomists recommend alcohol and muriatic 
 acid, and others alcohol and muriate of ammoniaB. 
 The method adopted by Swan for preserving the 
 brain and nerves is given hereafter. 
 
 The nerves are however, usually preserved in a 
 wet state, and common proof spirit is sufficiently 
 antiseptic for the purpose. 
 
 For the cerebral, facial and cervical nerves, with 
 the long nerves of the thorax and abdomen, and the 
 axillary plexus of one side, an adult subject is prefer- 
 able, and should be preserved in connexion in a large 
 glass case, or wooden keg. The arm of one side, 
 and the fore arm of the other, where the axillary 
 plexus is preserved, may be cut away, as also the 
 lower extremities. But for an entire preparation of 
 all the nerves it will be preferable to have a small 
 subject, and to preserve it entire in a glass, or in a 
 keg made of white wood. 
 
126 BRAIX AND NERVES. 
 
 SECTION LXXIII. 
 
 Dissection of the Nerves, of the Orbit and Face, to 
 shew their Distribution. 
 
 Make an incision from the lower part of the fore- 
 head over the sagittal suture to the occiput and turn 
 the scalp on each side and make a horizontal section 
 of the cranium with a saw ; then remove the brain 
 dividing the nerves close to it, from the first to the 
 last pair. Saw through the orbit or plate of the o s- 
 frontis on one side, in two places, leading from the 
 foramen opticum, and diverging towards each angle 
 of the eye, and raise it carefully so as to avoid 
 wounding the nerves. Observing the points at which 
 the 4th, 5th and 6th pairs of nerves pass through 
 the dura mater, dissect up the latter so as to show 
 the further course of these nerves. Attend particu- 
 larly to the gasserian ganglion of the fifth pair, and 
 the passage of the Gth through the cavernous sinus. 
 Dissect the dura mater from the fore part of the pe- 
 trous bone and the sphenoid bone, showing the cav- 
 ity which it forms here for the lodgment of the gang- 
 lion of the fifth pair, the branches of which are inter- 
 laced with the fibres of the dura mater. Lay open 
 the cavernous sinus, and display the turns of the caro- 
 tid artery, and the course of the sixth pair, and the 
 begining of the great sympathetic. 
 
 To continue the dissection of the fifth pair of 
 nerves, the sphenoid and temporal bones must be cut 
 
BRAIN AND NERVES. 127 
 
 down so as to lay open the foramen lacerum, and the 
 foramina rotundum and ovale. A small hammer may 
 in some parts be convenient for breaking and remov- 
 ing such portions of bone as cannot be reached with a 
 saw, and will be less likely to divide the nerve. Re- 
 move also the cheek bone on the same side, and di- 
 vide the lower jaw at the symphysis, and turn back 
 the side that is dissected, leaving it attached at the ar- 
 ticulation. 
 
 The nerves passing into the orbit are the 3d, or mo- 
 tor oculi, the 4th, or trochlearis, theopthalamic branch 
 of the 5th, and the (ith, or abducens, all which are to 
 be carefully traced from the outside of the optic 
 nerve to their places of distribution within the orbit 
 and nose, which you are to learn from the descrip- 
 tions of authors. 
 
 This will complete the dissection of the first branch 
 of the fifth pair of nerves, and the other two branches 
 the superior and inferior, and next to be traced which 
 will require care and patience, especially the superi- 
 or maxillary. This is lodged in the adep fossa, behind 
 the maxillary sinus of the upper jaw, amongst loose 
 fat, where it sends off many branches. The gang- 
 lion of Meikel, with the retrograde Videan nerve, 
 and the branches to the nose and palate, are exceed- 
 ingly difficult to follow. " The whole of this dissec- 
 tion must be done by breaking up the bones, and 
 their accidental fracture may tear away the chief 
 point of demonstration." It is therefore recommend- 
 ed by many eminent anatomists to immerse the head 
 
128 BRAIN AND NERVES. 
 
 alone of a subject in a weak acid ; of acid, 1 part, 
 and water 19 parts, for some months as directed for 
 destroying the earthy parts of bones, and afterwards 
 using the knife alone, (see section 75,) and preserv- 
 ing the preparation in spirits of turpentine. The 
 Videan nerve is with the greatest difficulty brought 
 to view by any other means. 
 
 Now turn to the other side of the head and trace 
 the portio dura of the seventh nerve or nervus com- 
 municans facei or lesser sympathetic, as it is some- 
 times called. It comes out from the stylo mastoid 
 foramen, and forms the pes anserinus under the paro- 
 tid gland. This^nerve is connected with the supra- 
 orbital nerve, the branches of the fifth on the temple, 
 the infra orbitary nerve on the cheek, those of the 
 chin, with the ninth and eighth and the sympathetic 
 and cervical nerves under the lobe of the ear. 
 
 The lower maxillary nerve gives one large branch 
 to the lower jaw, another to the larger called the 
 gustatory, a third branch passes into the ear, called 
 the chorda tympani, and some small branches go to 
 the ninth nerve and to the submaxillary gland. 
 
 The ninth nerve goes to the muscles of the tongue, 
 and a branch called descendens noni, goes down upon 
 the muscles of the throat, and to join the cervical 
 nerves. 
 
BRAIN AND NERVES. 129 
 
 SECTION LXXIV. 
 Dissection of the nerves of the Neck and Trunk. 
 
 In dissecting the nerves oj the neck, the side of the 
 skull is "to be cut down and the lower jaw taken 
 away which enables the dissector to arrive at the 
 parvagum, the glosso-pharyngeal and spinal accessa- 
 ry nerves making together the eighth pair. The 
 lesser branches being traced, follow the parvagum 
 down the neck to the throat, larynx and heart, its 
 recurrent branch round the great artery and back- 
 wards behind the trachea to the larynx. 
 
 Next trace the great sympathetic nerve lying near 
 the spine to the chest and the cervical nerves and 
 also the phrenic arising from the cervical. After 
 this dissect the external respiratory nerve which 
 arises from the cervical, like the phrenic, passes 
 through the arilla to the muscles clothing the chest. 
 
 The long nerves in the thorax may be traced 
 throughout their various distributions to the dia- 
 phragm, the ribs being cut away on each side to with- 
 in a few inches of the spine. The diaphragm may 
 be cut from the ribs and spread out to exhibit the 
 phrenic nerve and the parvagum. Here the dissec- 
 tion may stop unless the object be to go through the 
 trunk and preserve all in connexion. The spine is 
 therefore to be divided immediately below the dia- 
 17 
 
130 BRAIN AND NERVES- 
 
 phragm and the nerves being properly arranged the 
 preparation may be immersed in proof spirit. 
 
 If the subject be young and it is intended to ex- 
 hibit the whole nervous system in connexion, the 
 foregoing dissection is to be extended in the follow- 
 ing manner, into the abdomen. 
 
 The parvagum having coursed along the oesopha- 
 gus, passes the diaphragm with it to be distributed 
 upon the stomach. Raise the diaphragm and depress 
 the stomach and this nerve will exhibit " its distribu- 
 tion to the superior orifice and along the arches of 
 the stomach. Having exposed the nerves sent to 
 the upper side of the stomach, and down to the solar 
 plexus, he ties the lower orifice of the stomach, and 
 cuts away all the length of the intestines, excepting 
 a part of the duodenum and rectum." 
 
 " Raise the stomach, and seek the splanchnic 
 nerve (the anterior branch of the sympathetic in 
 the thorax) where it comes into the belly by the side 
 of the lesser muscle of the diaphragm. The semi- 
 lunar ganglion formed by this splanchnic nerve is 
 red and fleshy, resembling a small gland." , 
 
 The solar plexus or great central ganglion of the 
 abdomen is formed by numerous branches from the 
 two semilunar ganglions, and a plexus descends to 
 it from the nerves of the stomach. 
 
BRAIN AND NERVES. 131 
 
 Having found the two ganglia and traced them in- 
 to the great solar plexus which lies before the aorta, 
 and at the root of the ccelise artery, the lesser divi- 
 sion of nerves is to be traced from this centre. We 
 do not, however, now follow individual branches, but 
 meshes or plexus viz. the hepatic plexus, along 
 the veins and arteries of the biliary ducts, splenic 
 plexus along the splenic artery, the superior mesen- 
 teric plexus, the inferior mesenteric plexus, on the 
 upper and lower mesenteric vessels." 
 
 The next step is to lift " the kidney and its ves- 
 sels, and trace down the continued trunk of the sym- 
 pathetic nerve, which continues its course from the 
 thorax into the abdomen, keeping close on the side 
 of the spine. Here are to be observed the branches 
 it receives from the lumbar nerves ; the plexus which 
 it gives to the kidney ; the additional branches it 
 throws to the mesenteric plexus. From the plexus 
 of the kidney are to be traced the nerves to the tes- 
 ticle or ovaria and womb, and finally the hypogastric 
 plexus is to be shewn." 
 
 The nerves given off to the trunk and extremities 
 from the spinal marrow are described in all common 
 books on anatomy, and are more easily understood 
 than the foregoing. 
 
132 BRAIN AND NERVES. 
 
 SECTION LXXV. 
 
 Preparation of the cerebral nerves after dissolving 
 the bones with an acid. 
 
 There are two difficulties to be encountered in dis- 
 secting the cerebral nerves ; one is, the great length 
 of time necessary to finish the work and the conse- 
 quent putrefactive changes it undergoes ; the other 
 is, the obstacle presented in many places by bones. 
 These may be obviated by immersing the head after 
 the top of the cranium and the brain are removed, in 
 an acid liquid composed of muriatic acid one ounce, 
 and water one quart, during two or three months, when 
 it may be removed and dissected leisurely in mid- 
 summer, without the inconvenience of putrefaction, 
 and without the aid of hammer and saw. But the 
 acid, with which the preparation has become imbu- 
 ed, acts upon the knives and other instruments, much 
 to the inconvenience of the dissector. For tracing 
 the Videan nerve in the temporal bone, a weak acid 
 applied upon this particular part of the bone, answers 
 a much better purpose than mechanical violence. It 
 may be mjxed in proportion of one part of muriatic 
 acid to twenty of water, and the part being covered 
 with a thick slip of linen or paper, is to be moistened 
 with it frequently. 
 
BRAIN AND NERVES. 133 
 
 SECTION LXXVI. 
 
 Imitation of the Cerebral Nerves. 
 
 The deep situation, and intricate course of many 
 of the cerebral nerves render their dissection a diffi- 
 cult task to repeat, and the examination of them, af- 
 ter they are immersed in spirit, is attended with some 
 trouble. I have therefore found an imitation of them, 
 and particularly of orbitary and trifacial nerves with 
 white cotton thread, when faithfully executed, very 
 valuable for reference. 
 
 A dry preparation of the nerves was a great desid- 
 eratum with anatomists, and Mr. Swan has succeeded 
 in making them. His method is given at the end of 
 this work. 
 
134 
 
 CHAPTER VII. 
 
 PREPARATIONS BY MACERATION. 
 
 General Observations- 
 
 1. LET the water be frequently changed, until it is 
 no longer coloured with blood, but never after the 
 blood is steeped away. 2. Let the macerating pan 
 be set in a warm place, to facilitate putrefaction. 
 Summer heat is sufficient, but a cool place will pro- 
 duce adipocire. 3. Remember that the soft parts, 
 particularly the white textures surrounding bones, 
 are a long time in detaching themselves. 
 
 SECTION LXXVII. 
 
 Separating and preserving the Chirotheca, or cuti- 
 cle of the hand 9 head and podotheca, or cuticle of the 
 foot. 
 
 These preparations are easily made, especially 
 from the hands and feet of infants, where the skin is 
 of uniform thickness. A hand separated near the 
 middle of the fore arm and a foot above the ancle are 
 to be immersed in clean water, changing it as often 
 as it is coloured with blood. Macerate for some 
 
MACERATED PREPARATIONS. 135 
 
 days, or until putrefaction takes place to such a de- 
 gree as will entirely loosen the cuticle, and admit of 
 its being slipped off by the hand like a stocking. 
 Throw it into cold water and draw out the folds, 
 handling it very carefully by the fingers or toes, as it 
 will tear if suspended full of water by any other part. 
 Immerse it in a glass half filled with common proof 
 spirit, and by means of a tube introduced carefully 
 to the inside of the preparation, pour in more of the 
 spirit to distend and give it a natural appearance, and 
 to fill the glass. These preparations being light and 
 delicate, scarcely require any suspension and are apt 
 to be torn by the thread used for the purpose. 
 
 SECTION LXXVIII. 
 
 Preparing the Mr-vessels of the Lungs by Mace- 
 ration. 
 
 The lungs of a still born child are preferable on 
 some accounts to those of an adult. Pole prefers 
 the lungs of a slink calf. The process though offen- 
 sive to the olfactories is very simple. Macerate in 
 water until the soft texture can be easily broken 
 down with the fingers, which is to be done while the 
 preparation is under water. 
 
 A dry preparation of the bronchial vessels of a 
 large animal, as a horse, looks well. The lungs may 
 be thrown into an old barrel, and left to macerate 
 
136 MACERATED PREPARATIONS. 
 
 during a summer, and in the autumn it may be rolled 
 into a river, and its contents being cleaned, are after- 
 wards to be dried and varnished. 
 
 SECTION LXXIX. 
 
 Macerated preparation of the arteries and veins of 
 the hand and foot with the bones. 
 
 Inject the hand or foot both the arteries and veins 
 with quicksilver and then with wax. The warm 
 injection will be preferable to the cold. Immerse the 
 part in water for ten days, changing the water daily ; 
 then remove the skin as directed in section for mak- 
 ing the Chirotheca and Podotheca, macerate in a close 
 vessel filled with water during several weeks. As 
 soon as the soft parts are so far decomposed as to 
 be easily removed with the fingers and a stream of 
 water without injury to the vessels, the part is remov- 
 ed and cleaned and varnished. 
 
 SECTION LXXX. 
 Macerating and cleaning Bones. 
 
 As much of the fleshy parts should be taken from 
 the bones intended for preparation, as can conve- 
 niently be done ; but it is not necessary to separate 
 them from each other more than is required for the 
 convenience of placing them in a vessel, for the pur- 
 pose of maceration, as in this process it will readily 
 
MACERATED PREPARATIONS. 137 
 
 take place. The bones are to be laid in clean water, 
 of such a depth as to cover them, and the water 
 changed daily for about a week, or as long as it be- 
 comes discoloured with blood. They are now to re- 
 main without changing, till putrefaction has thorough- 
 ly destroyed all the remaining flesh and ligaments, 
 which will require from three to six months, more or 
 less, according to the season of the year, or tempera- 
 ture of the atmosphere, &c. In the extremities of the 
 large cylindrical bones, holes should be bored, about 
 the size of a quill, to give the water access to their 
 cavities, and a free exit to the medullary substance. 
 As the water evaporates from the vessel, it should be 
 so far renewed, as to keep the bones under its sur- 
 face, or they will acquire a disagreeable blackness, 
 and dust should be excluded by keeping the vessel 
 constantly covered. When the white textures are 
 destroyed, they are to be scraped, and again laid in 
 water a few days and well washed ; then immerse 
 them in lime water, or a solution of pearl-ash, made 
 with two ounces to a gallon of water, and after a 
 week, they are to be washed again in clean water. 
 They are then to be dried in the shade. Bleach 
 them in a pure air ; and the best place is on a sea- 
 shore where they can be daily washed with water. 
 
 The above is Pole's plan, but Cloquet and Bogros, 
 two eminent French anatomists, recommend different 
 methods. M. Cloquet directs the bones, after being 
 nearly cleared of their integuments, to be put into a 
 box, water tight, carefully cutting its cover. Two or 
 three pints only of water are put into the vessel, 
 18 
 
138 MACERATED PREPARATIONS. 
 
 which serves to keep the air humid, and renders it 
 more active as a solvent than water ; six weeks or 
 two months being sufficient to destroy the white tex- 
 tures. The box is then opened and filled with water, 
 and in eight or ten days the maceration is completed, 
 and the bones are rendered whiter than by the ordi- 
 nary process of maceration. 
 
 M. Bogros directs them to be macerated in water, 
 after the manner of Pole, but at the conclusion of 
 this, he directs them to be boiled four hours in a 
 strong solution of carbonate of potash, or in soap 
 suds, adding hot water as fast as it evaporates. They 
 are then to be washed frequently in cold water, and 
 dried each time quickly, and then moistened (not 
 steeped) in weak muriatic acid. The common 
 bleaching liquor, in a dilute state, will whiten bones, 
 but they should not be immersed in it for any length 
 of time. When bleached they may be varnished 
 with the white of an egg. 
 
 SECTION LXXXI. 
 Preparing the Cancelli of bones. 
 
 Preparations of this kind are made from the cylin- 
 drical bones ; generally the os femoris, from its be- 
 ing the most complete cylinder ; and the middle por- 
 tion only of the bone should be used, where the can- 
 celli are most delicate. The bone being firmly fix- 
 
MACERATED PREPARATION*. 
 
 ed, so as not to jar and injure the cancelli, cut it into 
 portions of about two inches length, with a fine saw ; 
 macerate them in clean water two or three months, 
 or until the oil has escaped from the cavity ; then dry 
 them, and the delicate reticulated structure of the 
 cancelli will appear beautifully distributed through 
 the cavity. These preparations should always be 
 made of recent bones, and handled with great care, 
 as by a fall, the beauty of the preparation will proba- 
 bly be destroyed. 
 
 SECTION LXXXII. 
 
 Preparing a natural human skeleton. 
 
 Natural skeletons are made by leaving the liga- 
 ments of the joints to preserve the connexion of the 
 bones. Very young subjects are unsuitable for mak- 
 ing artificial skeletons from, on account of the great 
 portion of cartilage that enters into the structure of 
 their joints ; the natural ligaments are therefore left 
 in these to connect the bones. But the ligaments 
 themselves are an interesting part of anatomy to the 
 surgeon, and most of them can be advantageously ex- 
 hibited, especially on an adult subject, in the dried 
 state, although they do not, as usually prepared, af- 
 ford any motion to the joints as artificial skeletons do. 
 The most favourable season for making them is the 
 spring. 
 
 The large cavities of the trunk being cleared, with- 
 out removing or dividing the sternum, wash out the 
 
140 MACERATED PREPARATIONS. 
 
 brain through an opening made with a trephine, far 
 back in the sagittal suture ; or, by sawing of the top of 
 the cranium on one side of the sagittal suture ver- 
 tically, and meeting the section by a horizontal one. 
 
 Dissect the blood-vessels, muscles, &c. if desired, 
 taking care not to wound any of the ligaments. The 
 arms, with the scapula and clavicle are to be dissect- 
 ed from the trunk, and afterwards replaced and fas- 
 tened with wires. A large flexible wire, flattened 
 and curved at its extremity, is to be introduced into 
 the spinal canal, to draw out the upper part of the 
 marrow ; the remainder is to be pressed down to the 
 opening in the sacrum. A solution of carbonate of 
 potash is injected into the canal, to wash out any 
 loose matter that remains. 
 
 Dissect the ligaments in the following order. First, 
 those of the head, then of the vertebral column, the 
 pelvis, the back part of the ribs, the feet, hands, 
 knees, ankles, shoulders, and lastly, those of the 
 breast. In this order, the most spongy articulations 
 are left to macerate longest. The individual liga- 
 ments that are to be exhibited, are described in every 
 system of anatomy. During the dissection, from 
 first to last, those that are cleaned should be kept 
 covered with wet cloths, to protect them from dust, 
 and prevent their drying until the work is finished 
 and in the intervals of dissection the skeleton should 
 be kept in clean water and covered ; and every time 
 the preparation is taken out of the water, the liga- 
 
MACERATOD PREPARATIONS. 141 
 
 ments are to be wiped in the direction of their fibres. 
 The capsules of the joints are not to be opened, and 
 should be so dissected as to exhibit their natural 
 thickness. Scrape the periosteum from the bones 
 every where, excepting at the ends of the ribs where 
 the cartilages join. 
 
 When the skeleton is thus deprived of all its soft 
 parts, macerate it, changing the water daily till it 
 ceases to be coloured, or to present globules of oil 
 upon its surface. If continued too long, the liga- 
 ments are injured and weakened in their attachment 
 to the bones. In about ten days, it is to be washed 
 in clean water, slightly acidulated with nitric or mu- 
 riatic acid, to destroy the Iarba3 of insects. Thus 
 prepared, the capsular ligaments are to be opened 
 by a small incision, to let out the synovia, and hair 
 smeared with soap and camphor is introduced to 
 keep them distended to their natural fulness. 
 
 The skeleton may now be suspended in the shade, 
 exposed to a draft air, and particular attention should 
 be paid to the position and condition of every joint, 
 that it may not present distortions. When dried 
 varnish it. 
 
142 MACERATED PREPjftlATIONS, 
 
 SECTION LXXXIII. 
 
 Maceration and preparation of a natural Skeleton of 
 a Fcetus, or very young Child. 
 
 This preparation requires more caution in the use 
 of the knife than an adult, on account of the greater 
 proportion of cartilages that connect the bones, and 
 should not be macerated so long. Preserve the 
 spine of the right curve, by a piece of wood attached 
 to its back, and fill the chest with hair to preserve 
 its form. The tympanum of the ear should be pre- 
 served on one side, and partially cut away on the 
 other, leaving the centre where the malleus is attach- 
 ed. 
 
 SECTION LXXXIV. 
 
 Preservation of the Ligaments of the joints in a flex- 
 ible state when dry. 
 
 To exhibit the motion of the joints, by rendering 
 their natural ligaments flexible, has long been a de- 
 sideratum. M. M. Cloquet and Bogros have arrived 
 at success by different means. M. Bogros' plan con- 
 sists, in keeping the parts plunged many weeks in a 
 mixture of two parts of essential oil of turpentine, 
 and one of alcohol. He discovered by accident, 
 that when removed from this mixture, the ligaments 
 retain a remarkable suppleness, without losing any of 
 
MACERATED PREPARATIONS. 143 
 
 their solidity. The two liquids separate from each 
 other, and require frequent incorporation, by pour- 
 ing them out and back again, or by inverting the ves- 
 sel. 
 
 M. Cloquet describes his method thus : " Dissolve 
 four pounds of muriate of soda and one of alum in 
 six pints of water. The ligaments carefully prepar- 
 ed, are immersed in this fifteen or twenty days, tak- 
 ing care to move them often in the solution, to press 
 and twist, and gently strike them with a piece of 
 light wood. By this means they are rendered supple. 
 Remove the preparation from the liquid and dry it 
 four or five days moving it from time to time, and re- 
 peat the striking as before. Immerse them in strong 
 soap-water, (a pound to three pints of water) then 
 remove them and repeat the striking often for seven 
 or eight days, this being the time necessary to re- 
 move the salts and to permit the soap to strike into 
 the inner fibres in the place of the alum. Thirty or 
 forty days after the operation, wash the ligaments in 
 a solution of carbonate of soda, (one ounce to two 
 pints of water) and let them dry. By this pro- 
 cess, variously modified, the ligaments may be ren- 
 dered perfectly supple, of a dull greyish colour, much 
 like chamois leather, very tough, and affording all 
 the ordinary motions of joints." 
 
 The ligaments can likewise be preserved perfectly 
 supple, in a mixture of equal parts of olive oil and 
 essence of turpentine. 
 
14 t MACERATED PREPARATIONS. 
 
 In whatever way the ligaments are preserved dry, 
 they are to be protected from insects, by some liquor, 
 as a weak nitric or muriatic acid, or the vestemental 
 liquor of Duplex, or the alcoholic solution of arseni- 
 cal soap, or the following preservative of Nicolas. 
 
 White soap in fine shavings, 1 ounce ; 
 Powder of camphor, 2 ounces ; 
 Colocynth grossly powdered, 2 ounces ; 
 Rectified alcohol, 2 pounds. 
 
 Macerate during four or five days in a bottle, fre- 
 quently shaking it, filter through paper and preserve 
 in a well stopped viol. When the layer of preservative 
 liquor is perfectly dried to the ligaments, it only re- 
 mains, to varnish the skeleton with a mixture of white 
 of egg and diluted alcohol ; or what is better, with 
 a varnish of savarak, to which may be added an equal 
 quantity of gum arabic, dissolved in water, a little 
 sugar candy, and the white of an egg. This varnish 
 which is very brilliant, scales less than common var- 
 nish. The varnish may be applied two or three 
 times. 
 
 SECTION LXXXV. 
 Preparation of the periosteum. 
 
 To exhibit the form and disposition of this mem- 
 brane in a long bone, take one that has been injected 
 with the minute varnish, and vermillion injection ; re- 
 
MACERATED PREPARATIONS. 145 
 
 move the soft parts, carefully avoiding the periosteum : 
 Then make a longitudinal incision on the sides of the 
 bone, the whole length of its shaft, and with the han- 
 dle of the scalpel, detach it from the bone, and divide 
 the bone, with a Hey's saw, or strong bone-knippers, 
 near its middle. The two divided ends are then 
 thrust out from the periosteum, and cut off near their 
 heads, by which the periosteum is left a cylinder, ter- 
 minated by the articulating ends. After washing 
 for some time, it is dried, and extended, as much as 
 possible, by the two ends ; the incised edges are 
 drawn together, and the whole is preserved in 
 the form of a cylinder. Its thickness and solidity are 
 increased, by applying, after extension and drying, 
 several layers of fish glue, by which it may be made 
 to sustain itself in any posture. 
 
 SECTION LXXXVI. 
 To render solid bones flexible and transparent. 
 
 Take a recent bone of the flat kind, as a scapulae, 
 and a long slender bone, as a fibula?, and macerate 
 them several weeks in water, frequently changing 
 it. Then immerse it in a mixture consisting of twen- 
 ty parts of water to one of muriatic acid. The ves- 
 sel should be of such a shape as to preserve the 
 bone completely covered. In three, six or nine 
 months according to the thickness of the bone, it will 
 become flexible, but as the bone will neutralize 
 some of the acid in the time, a very small quantity 
 
 19 
 
14(5 MACERATED PREPARATIONS. 
 
 should be occasionally added. When the process is 
 completed, immerse the substance in warm water, 
 which is to be renewed two or three times to remove 
 all the acid, and afterwards steep it in clean cold wa- 
 ter for some time. It is now to be dried, in a current 
 of cool air, and its substance will preserve the primi- 
 tive form of the bone, being of a brownish white, and 
 semi-transparent, and will exhibit the fibres, canals 
 and vessels. Immersed in a glass vessel of fine oil 
 of turpentine, it will immediately be penetrated with 
 it, and assume a beautiful transparency, especially 
 if the bone have little thickness, as a scapula, and 
 when held up to the light it will exhibit the blood- 
 vessels beautifully arborescent. In this state the 
 long bone may be tied in a knot, and the flat one roll- 
 ed up like a parchment, and put into a narrow mouth- 
 ed flask of this fluid, where it will expand by its own 
 elasticity, and will puzzle the inexperienced observ- 
 er to explain how it was introduced ; and especially 
 if, instead of the drying, it is immediately immersed 
 in a flask of spirits of wine which by preventing its 
 transparency will give it still more the appearance of 
 a real bone. 
 
 SECTION LXXXVII. 
 Cleaning and preparing diseased bones. 
 
 The directions given for cleaning healthy bones 
 are applicable to diseased ones, with the additional 
 one to handle them very carefully, both in respect to 
 
MACERATED PREPARATIONS. 147 
 
 using the knife in removing the soft parts that sur- 
 round them, that the delicate lamina and spinala may 
 not be injured, and the handling of them during the 
 process of maceration and cleaning. They are to be 
 steeped in water, changing it as long as any colour 
 is imparted to it, and then macerated from five to 
 eight months, according to the state of the weather, 
 and then washed in a stream of water, as directed for 
 corroded preparations of the arteries. After being 
 perfectly cleaned, they may be bleached according to 
 directions given in Section 80. To preserve them 
 safely, they should be inclosed in a glass case. 
 
 SECTION LXXXVIII. 
 
 Preparations to exhibit the development and growth 
 of Bones. 
 
 Macerate a foetus entire, from one to six weeks 
 according to its age, and separate the bones, which 
 after frequent washing and bleaching are to be arrang- 
 ed on a black paste-board, and fastened to it with fine 
 threads. They may be arranged in three vertical 
 lines ; in the middle line are to be single bones ; and 
 on each side of this, aline of the double bones, one line 
 having one face of the bones presented and the other 
 presenting the opposite face. In this way different 
 sets of bones may be arranged, varying, according 
 to their maturity. 
 
148 MACERATED PREPARATIONS. 
 
 A pelvis of a child one or two years old exhibits 
 the separate bones of the ossa-innominata meeting 
 to form the glenoid cavity. 
 
 The jaw bones of a child six to eight years old, 
 exhibits the two sets of teeth,- the permanent ones 
 following the deciduous ones; and the front face of 
 them may be brought to view, by filing through their 
 alveolar encasement. 
 
 SECTION LXXXIX. 
 Cleaning and separating the Bones of the Head. 
 
 The subject should be between the age of fifteen 
 and twenty years ; later than this they become con- 
 solidated at the sutures. 
 
 Remove the integuments from the head, and wash 
 out the brain through the foramen magnum, previ- 
 ously breaking it down with a stick, Macerate some 
 weeks, changing the water frequently, and then 
 scrape off the periosteum and other remaining soft 
 substances. Fill the cranium with dried peas, and 
 immerse it in water, and the swelling of the peas viill 
 soon force the bones apart at the largest sutures, af- 
 ter which, the other bones can be separated by the 
 hand. Bleach the bones as directed in section 80, 
 and cover them with clean and colourless varnish. 
 
149 
 
 CHAPTER VIII. 
 
 ARTICULATIONS AND SECTIONS OF THE SKELETON.* 
 
 SECTION XC. 
 Articulations of the different parts of the Skeleton. 
 
 We commonly begin with the bones of the trunk, 
 and then pass to the members. 
 
 THE HEA D. Articulation of the teeth. The teeth 
 are fixed in their sockets by dipping the roots in li- 
 quid isinglass. Articulation of the temporal and max- 
 illary bones. 1st. To fasten the condyle in the gle- 
 noid cavity, make a hole beginning at the back part of 
 the neck of the lower jaw, and coming out at the up- 
 per and middle part of its condyle. Make a hole rising 
 perpendicularly from the middle of the glenoid cavi- 
 ty to the upper and middle part of the base of the zy- 
 gomatic process : pass a wire through these two 
 openings, and fix it by two hooks. 2d. To imitate 
 
 * Dictionaire dea aciencei medicales.Tome LII. page 360. 
 
150 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 
 
 the rising and falling of the lower jaw, make on each 
 side two very small holes, one at the top of the coro- 
 noids process, the other beginning at the back of 
 angular process and ending in the orbit; take a 
 spiral spring a line and a half in diameter, and two 
 inches long ; fix its lower extremity by a hook to the 
 coronoid process, give the spring its proper degree of 
 tension, and by a second hook fasten its upper ex- 
 tremity to the orbit. The lower jaw, being thus 
 jointed can be moved, will be easily pressed down, 
 and rise of its own accord to the upper. 
 
 Articulation of the vertebral column. On the body 
 of each vertebra cut a piece of thick leather corres- 
 ponding exactly in shape to the inte-vertebral sub- 
 stance ; there should be twenty-three of these pieces ; 
 they should be thicker before than behind in the 
 cervical and lumbar regions, and in the dorsal region 
 thicker behind than before, in order to accommodate 
 them to the natural curve of the spine. Through 
 the body of each vertebra and each piece of leather, 
 make two parallel, lateral holes passing from top to 
 bottom. The holes of the second cervical vertebra 
 should be made obliquely, so as to pass from the 
 lower to the back part of its body. Two holes like 
 those of the vertebra should be made to pass from 
 the great articulating surface of the sacrum to the 
 anterior face of its first division- 
 
 Take a brass wire four feet long ; bend it double 
 so as to form an arch ; into this arch introduce a spi- 
 ral spring as long as the distance between the two 
 
ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 151 
 
 openings on the anterior face of the sacrum. Through 
 the openings made in the sacrum, the bodies of the 
 vertebrae, and the pieces of leather, pass the ends of 
 the wire on each side successively from the bottom 
 to the top ; they will come out at the posterior face 
 of the second cervical vertebra. Draw them strong- 
 ly upwards, and thus the sacrum, the vertebrae, and 
 the pieces of leather will be pressed against each 
 other. The spring applied transversely on the ante- 
 rior face of the sacrum keeps this part from being 
 cut by the pressure of the wire. Each of the ex- 
 tremities of the wire is kept in its place by a hook at 
 the back of the second vertebra. The proper stabil- 
 ity of the vertebral column is preserved, and its 
 curves are securely maintained by introducing into 
 its canal the strip of metal which we mentioned when 
 giving general rules for adjusting the articulations. 
 This strip of metal is retained by means of brass wires 
 passed through holes drilled in it at different points, 
 and attached behind to the back part of the plates of 
 the vertebrae which should be pierced with small 
 holes to receive them. 
 
 Articulation of the Atlas and Dentatus. 
 
 To arrange this articulation make a little transverse 
 groove on the back of the odontoid process about one 
 line in depth, with a small saw ; catch into this groove 
 the arch of a bent wire, the two extremities of which 
 pass forwards through two holes made in the anteri- 
 or arch of the atlas in the same direction and about 
 four lines distant from each other. By pulling these 
 
152 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 
 
 extremities and securing them firmly by means of two 
 hooks on the fore part of the small arch of the atlas, 
 the odontoid process is fixed so that it can turn easily 
 in the ring which holds it and thus preserve its natu- 
 ral movements. 
 
 Articulation of the Sacrum and Coccyx. 
 
 Reunite the three pieces of the coccyx by means 
 of a triangular plate of the proper length ; carry it 
 past the largest extremity of the summit of the 
 sacrum at a point a little distant from its anterior face, 
 and bend the two extremities of this plate into rings, 
 one on the anterior face of the sacrum, the other on 
 a level with the last piece of the coccyx. 
 
 Articulations of the Ribs. 
 
 Begin by articulating them with the vertebral 
 column, proceeding from above downwards. To do 
 this, fix the head of the right and left ribs two by 
 two to the vertebra, by means of a wire passed 
 through an opening made in the head of the rib from 
 the fore to the back part, and going through the cor- 
 responding intervertebral substance ; fasten the two 
 extremities of the wire by a hook drawn very tightly. 
 To each transverse process fasten the corresponding 
 part of the rib by putting a wire through a hole made 
 in each, and securing it by two hooks, one on the 
 fore part of the rib, the other on the back of the 
 transverse process- Having thus articulated the ribs 
 with the vertebral column, keep them at equal distan- 
 
ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 153 
 
 ces by passing a wire from top to bottom through 
 holes made in their middle. Between each intercos- 
 tal space, insert into the wire a piece of spiral spring 
 of a proper length, and fix the two extremities of 
 the wire by hooks, the upper to the posterior plate 
 of one of the last cervical vertebra, and the lower 
 to the transverse process of the first or second lum- 
 bar vertebra. 
 
 To articulate the ribs with the sternum, which 
 should have been preserved with its cartilages, pierce 
 the extremities of each with holes perpendicular to 
 their surface. Into the hole in the rib and the carti- 
 lage, push the two ends of a bent wire, so that they 
 may come out in the interior of the chest ; after hav- 
 ing tightened them sufficiently, fasten them by hooks. 
 
 Articulations oj the pelvis. Articulation of the 
 sacrum and ilium. Make two holes on each side of 
 the sacrum one above the other, and at the distance 
 of about an inch, passing obliquely from the side 
 part of the anterior face to the lateral articulating 
 surface. At the corresponding points of the articu- 
 ating surface of the ilium, make holes coming out at 
 ts back part ; unite the two bones by a bent brass 
 wire, bringing the middle of it against the sacrum 
 and fixing its extremities by a double hook at the 
 )ack of the ilium. 
 20 
 
154 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES, 
 
 Articulation of the Pubis. 
 
 Wrap up in a piece of leather a plate of cork of an 
 oblong shape like that of the pubis, and much thicker 
 before than behind, to imitate the fibro-cartilage 
 belonging to the artfaulation. Place this between the 
 bones of the pubis ; pierce both these bones through, 
 from before backwards, with two holes ; through the 
 two upper openings pass a wire transversely, with 
 its curve embracing the pubes in front, and twisting 
 its extremities together on the back of the symphysis. 
 Do the same with the lower holes- 
 
 Articulation of the occiput and atlas. 
 
 The following appears to be the best manner of 
 adjusting this articulation : fix a brass pin, or what is 
 better, a screw without a head into the fore part of 
 each condyle. The lower extremity should project 
 about six lines, and be received in a hole bored in 
 the corresponding of each articulating surface of the 
 atlas. The requisite stability is given to this articu- 
 lation, by means of a nut with handles at the upper 
 extremity of the strip of metal supporting the spine, 
 which we have said passes through an opening in the 
 upper part of the cranium ; this nut presses the head 
 upon the first vertebra and prevents the pins from 
 escaping from the holes. The contrivance at the 
 same time allows the rotation of the head upon the 
 dentatus. 
 
ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 155 
 
 Articulation of the acromion and clavicle. 
 
 Fix the extremity of the clavicle to the acromion 
 process by a brass wire passed through two vertical 
 holes made in this bone, and fasten its two extremi- 
 ties by a hook to the lower part of the articulation. 
 Fix the base of the coracoid process to the corres- 
 ponding part of the clavicle, by passing a thick wire 
 vertically through the two bones, and fasten the two 
 extremities of the wire by two hooks, one above the 
 clavicle and the other below the coracoid process. 
 It is well to preserve the small distance commonly 
 found between these two bones, by a very short spi- 
 ral spring. 
 
 Articulation of the sternum and clavicle* 
 
 The slight, shuffling motion belonging to this artic- 
 ulation, may be preserved in the following manner : 
 make a hole in the sternum, beginning at the middle 
 of its articulating surface and coming out near the top 
 of its posterior face. Let this opening be large 
 enough to receive both ends of a bent brass wire ; fas- 
 ten these two ends behind by a double hook, so as to 
 obtain a kind of little ring at the upper and front part 
 of the sternum, formed by the projecting part of 
 the wire. Through this little ring pass another bent 
 wire, the extremities of which go through a hole 
 made in the corresponding part of the clavicle, and 
 are secured like the others. In this manner the 
 clavicle and sternum will be articulated by two rings 
 connected with each other, and susceptible of motion. 
 
 The scapula must also be fixed against the ribs by 
 wires attached to its posterior and inferior angles, 
 
156 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 
 
 and to the corresponding points of the second and 
 seventh ribs. For these simple attachments may be 
 substituted two clasps which pass through the above 
 mentioned ribs, and can be opened or shut at pleasure. 
 
 Articulation of the scapula and hitmerus. 
 
 The common method of proceeding is to make an 
 aperture beginning at the back of the neck of the hu- 
 merus, and coming out at the middle of its head. A 
 pin is then introduced, and its inferior extremity fixed 
 by a hook, so that the superior extremity shall be re- 
 ceived in a hole passing perpendicularly through the 
 glenoid cavity of the scapula, and coming out at the 
 anterior part of the fossa subspinalis, where a new 
 hook secures the pin : but M. Cloquet (in the Disser- 
 tation above cited, page 55th,) says with good rea- 
 son that by this method, the articulation is far from 
 possessing its natural free movements, and proposes 
 the following process, which he says he has employ- 
 ed with advantage. " It consists in making the cen- 
 tre of the head of the bone, the centre also of motion. 
 To accomplish this, make with a saw two incisions 
 crossing each other at right angles and penetrating 
 to the centre of the head of the humerus ; take a pin 
 jointed in its middle by two rings passing through 
 each other. Pierce a hole below the great tubercle 
 coming out precisely in the centre of the head, at the 
 place where the two cuts made by the saw cross 
 each other at their deepest part ; introduce the pin 
 by this opening, and when its joint has reached the 
 centre of the bone, of which you must convince your- 
 self by moving the upper portion through each of the 
 
ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 157 
 
 channels made by the saw successively ; fasten the 
 lower portion by a hook, and pass the upper portion 
 of the pin through another hole made in the middle 
 of the glenoid cavity, and fasten that also by a hook. 
 This manner of articulating the humerus admits of 
 very extended motion in the four most important 
 directions, without displacing the head from the gle- 
 noid cavity." 
 
 Articulation of the Humerus and Ulna. 
 
 1st. Make a hole passing across from the anterior 
 part of the internal condyle of the humerus, to the 
 external and middle part of the outer condyle ; this 
 hole will be parallel to the axis of motion in the joint. 
 2d. Make, with a saw, a perpendicular slit directed 
 from before backward, in the groove which separates 
 the trochlea from that projection of the humerus 
 which is received between the radius and ulna, and 
 terminating in the cavity which receives the olecra- 
 non. 3d. With a narrow chisel, make a slit five lines 
 in length, and eight or ten in depth, in the middle of 
 the projection which divides the great sigmoid cavity 
 of the ulna. Fix into this slit a slip of brass, fifteen 
 or sixteen lines long, and five wide ; secure it 
 by a pin passing through it and the base of the ole- 
 cranon. Introduce the free part of the brass slip 
 into the slit made in the humerus, and when the 
 bones are exactly in contact, pass a drill through the 
 hole made in the inner condyle, and pierce the slip of 
 brass ; fasten it to the humerus so that it will move 
 easily, by a pin, which will form the axis of its mo- 
 tion. 
 
158 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES- 
 
 Articulation of the Radius and Ulna. 
 
 The following process is pointed out by M. Clo- 
 quet as best for preserving the natural movements of 
 the radius on the ulna. Make a hole transversely, be- 
 ginning at the upper part of the outer face of the ul- 
 na, four or five lines under the lesser sigmoid cavity* 
 and coming out at the corresponding part of the in- 
 ternal face. Pass through this opening, from with- 
 out inwards, the two ends of a bent wire ; make a 
 little ring in the wire placed vertically directly under 
 the lesser sigmoid cavity ; fasten the two ends of the 
 wire on the inner side by hooking them together. 
 2d. Make a transverse hole in the back part of the 
 neck of the radius, at the same height with the ring 
 on the ulna ; pass a wire through the ring, carry its 
 extremities in opposite directions through the hole 
 in the neck of the radius, and fasten each of them by 
 a hook. By this contrivance the neck of the radius 
 is embraced, before and at the sides, through three 
 quarters of its circumference, by a large ring which 
 passes through the small ring on the ulna, and allows 
 the head of the radius to turn in the lesser sigmoid 
 cavity. A similar arrangement is employed for the 
 lower articulation of the same bones, but here the 
 little vertical ring is on the inner side of the lower 
 end of the radius and the great horizontal ring up 
 on the ulna. 
 
 Articulations of the Bones of the Carpus. 
 
 The bones of each row must be separately articu- 
 lated ; the first row by making holes in the scap- 
 
ARTICULATION AND SECTION OP BONES. 159 
 
 hoides, the lunare, and cuneiforme through the mid- 
 dle of their lateral articulating surfaces, and from the 
 fore to the back part of the pisiforme ; a wire must 
 then be passed, through them, and one of its extrem- 
 ities fastened at the fore part of the pisiforme, the 
 other at the outside of the scaphoides. The second 
 row is connected transversely in a similar manner. 
 
 To unite the two rows thus separately articulated, 
 1st, make an opening in the scaphoides, beginning at 
 its upper extremity and bifurcating in the interior of 
 the bone in such a manner that one hole comes out 
 in the middle of that articulating surface which is 
 united to the trapezium, and the other by that which 
 is joined to the trapezoides. Pass the two ends of a 
 wire into these holes ; make one go through the tra- 
 pezium and the other through the trapezoides. Let 
 the two ends of the wire remain, to articulate the two 
 last bones with the two first of the metacarpus. 2d, 
 make an aperture in the middle of the upper face of 
 the os lunare, and continue it through the whole 
 length of the os magnum, from the middle of its head 
 to the inferior surface which is articulated with the 
 third bone of the metacarpus. Pass a wire through 
 this hole, secure its upper extremity by a hook, and 
 preserve its projecting lower extremity for the ar- 
 ticulation of the os magnum with the bones of the 
 metacarpus, 3d, make a hole in the highest part of 
 the cuneiforme like that in the scaphoides, that is to 
 say, single at its commencement, and dividing lower 
 down into two branches which come out near each 
 
160 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 
 
 other, on that surface of the bone which is united to 
 the cuneiforme ; continue the same passages into the 
 last mentioned bone, by making two holes, beginning 
 at its upper surface and coming ,put, one at the mid- 
 dle of that face of the cuneiforme which joins the 
 fourth bone of the metacarpus, the other at the sur- 
 face which joins the fifth metacarpal bone. 
 
 Articulation of the Carpus and Metacarpus. 
 
 The bones of the carpus are to be united to those 
 of the metacarpus by the ends of the bent wires 
 which served to articulate the bones of the first row 
 of the carpus with those of the second, and which 
 come out by the holes made in the trapezium, the 
 trapezoides, the os magnum, and the unciforme. To 
 do this, make an oblique opening in each of the 
 metacarpal bones beginning at the middle of its head, 
 and after passing the distance of six or seven lines, 
 coming out at the upper part of their palmae surface. 
 Introduce the corresponding wires into these holes, 
 and fasten each of them by a hook. The four last 
 bones of the metacarpus must be connected with each 
 other at their lower extremity. This is done by 
 passing a wire through holes made transversely in 
 each of them at the point where the head is united to 
 the body. Each end of the wire should be made fast 
 by a hook, and the bones of the metacarpus may be 
 kept at a slight distance from each other by fixing 
 between them a short piece of spiral spring. 
 
ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 161 
 
 Articulations of the metacarpus and phalanges. 
 
 As these articulations are straight hinges, their 
 motions of flexion and extension must be preserved. 
 To do this, in the upper extremity of the first phalan- 
 ges, fix a metallic plate three lines wide, and twelve 
 or fifteen long, in the manner described already of 
 fixing a similar plate to the ulna ; let this plate pro- 
 ject ten or twelve lines beyond the upper extremity 
 and round off the end with scissors. In this make a slit 
 with a very thin saw, through the middle of the heads 
 of the metacarpal bones, and reaching to the anterior 
 part of their bodies, and which only extends through 
 the anterior half of the thickness of thebone. Drill a 
 hole transversely through the head of each of the 
 metacarpal bones and the small metallic plates which 
 have been introduced into the slits made in them ; 
 fix the metallic plates to the bones by means of small 
 pins fixed in the centre of motion and riveted at the 
 sides. The motions which this will execute will be 
 very similar to those of nature. 
 
 Articulations of the phalanges with each other. 
 
 These are united in precisely the same manner as 
 the carpus and phalanges, for which we have just 
 given directions. 
 
162 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES, 
 
 Articulation of the hand with the bones of the fore 
 
 arm. 
 
 This consists simply in two attachments, one on 
 the outer and the other on the inner side, between 
 the bones of the fore arm and those of the carpus. 
 Holes are made in the lower extremities of the bones 
 of the fore arm from above downwards ; a brass wire 
 is then fastened to the bent wires on the upper part 
 of the os scaphoides and os cuneiforme. 
 
 Articulation of the femur with the pelvis. 
 
 Make a hole extending from the upper part of the 
 base of the neck of the femur to the middle of its 
 head ; introduce the two ends of a wire into this 
 opening, carry them through, from above downwards, 
 and fasten them with hooks at the base of the neck of 
 the femur. The middle of the wire forms a narrow 
 loop six or eight lines long, above the middle of the 
 head of the femur ; make this loop pass through an 
 opening in the bottom of the acetabulum and fasten it 
 on the inside of the pelvis by a strong clasp. 
 
 Articulation of the femur with the Tibia. 
 
 Make a hole transversely through both condyles 
 of the femur, precisely in the centre of motion, and 
 a little below the tuberosities of that bone. Make 
 two holes in the tibia from above downwards, from 
 the back part of its spine to the upper part of its 
 
ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 163 
 
 posterior face ; let one of these holes be about six 
 lines above the other. Take a thick brass wire, 
 bend the middle of it upon a steel rod into curves 
 like those of a spiral spring, and preserve its extremi- 
 ties unbent ; place the part thus spirally twisted in 
 the bottom of the cavity which separates the two con- 
 dyles of the femur, and pass a thick pin through these 
 spiral rings carrying it through the hole made in the 
 condyles and riveting it on each side ; then carry the 
 extremities of the twisted wire through the openings 
 made in the tibia, from below upwards, and fasten 
 both of them by hooks on a level with the posterior 
 face of the tibia. 
 
 To secure the patella before the joint, fix a brass 
 plate three inches long and five lines wide to its lower 
 part, and fasten the plate of brass by its lower ex. 
 tremity in a slitm adein the middle tuberosity of the 
 tibia. 
 
 Articulation ofthejibula with the tibia. 
 
 The upper extremity of the fibula is fixed to the 
 tibia by a wire which passes through the head of the 
 fibula, the outer tuberosity of the tibia, with its ends 
 beat into hooks and turned towards the back of the 
 joint. The bones are united at their lower articula- 
 tion by means of the pin which connects the tibia 
 with the tacsus. 
 
164 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF fiON$. 
 
 Articulation of the Foot. 
 
 Unite the astragalus to the os calcis by a wire 
 which enters at the upper part of the neck of the as- 
 tragalus, and comes out at the lower part of the small 
 process of the os calcis ; fasten the two ends by a 
 hook above and one below ; unite the three cunei- 
 form bones and the cuboides with each other, by a 
 wire passing transversely through them, and fixed at 
 one end by a hook on the inside of the first cunei- 
 form bone, and on the outside by another hook in 
 that groove of the cuboides through which glides the 
 tendon of the peroneus longas ; attach the cuboides 
 to the os calcis by two wires whose posterior extrem- 
 ities pass out by the lower face of the os calcis, and 
 its anterior, by the two faces of the cuboides which 
 join the fourth and fifth metatarsal bone. These 
 ends should be left in order to articulate the tarsus 
 with the metatacsus. 
 
 To articulate the scaphoides, three wires should 
 be taken which will serve to unite it to the astraga- 
 lus and the three cuneiform bones. The first passes 
 forward from the outer and back part of the neck of 
 the astragalus, through the outer part of the scapho- 
 ides and the middle of the third cuneiform bone. The 
 second, or middle wire passes forwards through the 
 middle of the scaphoides and the os cuneiform suc- 
 cessively. The third goes in the same direction 
 through the inner parts of the neck of the astragalus 
 
ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 165 
 
 through the scaphoid and the first cuneiform bone. 
 The posterior extremities of these three wires are re- 
 tained by hooks at the places where they belong, 
 their anterior extremities, which come out at the fore 
 part of the cuneiform bones being preserved, as well 
 as the wires which connect them with the cuboides, 
 to articulate the tarsus with the five bones of the me- 
 tatarsus. This articulation is arranged like that of 
 the carpus and metacarpus. 
 
 The phalanges of the foot are articulated with each 
 other and with the bones of the metatacsus in the 
 same manner as those of the hand. 
 
 Articulation of the Tibia with the Tarsus. 
 
 The bones of the foot being connected with each 
 other, they are united to the bones of the leg by 
 means of a pin placed in the centre of motion and 
 passing through the inner malleolus the astragalus, 
 and the outer malleolus successively, and thus uniting 
 the lower extremity of the fibula to the tibia, and 
 allowing the astragalus to move in the cavity formed 
 for it by the bones of the leg. 
 
 These are the rules generally followed for articu- 
 lating the different bones of the skeleton, rules 
 which the ingenious anatomist will modify and alter 
 according to circumstances ; we will only add, that 
 to put together a young skeleton the epiphyses of 
 which are already separated from the bodies of the 
 bones, it is necessary to replace these epiphyses and 
 
166 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 
 
 fasten them by means of isinglass, and afterwards to 
 secure them more firmly by metallic connections ar- 
 ranged differently according to the different bones. 
 
 SECTION XCI. 
 
 Sections to be made in the bones in order to display the 
 cavities formed by their union. 
 
 We shall mention in succession, the sections which 
 should be made in the head, the vertebral column, 
 the thorax, and the pelvis. 
 
 A wood saw with a flexible plate may be used for 
 all these sections, and the track should always be 
 guided by a line traced with a crayon, before begin- 
 ning to saw. 
 
 I. Sections in the head; the cavity of the cranium- 
 
 The sections for displaying the cavity of the crani- 
 um, are commonly two, one horizontal, the other 
 vertical. 
 
 For the horizontal section, the saw should be carri- 
 ed in a line passing from the upper part of the nasal 
 prominence over the upper part of the squamose 
 suture and going round to the external occipital pro- 
 tuberance. 
 
ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 167 
 
 The vertical section, is to be made in the longitu- 
 dinal diameter of the head. We proceed from above 
 downwards, avoiding the septum of the nasal cavities, 
 by carrying the saw on one side of it, about two lines 
 from the anterior nasal spine, cutting through the sa- 
 gittal suture, the os frontis, one side of the fonto-nasal 
 articulations, one of the nasal bones, one of the 
 upper maxillary bones, the basilar process, and the 
 middle and back part of the os occipitis. This sec- 
 tion displays, not only the form and vertical dimen- 
 sions of the cranium, but also the articulation of the 
 bones which form this receptacle, the arrangement 
 of the bones of the face with each other on the me- 
 dian line, the septum of the nasal cavities and those 
 cavities themselves. 
 
 To understand better the connections between the 
 bones of the cranium, different vertical sections may 
 be made in transverse and longitudinal directions. 
 
 Cavities of the face. 
 
 By different incisions we demonstrate the cavities 
 of the orbits, the nasal canal, the nasal fossae and the 
 sinus, and the temporal and zygomatic fossa?. 
 
 Sections to display the orbits. 1st. Vertical section 
 in the direction of their axis. Carry a saw through 
 the middle of the base of the orbit and that of the op- 
 tic hole. This will show the internal and external 
 walls. 3d. Vertical and transverse section. The up- 
 per part of the cavity may be well seen by carrying 
 
168 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 
 
 an incision on one side, by the anterior extremity of 
 the sphens maxillary slit, and on the other by the 
 middle of the os planum. 3d. Horizontal section. 
 This should be made in the direction indicated by 
 these three points ; namely : the lower part of the 
 os nasi, the upper angle of the os mala? and the optic 
 hole. It displays chiefly the upper and lower walls 
 of the orbit. 4th. The upper part of the orbit may 
 be opened by raising the bone at that part, by means 
 of two incisions with the saw, one of them beginning 
 at the upper internal angle, and the other at the up- 
 per external angle of the orbit, and both meeting at 
 the optic hole. This cannot be done unless the 
 vault of the cranium is removed. 
 
 Sections relating to the nasal canal. 
 
 An exact knowledge of the position, form, length, 
 and direction of this canal is of the utmost conse- 
 quence, not only to the anatomist, but to the surgeon. 
 This passage may be opened through its anterior 
 wall : " lay open the anterior part of the maxillary si- 
 nus, by taking out with a very small chisel and a mal- 
 let a triangular piece of bone, the shape of which is 
 determined by these three lines : the upper, which 
 runs parallel to the lower border of the orbit, extends 
 from the base of the process rising from the upper 
 maxillary bone, to the inner third of the cutaneous 
 face of the os malaB ; the outer extending from this 
 last point to the first large molar hook, passing by 
 the ridge which separates the canine and zygomatic 
 fossae ; the third going inwards, almost horizontally 
 
ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 169 
 
 at first, and then vertically along the external part of 
 the ascending process of the upper maxillary bone 
 near the anterior part of the lachrymal canal. The si- 
 nus being opened with a very small saw, a piece of 
 bone only three lines wide, but extending the whole 
 height of the sinus, from the anterior part of its inter- 
 nal wall ; the inner wall of the nasal canal will be ex- 
 posed by making this excision. To open this cav- 
 ity through its inner wall, make a vertical division in 
 the head, with a file having one of its edges very 
 sharp ; cut the os unguis transversely through the 
 middle of its inner face, and in this place, lift by two 
 vertical cuts, that part of the subethmoidal cornet 
 which is beneath it. The form of the floor of the na- 
 sal cavity may be shown by dividing it with a trans- 
 verse incision which passes by the lower border of 
 the base of the orbit, or a little above it, according to 
 the subject. To open the lachrymal canal length- 
 wise, it is necessary in most heads that the saw should 
 pass through the interval between the two small mo- 
 lar teeth, and to the outside of the suture which 
 unites the ascending process of the os maxillare with 
 the nasal slope of the coronal (M. J. Cloquet in the 
 dissertation before cited.) 
 
 Sections relating to the nasal fossa and their sinus. 
 
 To show the nasal fossae in the necessary points of 
 view, the following vertical and horizontal sections 
 should be made. 
 
 22 
 
170 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 
 
 1st. Vertical section jrom before backwards. 
 
 We have already pointed out the manner of mak- 
 ing this, when speaking of the vertical division of 
 the cranium. It displays the internal and external 
 walls of the nasal fossa3, the frontal and sphenoid si- 
 nus. 
 
 2d. Vertical sections from side to side. 
 
 These should be made at different depths in the 
 nasal fossse. They exhibit the anterior and posterior 
 walls of these cavities, the form and arrangement of 
 the canals, and of the maxillary sinus. 
 
 Sd. Lower horizontal section. 
 
 This should be made immediately above the lower 
 wall. It shows the depth of the nasal fossse, the 
 lower and upper walls of the maxillary sinus, the 
 lower margin of the septum, and the lower opening 
 of the nasal canal. 
 
 4th. Upper horizontal section. 
 
 This should be made immediately under the upper 
 wall of the nasal fossae, from the fronto-nasal suture, 
 to the supra sphenoid or pituitary suture. By means 
 of this section will be seen the transverse diameters 
 of the upper part of the nasal fossae, the communica- 
 tion of the frontal sinus with the cells of the ethmoid 
 bone, and the upper part of the sphenoidal sinus. 
 
ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 171 
 
 The heads of old persons should be selected to 
 display the nasal fossae, because in them the parts of 
 the small bones which form their interior are less 
 easily broken. 
 
 Although the different sinuses which open into the 
 nasal fossae may be shown, as we hare just seen, by 
 means of different sections made in these fossae, we 
 may devote to them a single preparation which will 
 exhibit them all in the same head. To do this the 
 frontal sinus should be laid open by raising its ante- 
 rior wall ; the sphenoidal sinus by removing the up- 
 per part of the body of the sphenoid bone ; the max- 
 illary sinus according to the directions given when 
 speaking of the nasal canal ; and lastly, the ethmoid 
 cells by taking away from the coronal on each side 
 of the cribriform plate, a piece of bone from two to 
 three lines wide and extending backwards, from the 
 transverse suture of the sphenoid bone with the co- 
 ronal, to a point even with the anterior part of the 
 crista galli. 
 
 SECTIONS OF BONES. 
 
 Sections relating to the temporal and zygomatic fossce. 
 
 To have a good view of these cavities, it is suffi- 
 cient to make a vertical section in the head, passing 
 through the lower angle of the os malae, the middle 
 of the glenoid cavity, and the inner part of the mas- 
 toid process. On a part of the head in which the 
 vertical and longitudinal section of the nasal fossae 
 
172 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 
 
 has been made, there may also be made a transverse 
 vertical section from above downwards, following the 
 anterior border of the pterygoid process of the sphe- 
 noid bone. But the best manner of obtaining an idea 
 of the upper part of the zygomatic fossa, is by study- 
 ing the bones of a head which has been disunited 
 and putting together those which form this cavity. 
 
 II. Sections to be made in the vertebral column. 
 
 These sections are vertical, and transverse ; they 
 should be made in a spine recently deprived of its 
 soft parts, and generally, separated from the bones 
 with which it is articulated. 
 
 1st. Vertical section Jrom be/ore backwards. 
 
 By means of this section we have the vertebral 
 column in two lateral divisions perfectly similar. 
 For this purpose, with a very strong scalpel trace a 
 line along the middle of its anterior surface, from the 
 tubercle on the front part of the atlas to the fore part 
 of the coccyx. Fix the spine wrapped in three 
 thicknesses of cloth, in a vice, by the lower part of 
 the cervical region. Saw through the middle for- 
 wards and downwards, the row of spinous processes, 
 so as to make the instrument come out at the line 
 traced on the fore part of the vertebral column. As 
 the saw penetrates deeper the sides should be kept 
 apart by assistants, or by putting sticks between 
 them. The greatest possible stability should be 
 given to the part through which the saw is passing, 
 by fixing it with the vice. 
 
ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 173 
 
 When the section is finished it is necessary to 
 clear out the canal of the spine, to cleanse and dry 
 the parts. During this last operation, to preserve 
 the natural curves of the spine from being distorted, 
 we ought, after firmly reuniting the two parts, to fas- 
 ten them securely to a thick plank, one of whose edges 
 is cut exactly to the curves of the spine. To do 
 this, we apply the spine to the plank and trace its out- 
 line. 
 
 2. Vertical and transverse section. 
 
 This section should be made from above down- 
 wards, passing through the middle of the cervical ar- 
 ticulating processes, and in the dorsal and lumbar re- 
 gions, dividing the bony projections which unite the 
 bodies of the vertebrae to their transverse and artic- 
 ulating processes, and which separate from each oth- 
 er the groves that conjointly form holes : in the sa- 
 crum the saw should pass on each side between the 
 anterior and posterior sacral holes. The preparation 
 should be cleaned, and fixed while drying like the 
 preceding. 
 
 3d. To lay open the vertebral canal one of the 
 three following methods should be pursued. The 
 first consists in sawing away on each side the poste- 
 rior plates of the vertebra? from the base of the trans- 
 verse and articulating processes, and removing them 
 with the spinous processes. The second, in sawing 
 with a hand saw through the middle of the spinous 
 processes, each in succession, from behind forwards, 
 
174 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 
 
 and then by making an oblique section on one side 
 of the spine, penetrating to the vertebral canal, 
 through the middle of the transverse articulating pro- 
 cesses in the cervical region, and of the transverse 
 processes in the dorsal, the back of the transverse 
 processes in the lumbar region, and the posterior sa- 
 cral holes. The third method consists in making on 
 both sides the oblique section just described, and 
 taking out the intermediate portion of bone as before. 
 
 4th- Transverse sections of the spine. 
 
 - 
 
 These should be made in the different regions of 
 the vertebral column, and are so simple that they re- 
 quire no rules for making them. 
 
 III. Sections of the thorax. 
 These are vertical and transverse. 
 
 1 st. Vertical and Longitudinal Section. 
 
 This consists in dividing the sternum and verte- 
 bral column from above downwards through their 
 middle in the manner which has been already ex- 
 plained. 
 
 2d. Vertical and Horizontal Section. 
 
 This should be made in a perfectly dry thorax 
 prepared with its ligaments. The ribs should be 
 cut, both sides from above downwards, in a line ex- 
 
 - 
 
ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 175 
 
 tending from the middle of the first rib, to the ante- 
 rior extremity of the eleventh. 
 
 3d. Horizontal sections. These are seldom made, 
 but it may be useful to divide the whole extent of the 
 thorax by means of them into layers, having for their 
 height one or more intercostal spaces, and which 
 may be reunited at pleasure by means of a metallic 
 rod. 
 
 IV. Sections of the Pelvis. Vertical sections. 
 
 1st. Through the longitudinal diameter. This 
 should pass through the middle of the pubis, the sa- 
 crum, and the coccyx. 2rf. Through the transverse 
 diameter. This should pass on each side, from about 
 an inch behind the anterior superior spine of the ili- 
 um, to the spine of the ischium. 3d. Through the 
 oblique diameter. This should pass from the back 
 of one of the articulatin g cavities to the opposite sa- 
 cro-iliac-symphysis. 
 
 The horizontal sections should be made at different 
 heights in the pelvis, one of them being on a level 
 with its upper opening. These preparations are par- 
 ticularly useful in studying the female pelvis. 
 
 Such are the principal sections which facilitate 
 the thorough study of osteology. It may be well to 
 make also a vertical section of the whole skeleton. 
 This may be done by following the directions given 
 

 176 ARTICULATION AND SECTION OF BONES. 
 
 for each part separately. The sternum and symphy- 
 sis of the pubis should first be sawed, and then the 
 spine, beginning with the coccyx and proceeding up- 
 wards. It is finished by dividing the head, which 
 should be done from above downwards, taking care, 
 as we have already mentioned, to incline the saw to 
 one side or the other, so as to avoid the septum of 
 the nasal fossae. (LEGOUAIS.) 
 
177 
 
 CHAPTER IX. 
 
 Mr. Swan's new Method of making dried Jlnatomi* 
 cal Preparations. 
 
 MR. JOSEPH SWAN, an eminent English surgeon 
 has published a second edition of a work, bearing the 
 above title, the principal part of which is here copied 
 from the book. The principal features of his plan 
 are durability against the ravages of insects, and un- 
 changableness by vicissitudes of atmosphere. His 
 whole plan is however given in detail from which the 
 practical anatomist may form his own opinion. It 
 may not be improper to remark that the claim to 
 originality so strongly urged by Mr. Swan is contested 
 by French writers* In the dictionary of medical sci- 
 ences Vol. 45, p. 61. it is remarked that " this me*' 
 thod which the author gives as new and his own in- 
 vention, was discovered and published a long time 
 since by Professor Chaussien" 
 
 SECTION XCII. 
 
 On the advantages of Mr. Swarfs method. 
 
 Every one who has paid attention to anatomy, 
 whilst he has been convinced of the utility of dried 
 23 
 
 
178 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 preparations, must have regretted the difficulty of 
 preserving parts, after much time and expense have 
 been employed in developing them. The plan which 
 I have adopted, and which I am about to detail in 
 the following pages, will not only prevent many of 
 the usual disappointments of the anatomist in this re- 
 spect, but add many advantages which dried prepa- 
 rations never before possessed. These advantages 
 are 
 
 1st. That the muscles do not shrink so much as 
 they do in the usual method- 
 
 2nd. The tendinous parts are preserved distinct 
 from the fleshy, so that the muscles preserve nearly 
 the same appearances as when first dissected. 
 
 3d. The disparity in the bulk of the muscles and 
 injected blood vessels is so far diminished, that the 
 surgeon may form a better idea of those important 
 parts, the arteries. 
 
 4th, The nerves are also preserved of their natu- 
 ral size, and in their usual situation. And thus the 
 muscles, arteries, veins, and nerves are exhibited in 
 the places which they naturally occupy. 
 
 5th. The most minute nerves may be preserved 
 dry, equally as well as the small arteries ; thus afford- 
 ing a much easier method of obtaining a complete 
 
SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 179 
 
 knowledge of the nervous system, than can be acquir- 
 ed in any other manner. 
 
 6th. Preparations thus made will keep in any cli- 
 mate, heat affects them but little ; so that they may 
 be preserved in the hot climates of our colonies, as 
 in the East or West Indies. 
 
 7th. A damp air does not destroy them, nor hard- 
 ly at all affect their appearance. 
 
 8th. They are not offensive to the smell, and may 
 consequently be preserved in situations where other 
 preparations could not be borne. 
 
 9th. Insects will not touch them, so that they are 
 not liable to the destruction which the Dermestes 
 are sure to produce in preparations made in the or- 
 dinary methods. 
 
 10th. A putrefactive state of the body, although 
 existing to such a degree as to render it extremely 
 offensive, does not prevent such subjects from form- 
 ing good preparations ; the putrefaction is checked 
 by the substances employed in preparing them, and 
 is not afterwards liable to return. 
 
 llth. They dry rapidly, and whilst drying, flies 
 and other insects avoid them. 
 
180 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 SECTION XCIII. 
 
 On the preparation of an Jlrm> as a General Illustra- 
 tion of a new Method of making dried Anatomical 
 Preparations. 
 
 A limb being chosen as free from fat as possible, a 
 solution of two ounces ofoxymuriate of mercury in 
 half a pint of rectified spirit of wine is to be injected 
 into the arteries ; and the next day as much white 
 spirit varnish, to which one fifth part of turpentine 
 varnish has been added, and some vermilion : the 
 limb is then to be put into hot water, where it is to 
 remain until properly heated, when the coarse injec- 
 tion is to be thrown into the arteries, and veins if re- 
 quired. If the veins are to be injected, it is better to 
 wash the blood out of them with water before the so- 
 lution of oxymuriate of mercury is thrown into the 
 arteries, as some of it returns by the veins, and by 
 coagulating any blood which they might contain, 
 would prevent the injection from passing into the 
 smaller branches* 
 
 After the limb has been injected, it is to be dis- 
 sected. Every time it is left, and sometimes during 
 the dissection, it is advisable to cover those parts 
 which have been exposed, with a cloth made damp 
 with water ; and I may here observe the great advan- 
 tage which will be experienced in dissecting it after in- 
 jection, for as the limb when injected with the solu- 
 tion of oxymuriate of mercury, undergoes very little 
 
SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 181 
 
 change in many days, when the dissection is recom- 
 menced, the parts will all be found in the state in 
 which they were left ; whereas in the usual way, in 
 one, or at most two days, every thing is so changed, 
 that there is very little use in reviewing what has 
 been done ; and if the dissection is tedious, what 
 was first done can hardly be recognised at the finish- 
 ing of all the parts. Another advantage is, that the 
 dissection may be carried on in almost any place, as 
 every offensive smell is generally entirely prevented. 
 
 When a subject is very putrid, and the muscles 
 very large, the quantity of the solution of oxymuriate 
 of mercury that has been used may not sufficiently 
 have stopped the putrefactive process ; or if it has 
 not been injected with the solution, and from any 
 change of weather or other circumstances, it has be- 
 come suddenly putrid, and it is probable the time re- 
 quired for finishing the dissection will be so long as 
 to lead to a supposition that many of the parts will 
 be destroyed before this can be accomplished ; or if 
 the smell is so offensive as to be prejudicial to the 
 health of the anatomist, after removing part of the 
 integuments the subject may be immersed in the so- 
 lution of oxymuriate of mercury for twenty-four 
 hours, or longer if absolutely necessary. 
 
 It is true there are several objections to this mode 
 of proceeding, but as they may be obviated in a 
 great measure by proper care, they do not counter- 
 balance the advantages frequently derivable from it ; 
 
182 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 nevertheless when the dissection can be finished 
 without having recourse to it, it is better avoided. 
 
 The principal objections are three : 
 
 In the first place the constant handling of the sub- 
 ject frequently produces soreness of the hands, if it 
 is continued for several days together ; but this in- 
 convenience may be guarded against in a great de- 
 gree by wearing gloves made of oiled silk ; second- 
 ly, the instruments are so much acted upon by the 
 solution, that it is impossible for them to keep any 
 edge for more than a very few minutes ; this effect 
 can only be partly prevented by frequently dipping 
 them in a little of the white varnish : thirdly, the 
 colour of the muscles is in a great measure destroyed, 
 which is inconvenient for any one just entering on the 
 study of anatomy, as the parts are thus rendered too 
 obscure. 
 
 The objections 1 have just stated do not exist ex- 
 cept in a very trifling degree, when the small quan- 
 tity of the solution above recommended, has been in- 
 jected into the arteries. 
 
 To discover a method not only to prevent the pu- 
 trefactive process, but to put a stop to it when it is 
 far advanced, and at the same time to do away the 
 objections which I have above stated, as existing un- 
 der the use of the solution of oxymuriate of mercu- 
 ry, I was well satisfied must be an object of the 
 
SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 183 
 
 greatest importance to the practical anatomist, as he 
 would thus be enabled to dissect subjects, which it 
 would have been otherwise next to impossible for 
 him to have meddled with. And a discovery of this 
 sort must not only be of great advantage to those in 
 general who are constantly investigating the various 
 structures of the animal creation in this country, but 
 more particularly to such as are pursuing their ana- 
 tomical investigations, with much risk and danger, 
 on account of the putrid effluvia being prejudicial to 
 the health ; and most of all, to those who practise 
 medicine &nd surgery in the hot climates. Under 
 such considerations, I have made several experi- 
 ments, and from the results of them, which I will pre- 
 sently mention, have much reason to suppose that 
 the plan 1 propose will be found productive of every 
 advantage that is possible to be produced by any 
 process for putting a stop to putrefaction. I may 
 just observe that for the same purpose, nitrate of pot- 
 ash and other substances might be used, but none of 
 them have the decided effect that is produced by ox- 
 ymuriate of mercury, and besides, if the parts are to 
 be made into preparations, there are positive objec- 
 tions to their employment. 
 
 Having found that when a piece of flesh had been 
 immersed in the solution of oxymuriate of mercury 
 until it was completely changed, and afterwards put 
 into a large vessel containing water for some days, 
 though the greatest part of the oxymuriate of mer- 
 cury was thus washed away, it did not even then 
 appear to become in the least degree putrid, I pro- 
 
184 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 cured half of the head and neck of a large horse, 
 which I first injected with the solution of oxymuriate 
 of mercury, but as the putrefactive process was not 
 thus sufficiently stopped, without dissecting off the 
 skin, I immersed it in the solution of oxymuriate of 
 mercury for several days, and as no marks of putre- 
 faction remained, (the offensive smell being entirely 
 removed,) I then put it into a vessel containing a 
 large quantity of water for two or three days more, 
 by which means nearly all the solution was removed 
 from it. I was thus able to proceed with the dissec- 
 tion during the hot weather, without being in the 
 least incommoded either by the smell, or soreness of 
 the hands, and without finding the instruments acted 
 upon in any degree, that rendered the process at all 
 objectionable. By putting a wet cloth over it when 
 I left it, I was further enabled to make a very minute 
 dissection of the nerves, which I could not otherwise 
 have done, without the use of a large quantity of 
 spirit of wine, and then not with half the convenience 
 and pleasure 1 have thus experienced. 
 
 It is necessary that the dissection should be con- 
 ducted in a different manner from that which has 
 hitherto been usual for making preparations, as it has 
 been too frequently thought sufficient to expose the 
 blood vessels at the expense of every other part, but 
 preparations made according to the directions here- 
 inafter detailed will , most commonly be good or 
 otherwise, in proportion to the pains that have been 
 taken in the dissection. All the fat and cellular 
 
SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 185 
 
 membrane should be removed. The muscles,* ten- 
 dons, arteries, veins, nerves, and ligaments, which it 
 is intended to exhibit distinctly in a dry preparation, 
 
 tust be made distinct before any attempts are 
 
 lade to dry it. 
 
 It must always be recollected that this method of 
 making preparations is entirely different from that 
 generally adopted. For in this, after the dissected 
 parts have been subjected to the influence of the so- 
 lution of oxymuriate of mercury, the moisture con- 
 tained in them is merely dissipated whilst they are 
 drying, and no ulterior changes take place during 
 this process, so that every part that has been left 
 will remain ; whereas in the old method, not only dur- 
 ing the time it is drying, but long after the dissection 
 has been completed, the putrefactive process still 
 goes on in some degree, so that portions of cellular 
 membrane, &c that have been left, become so much 
 decomposed as to be in a great measure easily re* 
 moved by washing. 
 
 If the directions that have been given are attended 
 to, making the limb into a dry preparation will be 
 very easy, and accomplished with very little trouble ; 
 but, if on the contrary they are neglected, it will be 
 found tedious and difficult, and the method itself will 
 
 *The different portions of each muscle, as far as they are connected by cellular 
 membrane only, should always be separated, except when the surrounding part* 
 will be injured by so doing. 
 
 24 
 
186 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 be condemned, when the fault is wholly attributable 
 to the slovenly mode of dissecting. 
 
 After the dissection is finished, the limb must be 
 immersed in the solution of oxymuriate of mercury, 
 for a fortnight, but the longer the better, and espe- 
 cially if the subject has been very putrid. The time 
 it is in the solution must always be reckoned from 
 the finishing of the dissection. 
 
 An oaken box, or one made of very good deal, is 
 the fittest for keeping the limb in the solution, as me- 
 tallic vessels do not answer. In a box six feet long, 
 it is better to have the top closed at one end, at least 
 a foot, and at the other six inches, so that the lid will 
 be between those parts, the edges of which should 
 be cut sloping, by which means the lid will fit the 
 closer. It should be made of wood, of a sufficient 
 thickness, and perfectly dry, care being taken that 
 the joints should fit in as exact a manner as possible. 
 When finished, it should be twice well varnished in 
 the inside with oak varnish. The outside should be 
 painted, and if there are any small holes, they should 
 be carefully filled up with putty, and the whole paint- 
 ed over again once or twice. 
 
 In order to save the solution, the shoulder should 
 be put quite to one end of the box, and as little is 
 required to cover the hand, so the other end should 
 be raised, by which the greatest quantity of the solu- 
 tion will be directed to the part that requires the 
 most to cover it ; and as there are great spaces be- 
 
 
SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 187 
 
 tween the arm and sides of the box, bottles half filled 
 with water may be put into them, which make much 
 less of the solution necessary. The bottles should 
 not press on the limb, as the solution ought to get 
 freely to every part of it. The limb may be taken 
 out every two or three days, and any cellular mem- 
 brane that has been left should be removed ; it 
 should then be returned into the box, with that part 
 upwards which before w r as at the bottom. 
 
 Much trouble will be saved by having the dissec- 
 tion entirely finished before the limb is put into the 
 solution, as it will not then be necessary to take it 
 completely out of the box, but only to turn it over, 
 and this should always be done several times if the 
 dissection has not been of such a nature as to incur 
 any risk of its being injured thereby, or otherwise, 
 when the limb is large, the part at the bottom will 
 frequently lie so close to the box as to prevent the 
 solution getting to it. 
 
 The best thing to put the limb on when it is taken 
 out of the solution is a butcher's tray, which when 
 new should be well oiled several times until it is com- 
 
 }letely saturated, as otherwise every time it is used 
 it will absorb so much of the solution as to cause 
 
 great waste. 
 
 Every thing used must be clean and free from dust 
 and this precaution ought most especially to be at- 
 tended to after the limb has been in the solution, as 
 it then so readily attracts every particle of dirt, and 
 
188 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 by neglecting this, a preparation may be entirely 
 spoiled. 
 
 When the limb has been long enough in the solu- 
 tion, it is to be taken out in order to be varnished 
 and painted ; for the convenience of which, a piece 
 of wood about a foot and a half long and three inches 
 broad should be nailed to each end of a table or 
 board. Near the top of each piece of wood there is 
 to be a hole for a wooden screw, which should be 
 half an inch in diameter, and six inches long. A 
 hole is to be made through the end of each screw to 
 admit strings, by which the scapula may be tied at 
 one end, and the hand at the other. The best way 
 of fixing the hand is by a bit of wood four inches 
 long and half an inch thick, through which eight holes 
 should be made at about a third of an inch from each 
 other ; then a piece of string is to be passed through 
 the tip of each finger, and each end of the string 
 through one of the holes, by which means all the fin- 
 gers will be tied to the wood. Another hole is to be 
 made near the middle of the wood, by which it is to 
 be tied to the screw. When the limb is suspended, 
 it is to be wiped with a piece of clean linen, and a 
 small bit of wood should be put between the tendons 
 of the flexor sublimis and profundus muscles pear the 
 wrist, and then the whole limb *must be covered with 
 the white varnish, On the three succeeding days 
 
 * When it is intended to use oil paint, the fleshy parts of the muscles should 
 pot be varnished. 
 
SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 189 
 
 the whole of the nerves, tendons, and tendinous ex- 
 pansions must be done over with the same varnish- 
 
 On the fifth day the tendons must be painted with 
 equal parts of the yellow* varnish and white paint ; 
 and the same on the seventh, eighth, and ninth. The 
 nerves must be painted as often as appears necessary 
 with equal parts of the white paint and white varnish. 
 Care must be taken to varnish and paint the under 
 surface of the tendons and nerves, as well as that 
 which is superficial, if it can be done without much 
 inconvenience, 
 
 Several of the tendons would look very well with- 
 out paint, but in drying, they do not all preserve the 
 same appearance, and some of them assume a very 
 dark colour, and where the tendinous part is thin, as 
 in the fascia of the fore arm, or when it arises from a 
 muscle it dries so as not to bear the least resemblance 
 to a tendon. It was therefore thought necessary to 
 paint all the tendons that they might have a uniform 
 appearance. To accomplish this by other means a 
 great variety of different trials was made with var- 
 nishes, but as the results of them were not satisfac- 
 tory, others were made by adding paints to the var- 
 nishes, both with, a view to render the process as 
 simple as possible, and likewise to retain the most 
 natural appearances ; and the rules I have laid down 
 
 * The yellow varnish gives the tendons a rather better appearance than the 
 white, but it is not of very great consequence which is used ; it saves much trou- 
 tyle to use only one sort. 
 
190 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 for preserving these parts are founded on those ex- 
 periments which seemed to answer both these inten- 
 tions the most decidedly. 
 
 As soon as the muscles have become stiff they may 
 be painted ; in doing which much care is necessary to 
 be taken that the tendons and nerves are not touched, 
 and this may be avoided when they are very near to 
 the muscles, by interposing small pieces of wood. 
 
 As by this mode of making preparations the parts 
 very soon become stiff, and must then remain in the 
 same position they have acquired, it is necessary at 
 first, or at furthest within the first two or three days, 
 to put every part in the exact place it is intended it 
 should keep, and with this view it is proper to ob- 
 serve occasionally the progress of the preparation, 
 until the parts have become so hard as to preserve by 
 themselves their proper situation. For though a pre- 
 paration may not frequently be spoiled by leaving 
 the parts to dry in the situations they first acquired 
 after being suspended, yet much may be added to 
 the appearance of some parts, by attending to this 
 seemingly trifling circumstance, for instance in the 
 deltoid muscle, as in the position it will in all proba- 
 bility acquire if left to itself, it will dry flat, or in 
 wrinkles, whereas by just putting a finger behind it, 
 and pressing it outwards when it is becoming stiff, it 
 will preserve the rounded form it naturally has, and 
 will thus appear to much greater advantage. 
 
NEW METHOD. 191 
 
 In other parts of the body and especially in animals 
 where the muscles are large, it may be necessary to 
 separate some of the parts by pieces of wood, or by 
 a string fixed to a particular part to which a small 
 weight can be suspended, or in any other more con- 
 venient manner. 
 
 About a month after it has been taken out of the 
 solution, those nerves and tendons that are not suffi- 
 ciently painted should be covered with the paint and 
 varnish as before, as many times as are thought neces- 
 sary ; but one day should intervene between each 
 time of doing them ; at the same time parts of the 
 muscles will appear that have not been painted, which 
 may now be done. But it is better to wait some 
 time longer, and then to paint any parts of the mus- 
 cles that may require it. After this, the tendons 
 and nerves should be covered with boiled linseed 
 oil. In using it as little oil as possible should be in 
 the brush, which should be drawn gently over them 
 once. This is material to be attended to, as the oil 
 is apt to make some impression on the paint ; and if 
 it is drawn over a second time, the paint may be dis- 
 turbed, which will spoil the appearance of the part. 
 In two days, if the oil is perfectly dry, the whole 
 limb must be again covered with the oil ; and when 
 this last is also perfectly dry, the whole must be var- 
 nished two or three times with the white spirit var- 
 nish. After this the preparation will have its perfect 
 appearance, but to make it more durable and like- 
 wise capable of being washed, it is best to varnish it 
 with the best copal varnish, which when dry, should 
 
192 
 
 be repeated a second time, and even a third if re- 
 quired, 
 
 In using the varnishes care should be taken that 
 too much is not laid on at one time, as in that case, 
 it either settles in drops on the preparation or joins 
 parts together which ought to appear separate, and 
 makes the whole appear confused. In varnishing, 
 it is necessary to finish the part immediately when it 
 is once begun, for if any delay takes place, and a 
 brush is drawn over a part a few minutes or even a 
 few seconds after the varnish has been first applied to 
 it, the appearance is very much altered. 
 
 After the tendons have been painted, on the ninth 
 day the limb may be hung in a paper bag and left for 
 any time, and the nerves and muscles may be painted 
 when convenient ; and it will be a great saving of 
 time to those who are studying anatomy to proceed 
 thus far in the winter, and finish the preparations in 
 the summer when they have leisure, as it may be 
 done in any place on account of there being no 
 smell. 
 
 After being subjected to the influence of the oxy* 
 muriate of mercury, the coats of the arteries and 
 veins remain opaque, and do not shew through them 
 the colour of the injection as they do in the usual 
 mode of making dry preparations, and therefore for 
 the necessary distinction, as well as for the better ap- 
 pearance of the preparation, it is requisite that the 
 arteries and veins should be covered with copal var- 
 
SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 193 
 
 nish, to which a little vermilion has been added for 
 the arteries, and prussian blue for the veins ; and this 
 should be done before the whole limb is varnished 
 with the white spirit varnish. 
 
 The method I have pointed out for suspending the 
 limb is the most convenient, but when the anatomist 
 has not sufficient room it may be done by fixing a string 
 on the scapula, and tying it to a staple or any thing 
 else fastened on a wall, where it may remain until it 
 is finished. 
 
 I think in a general way it is best to wait until the 
 muscles are perfectly dry before they are painted. 
 I formerly used the paint made with varnish, and 
 where there is much dust in the room in which the 
 preparation is made I think it the best, because it 
 soon dries, but otherwise I now prefer that made 
 with oil. 
 
 In painting the muscles with oil paint, much may 
 be added to the appearance of a preparation by a lit- 
 tle management, as where tendinous and fleshy 
 v fibres appear intermixed, or where the redness of a 
 muscle is in some degree apparent through a tendin- 
 ous aponeurosis. In the first instance the tendinous 
 parts should be varnished with the white varnish, &c. 
 as before directed, and the muscular fibres tinged 
 with very light red paint. When the muscle is in 
 some degree apparent through the aponeurosis, the 
 white varnish is to be used every day as for the ten- 
 dons, and then once or twice with the addition of a 
 25 
 
194 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 little of the white paint, and when it is perfectly 
 dry the whole should be tinged with very light red 
 paint. 
 
 The only objection to the paint made with oil is, 
 that it is sometimes apt to impart a very disagreeable 
 smell to the preparation, if the oil has not been very 
 good. 
 
 When the paint made with oil has been used, it is 
 necessary to cover the tendons, and tendinous expan- 
 sions, and nerves with the boiled linseed oil, as has 
 been directed, before the use of the white spirit var- 
 nish, but the application of the oil to the muscles is 
 not then necessary. 
 
 If the place where the preparation is varnished 
 and painted should be dusty, some contrivance must 
 be used to keep the dust from it, or it will be entirely 
 spoiled. 
 
 The varnishes and paints are apt to stick to the 
 fingers and cause much trouble by the difficult}^ there 
 is in washing them off, so that if the anatomist is fre- 
 quently interrupted during the time he is using them, 
 it will be an advantage for him to wear thin gloves. 
 
 Some months after a preparation has been made, 
 an exudation will now and then take place from the 
 muscles, causing them to have a whitish appearance. 
 When this is the case nothing more is necessary than 
 the application of white spirit varnish. 
 
SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 195 
 
 Though a preparation will seldom be greasy if 
 due care has been taken to remove all the fat, yet 
 this will sometimes be the case. And the best me- 
 thod of cleaning it in such a state, and of preventing 
 the exudation of grease, will be to rub it as clean as 
 possible with a piece of soft rag, and then to wash it 
 well with the solution of acetate of lead of the Lon- 
 don Pharmacopseia, which should the next day be 
 applied by means of a brush, and when perfectly dry 
 repeated in the same manner several times, after 
 which the part must be covered three or four times 
 with white spirit varnish. 
 
 I have thus given an account of the method of mak- 
 ing preparations to possess all the advantages detail- 
 ed in the introduction, but if the shrinking of the 
 muscles is not an object with the anatomist, much 
 trouble will undoubtedly be saved by having a limb 
 injected in the common way, first with a little varnish 
 and red lead, and then with coarse injection. And 
 indeed when it is wished to make a preparation of 
 the minute arteries, the usual method will be found 
 the best, because after the solution of oxy muriate of 
 mercury has first been injected, the coarse injection 
 will not generally fill the vessels so well as will thus 
 be required. 
 
 When the solution of oxymuriate of mercury has 
 not been injected, should the subject become putrid 
 sooner than might be expected during the dissection, 
 it may be immersed in some of the solution for a few 
 hours, as has been before directed. But when the 
 
SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 dissection is finished, the part must nevertheless be 
 subjected to the influence of the solution for a prop- 
 er time, and the preparation finished according to 
 the directions before given. It must be expected 
 that the muscles will thus shrink in a much greater 
 degree than if the method were adopted which it is 
 my object to recommend, yet still not near so much 
 as when the solution of oxymuriate of mercury has 
 not been used before drying them. 
 
 When a subject is putrid, whether it is wished to 
 preserve the size of the muscles or not, and especial- 
 ly if it is a large one, it will by all means be advisable 
 that it should be injected with the solution of oxymu- 
 riate of mercury. 
 
 SECTION XCIV. 
 Of Solutions of Oxymuriate of Mercury. 
 
 In using solutions of oxymuriate of mercury for 
 anatomical preparations, it must always be kept in 
 mind that unless animal substances are entirely 
 changed by the solution, it must not be expected they 
 will retain the properties of preparations made ac- 
 cording to the rules which have just been laid down. 
 When I first used the solution for preparations I did 
 not submit the animal bodies to its influence for more 
 than a few days, and the consequence was, that when 
 I had kept them for some time in a damp place, all 
 the deeper seated parts became mouldy, and emitted 
 a putrid smell which was very offensive, and more- 
 
SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 197 
 
 . over had a very different appearance from the super- 
 ficial ones. 
 
 ) 
 
 Solution of Oxymuriate of Mercury in Spirit of 
 
 Wine. 
 
 Dissolve two ounces of oxymuriate of mercury in 
 sixteen ounces of spirit of wine. 
 
 This solution has been found to answer best the 
 purposes required of it, but it is very expensive, and 
 therefore if any cheaper liquid could be substituted 
 that would produce nearly the same effect, it would 
 undoubtedly be very desirable. With this view, as 
 it was my wish not only to be able to make prepara- 
 tions superior to those hitherto in use, but likewise 
 to have the means of doing so without such a great 
 additional expense, I have lately tried the following 
 solution, and from the results of such experiments as 
 I have hitherto made with it, I have little doubt but 
 that it will answer the purpose nearly if not quite as 
 well as that made with spirit of wine ; thus saving by 
 much the largest part of the expense. I cannot in- 
 deed, for want of sufficient experience, speak of the 
 preparations thus made in the same decided manner 
 as I can of those made with the solution of oxymu- 
 riate of mercury in spirit of wine ; nevertheless when 
 I observe that the effects produced on animal sub- 
 stances when subjected to the influence of either of 
 these solutions are exactly similar, I see very little 
 reason for apprehending any material inferiority. 
 
198 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 Solution of Oxymuriate of Mercury in Water- 
 
 Take of oxymuriate of mercury, two ounces.* 
 Muriate of ammonia, seventy grains. 
 Water, one pint. 
 
 The oxymuriate of mercury and muriate of ammo- 
 nia must be rubbed together in a mortar, and then 
 the water must be added gradually until the solution 
 is complete. 
 
 Though this solution no longer contains oxymuri- 
 ate of mercury in the same state as when dissolved 
 in spirit of wine, yet it has the effect of hardening an- 
 imal bodies in the same manner, 
 
 I had supposed that preparations made in this man- 
 ner might be more liable to be affected by damp air, 
 on account of the addition of muriate of ammonia, but 
 from several experiments I have made 1 do not think 
 it likely that they will sustain any injury of this sort. 
 Partly for this reason, and likewise because crystals 
 are apt to form on the preparation which it is after- 
 wards rather difficult to remove, I think it better af- 
 ter removing the part that has been subjected to its 
 influence, immediately to immerse it in cold water 
 for a short time, by which any superfluous quantity 
 of solution will be washed away. 
 
 * The weights and measures are those used by Apothecaries. 
 
SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 199 
 
 A white precipitate is thrown down during the 
 time an animal body is immersed in it, which most 
 probably is partly albumen, and partly the effect of 
 ammonia contained in the body. On this account it 
 is sometimes necessary to add a small portion of ox- 
 ymuriate of mercury for fresh preparations. This 
 precipitate should likewise be removed after making 
 one or two preparations, for if it is suffered to collect 
 in any quantity at the bottom of the box, it prevents 
 the solution getting freely enough to the animal body, 
 and in consequence the necessary changes are not so 
 well accomplished. 
 
 Of the Solution of Oxymuriate of Mercury in Py- 
 roligneous Acid. 
 
 With this I tried experiments before I made any 
 with the solution in water, but I thought if water 
 could be substituted for the pyroligneous acid, it 
 would not only diminish the expense still further, 
 but would likewise afford a great advantage to the 
 anatomist, by enabling him to use a fluid which can 
 at all times be so easily procured, so that as the oxy- 
 muriate of mercury and muriate of ammonia can be 
 put in a very small compass, he might have the 
 means for preserving animal bodies always ready 
 without inconvenience. I should not therefore have 
 mentioned this solution, but that as I find it has the 
 power of hardening animal substances more than 
 those already described, I thought it might answer 
 some particular purposes in a superior manner. This 
 solution is to be made exactly in the same manner as 
 
200 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 that made with water, substituting pyroligneous acid 
 for the water. 
 
 SECTION XCV. 
 On preparations of the minute nerves. 
 
 It is supposed by many, that young children are 
 better subjects on which to prosecute the anatomy of 
 the nervous system than those of more advanced age. 
 In beginning this part of anatomy therefore I chose 
 such subjects, but not finding them to answer the 
 purpose so well as I had been taught to expect, I 
 have since had recourse to others. In a child the 
 nerves are certainly larger in proportion to the oth- 
 er parts than in the adult, and the larger nerves may 
 be conveniently enough dissected in them, but I have 
 not found it so with the more minute branches. 
 
 In a child even the thinnest that can possibly be 
 procured, still so much fat is always left in different 
 parts as to make the dissection very tedious, besides 
 which as far as the nerves themselves are concerned, 
 I do not think they are so strong as in the adult, so 
 that much disappointment is occasioned by their fre- 
 quent breaking. 
 
 The minute nerves of the face and neck are gener- 
 ally the largest and most distinct in the male, so that 
 for making preparations of the nerves of these parts, 
 I should prefer a male subject between twenty and 
 

 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 201 
 
 fifty years old, in which the features are well marked, 
 and as free from fat as possible. I have almost inva- 
 riably found the nerves of the face in the female more 
 delicate than those in the male, and in very advanced 
 age so much so as to be totally unfit for dissection. 
 
 For the dissection of the nerves of the neck a 
 thin subject is to be preferred, but it should not be 
 one who has died of disease of the lungs, for it gene- 
 rally happens in cases of this sort, that besides the 
 disease of these viscera, all the absorbent glands and 
 vessels of the neck and thorax are so much enlarged, 
 and there is frequently such a thickening of the parts 
 at the bottom of the neck, as to create a degree of 
 confusion, which renders the dissection of the grand 
 sympathetic nerve and par vagum very unsatisfac- 
 tory. 
 
 
 What I have said about the choice of human sub- 
 jects, as far as* respects the age, does not apply in 
 the same manner to animals, for in many of them 
 and especially the larger ones, the nerves in general 
 are never so conveniently dissected, as they are 
 within a week or two after birth, for they are at that 
 age generally more free from fat in every part, than 
 at any later period, as it is so difficult to procure 
 such as have been in a diseased state long enough for 
 all the fat to have been absorbed. 
 
 In dissecting the nerves of the face, the skin must 
 be carefully removed from that part of the parotid 
 gland lying on the face, and from the face a short disr 
 26 
 
202 , SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 tance towards the mouth, but nothing should be re- 
 moved except the skin itself. 
 
 Over the parotid gland so much nicety is not re- 
 quired, but beyond it the greatest care must be tak- 
 en, or many of the nerves will be divided, and to 
 avoid this, the blade of the knife must be held hori- 
 zontally, with the edge rather inclining towards the 
 skin. When the skin has been removed, the fat and 
 parotid gland must be carefully separated from the 
 nerves with the point of one of the blades of a pair of 
 scissors. If the scalpel is used in this part, many of 
 the branches will be divided. It is better to sepa- 
 rate most of the nerves from the fat, before attempts 
 are made to remove much of it, and as it must be en- 
 tirely removed, and in hot weather it is of so soft a 
 consistence, as to make its removal very difficult and 
 tedious by means of instruments, it will be found than 
 much of it may be absorbed by blotting paper, after 
 which, the little remains, which will not be much 
 more in fact than the membrane that incloses it, can 
 be removed with much greater facility, and less risk 
 of destroying the minute branches, than if the paper 
 had not been used. 
 
 If a preparation of only some of the nerves of the 
 head and face is to be made, and the subject is thin, 
 it will be a saving of much trouble, and a great addi- 
 tion to the good appearance of the whole, to leave 
 the skin untouched that covers the parts not wanted, 
 and the head will also look better if the hair is suffer- 
 ed to remain on it. If all the nerves of the face are 
 
NEW METHOD. 203 
 
 to be dissected, it is an advantage to leave a small 
 portion of skin on the tip of the nose and margin of 
 the lips. 
 
 In dissecting the nerves of the neck, and indeed 
 those that are minute in every other part of the body, 
 the scalpel as I have just now mentioned in speaking 
 of the dissection of the nerves of the face must be 
 very little used except for removing the skin, for 
 when the nervous branches are very numerous, 
 it is next to impossible to separate them from 
 the parts that surround them with an instrument of 
 this kind, let the care and knowledge of the anato- 
 mist be ever so great. In a general way the most 
 convenient instrument will be one of the blades of 
 a pair of scissors. 
 
 If the nerves are covered by a strong fascia, which 
 the single blade of a pair of scissors will not easily 
 divide, as is sometimes the case in animals, and in 
 consequence it becomes necessary to use a scalpel, 
 it should cut on one side only. If a delicate nerve is to 
 be dissected w,ith this instrument, and its course and 
 connexions with other nerves cannot be seen, it 
 should be held with the forceps so as just to keep it 
 on the stretch, the parts covering it are then to be 
 divided by frequent short strokes with the point of 
 the scalpel, which should always be insinuated be- 
 tween the nerve and the part to be divided. If the 
 scalpel is not generally used in this manner in the 
 dissection of the minute nerves, but on the contrary 
 its edge is held towards the subject, and the part cov~ 
 
204 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 ering the nerve is thus divided ; or if the division is 
 made to one side of the nerve, either the nerve it- 
 self will frequently be divided or injured, or all the 
 branches communicating with it will be cut off, as 
 must almost always be the case when the facial and 
 grand sympathetic nerves, and many others are thus 
 dissected. 
 
 Every portion of fat must be removed, for if it is 
 not, it will sooner or later shew itself in the prepara- 
 tion by its transudation, softening any varnish that 
 may be applied over it ; a circumstance which not 
 only renders the preparation unpleasant by its stick- 
 ing to the fingers whenever taken hold of, but also 
 causes it to attract every portion of dust, so as in 
 point of fact to take very much both from its appear- 
 ance and utility. 
 
 It is farther necessary to remove every portion of 
 cellular membrane from the nerves, that they may be 
 as distinct as possible, otherwise where there are 
 many minute nerves in a small space, they will have 
 such a confused appearance as to defeat the main 
 purposes for which the preparations are made. 
 
 Whilst prosecuting the dissection it is desirable 
 that the part should be kept in spirits,* if it is pro- 
 bable that it will be long before it can be finished ; 
 but at all events the minute nerves should be mois- 
 
 * For a more economical and convenient plan where it is expected the subject 
 will be too much affected by the putrefactive process, seethe account of an ex- 
 periment in page 1 53. 
 
SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 205 
 
 tened from time to time with spirit of wine or water, 
 otherwise if suffered to get very dry they will be 
 r ery liable to break. 
 
 In a general way for preparations of the nerves, I 
 think it is better not to inject the subject with minute 
 injection for the preservation of the size of the mus- 
 :Ies, for if the first object is the demonstration of the 
 icrves, they will appear to greater advantage by the 
 shrinking of the muscles. If the part to be dissected 
 is large and cannot be easily kept in spirits, and it is 
 probable it will be more than a few days before the 
 dissection can be finished, any further changes will 
 be prevented by injecting it with some of the solution 
 of oxymuriate of mercury. 
 
 When all the nerves intended to be exhibited in 
 the preparation have been sufficiently dissected, the 
 >art is to be immersed in the solution of oxymuriate 
 of mercury as has been described in the general il- 
 lustration,* and it must remain there a sufficient time. 
 In a general way a fortnight will be sufficient, but if 
 the part is very bulky and the muscles have not been 
 much separated, a longer time must be allowed, as 
 in this instance the deep seated parts will not so soon 
 imbibe the necessary influence of the solution. 
 
 When the part is taken out of the solution, a string 
 of sufficient length should be fixed to some part of 
 it, by which it is to be suspended to some conve- 
 nient place in a wall, or in any other way that 
 may be thought preferable. After which it will be 
 
 * See Section XCII, &c. 
 
206 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 advisable that some of the moisture from the nerves 
 should be absorbed by means of linen rags, as it 
 may then be immediately varnished, which other- 
 wise cannot so well be done. After this the nerves 
 must be separated from each other with the forceps 
 and then covered with white varnish ; immediately 
 after which the nerves must again be separated from 
 each other with the forceps. All the tendinous parts 
 must at the same time be varnished as is required for 
 other preparations, which must be done according to 
 the directions given in the general illustration for the 
 preparations of tendons. The next day the same 
 process of varnishing and separating the nerves 
 must be repeated, and they must be separated often 
 enough to keep them from drying together, which they 
 will do if this attention is not paid to them. Using the 
 varnish twice is generally sufficient for the minute 
 branches, but the process of separating them must be 
 daily repeated until they are so dry as to keep the 
 situations they were placed in. If more varnish is 
 required than has been used, it will be known by the 
 the nerves not shining as things always do that are 
 saturated with varnish ; on the contrary if too much 
 is used, the branches will not easily be kept sufficient- 
 ly apart to be distinct, especially where they form a 
 net work, as it fills up the meshes, and when they are 
 painted they exhibit nearly a flat surface, not by any 
 means conveying the exact appearances they ought 
 to do, and which they will do if properly managed. 
 
 Again if too little varnish is used, the paint does 
 not adhere well, and the nerves have not an uniform 
 appearance. 
 
SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 207 
 
 The application of spirituous varnishes to wet sur- 
 faces is I believe a plan which has seldom been re- 
 curred to in any of the arts, and it is owing to this 
 particular mode of using varnish that parts of animal 
 bodies seldom made into dry preparations, can now 
 not only be dried, but can at the same time be made 
 to retain their natural appearances. It is the knowl- 
 edge of this circumstance that has enabled me to 
 preserve the most minute nerves dry. It is necessa- 
 ry that the varnish for this purpose should be of a 
 similar composition to the white varnish, that when 
 it becomes dry it may preserve a sufficient degree of 
 tenacity to adhere to the surface it was applied to. 
 
 When the nerves are dry, which will be in about 
 a week, they may be painted, but this process may 
 be deferred for any length of time to suit the conve- 
 nience of the anatomist. The paint as recommended 
 for the nerves in the general illustration is to be used 
 as often as may seem necessary, but twice for the 
 smallest branches will in a general way be sufficient. 
 As little should be laid on at one time as possible, 
 much of it obscuring the branches, and it should be 
 used with small brushes when the finer branches are 
 painted, with very little paint in the brush at one 
 time, otherwise it settles in drops on the nerves, giv- 
 ing them a knotted appearance, and if there are ma- 
 ny branches together, causing them to adhere, or fill- 
 ing up the meshes formed by different branches, and 
 thus constituting a confused mass. In some situa- 
 tions it is necessary to interpose some very small bits 
 of wood to keep the branches asunder until the pre- 
 paration is entirely finished. 
 
208 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 About the lips there is usually so much fat amongst 
 the muscular fibres, and especially in animals, that it 
 is sometimes extremely difficult to remove the whole 
 of it, and preserve the terminations of the nerves. 
 When however every particle has been removed that 
 is possible without dividing the nerves, the parts must 
 be suffered to dry, and then if there be an exudation 
 of grease before the parts are painted, it will be bet- 
 ter to make use of the solution of acetate of lead, as 
 directed in page 159, but without the use of the white 
 spirit varnish. The same rules will apply to every 
 other part of the body where the fat cannot be en- 
 tirely removed. 
 
 When it is thought all the nerves have been suffi- 
 ciently painted, after a few days allowed for their be- 
 coming perfectly dry, they may be done over with 
 boiled linseed oil. When the muscles are dry they 
 must be painted red, as likewise the inside of the 
 nose, mouth, &c. ; and when the paint is dry the 
 whole preparation must be varnished with the best 
 copal varnish, taking care that what is used the first 
 time is perfectly dry before a second application of it 
 is made. Here the same caution is necessary not to 
 use too much varnish, and for the same reasons I 
 have given both respecting its first application as well 
 as in the use of the paint. The preparation being 
 thus finished may be wrapped in paper to protect it 
 from the dust. 
 
 In making preparations of the cutaneous nerves of 
 the arm, it is a great advantage to have both the ar- 
 teries and veins first filled with coarse injection, as 
 
SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 209 
 
 these nerves are confined to their exact situations by 
 the veins. 
 
 The distribution of the cutaneous nerves of the arm 
 may likewise be preserved with the skin itself. In 
 this case the skin should be divided from the axilla 
 over the inner edge of the biceps muscle to the 
 elbow, and from thence the incision should be con- 
 tinued down the middle of the fore arm. It is best 
 to begin to trace the nerves from the a xillary plexus, 
 to their terminations in the skin. As this is done the 
 skin may be turned back each way, but should be 
 left adhering to the muscles at the back of the limb in 
 two or three places. When the skin has been turn- 
 ed back, as much as possible of the fat adhering to it 
 should be removed. 
 
 When it is taken out of the solution to be dried, 
 the inside of the skin may be done over once with 
 the white varnish, and when it is dry, a second appli- 
 cation of it may be made, adding a little of the white 
 paint used for the tendons. 
 
 The outside of the skin, both in the face and any 
 other part, when it has been left must be painted 
 when perfectly dry. And here I would observe that 
 it is difficult to paint the head unless the hair has been 
 entirely shaved off, and that therefore before begin- 
 ning the dissection it should be determined either to 
 have this done OP the hair left long. For the skin 
 common white paint should be used with the least 
 possible quantity of lake added to it. 
 27 
 
210 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 In making preparations of the arm it is sometimes 
 required to have one to exhibit the parts nearly as 
 far as the hand, in this case as the hand does not look 
 well unless it is properly dissected, and as it requires 
 so much time to finish it perfectly, it will generally 
 be best to leave the skin entire ; as when it has been 
 dried and painted it will not diminish the general 
 good appearance of the preparation, and a great deal 
 of trouble will thus be saved. 
 
 A head very far advanced in putrescency is not 
 rendered unfit for making a preparation of the nerves 
 of the face, &c. Indeed one of the best prepara- 
 tions I ever made was of a head of this descrip- 
 tion, and which was likewise full of maggots. The 
 method I used was to put the head in a vessel and 
 pour on it boiling water, which in a few minutes de- 
 stroyed the maggots. I then dissected off the skin 
 and kept the head in a tin canister, which contained 
 a little spirit of wine, at all times when I was not dis- 
 secting ; and when the dissection of it was complet- 
 ed, subjecting it to the process for making prepara- 
 tions which I have already described. 
 
 It may be thought from the number of directions I 
 have detailed in the foregoing pages, that the mak- 
 ing of dry preparations of the nerves is very labo* 
 rious and takes up a great deal of time, but I can 
 safely say that when the dissection has been tolera- 
 bly well performed, a preparation may be completed 
 with very little trouble, and if any one will use the 
 necessary means, I think he will not be disappointed. 
 
SWAN'S XEW METHOD. 211 
 
 I would advise every one however who engages in a 
 work of this sort to adhere entirely at first to the rules 
 I have laid down, as any alteration that may supposed 
 to be for the better may lead in the end to a serious 
 disappointment. I say this with the more confidence, 
 because in bringing this mode of making preparations 
 step by step, as I have done to its present state, I 
 have myself made a great variety of experiments, 
 and have attempted what I conceived might be im- 
 provements, but after all have found nothing to an- 
 swer the purpose nearly so well as the method pre- 
 scribed in the foregoing rules. 
 
 SECTION XCVI. 
 Of Preparations of the parts concerned in Hernia. 
 
 Having chosen a thin subject, the abdomen of 
 which has been opened, the peritoneum is to be strip- 
 ped off from the inside of the abdominal muscles, or 
 rather from the inside of the fascia transversalis and 
 iliaca, and at the same time any cellular membrane 
 and fat must be removed. The skin and fascia su- 
 perficialis, and every portion of fat and cellular 
 membrane must then be separated from the external 
 oblique muscle, and likewise from the upper part of 
 the thigh. The tendon of the external oblique mus- 
 cle is then to be divided by beginning a very short 
 distance from the anterior and superior spinous pro- 
 cess of the ilium, about the third of an inch above 
 Poupart's ligament, and continuing the incision so as 
 
212 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 to reach just above the external ring, which must be 
 left entire. Then the tendon is to be divided a little 
 higher by the side of the rectus muscle, and then by 
 raising this portion of the tendon of the external ob- 
 lique muscle, the lower margin of the internal oblique 
 and transversalis muscle will be exposed, the lower 
 edge of which must be carefully separated from the 
 fascia transversalis ; and if this separation is not 
 sufficient for bringing the fascia properly into view, a 
 small portion of the muscle must be removed. This 
 being done, the round ligament or spermatic chord 
 will be seen coming from the abdomen, at which 
 place the fascia transversalis is much thinner than at 
 any other part. If the fascia lata on the outside of 
 the thigh is removed, and the handle of a scalpel is 
 passed behind Poupart's ligament, the fascia iliaca 
 may be separated some distance from the muscle, and 
 thus both of the fasciaB arising from Poupart's liga- 
 ment may be seen, forming a complete barrier to the 
 protrusion of the bowels, except where the sperma- 
 tic chord and femoral vessels escape from the abdo- 
 men. These parts are shewn to much greater ad- 
 vantage if the femoral vessels are removed. 
 
 If it is desired, other preparations can be made to 
 shew the exact position of the blood vessels, and 
 likewise the falciform process of the fascia lata, but 
 these must be done according to the same plan, 
 which it is not my intention particularly to point out, 
 as I do not wish to enter more fully into the anatomy 
 of the parts concerned in herniae than is just suffi- 
 
SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 213 
 
 cient for enabling me to point out in what manner 
 these parts may in general be preserved. 
 
 If the parts already described are to be shewn in a 
 preparation where the whole limb is preserved, the 
 dissection may be finished according to the wish of the 
 anatomist, but if it is intended entirely for a prepara- 
 tion of the parts concerned in hernise, it will be best 
 to divide the subject about the beginning of the 
 lumbar vertebra, and then divide the pelvis through 
 the sacrum and symphysis pubis, leaving about eight 
 or nine inches of the thigh. I think it best to remove 
 the gluteus maximus muscle and most of the mus- 
 cles on the thigh, but this may depend on the wish 
 of the anatomist. 
 
 When the dissection is finished, the part must be 
 put into the solution of oxymuriate of mercury for 
 about a fortnight. When it is taken out it should 
 be suspended by a string fixed to the vertebrse, ano- 
 ther being fastened to the corner of the abdominal 
 muscles, so as to keep these parts and the fascia 
 transversalis on the stretch, and likewise to prevent 
 them from falling too much in contact with the spine. 
 If there is nothing more convenient a chair back will 
 suffice, when the string fixed to the vertebras must 
 hang on one corner, and that fastened the abdominal 
 muscles towards the other. 
 
 | 
 
 When it is suspended the tendon of the external 
 oblique muscle, the fascia transversalis and iliaca are 
 to be covered with the white varnish every day for 
 
214 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 three days. The tendon must be finished according 
 to the directions given in the general illustration for 
 the preparation of tendons. And the fascia trans- 
 versalis and iliaca must be covered afterwards once 
 or twice with the white varnish, to which a very little 
 of the white paint has been added, if the proper ap- 
 pearance has not been sufficiently preserved. The 
 edges of the external ring, and the separated portion 
 of the tendon of the external oblique muscle, should 
 be put in a proper position before they are quite stiff. 
 The muscular parts are then to be painted red, and 
 as pale a covering as possible of red paint is to be 
 put over the inside of the fascia tranversalis and il- 
 iaca. When the paint is quite dry, the tendinous 
 parts must be done over with a little drying oil, and 
 the whole preparation must be varnished with the 
 copal varnish twice or three times. 
 
 SECTION XCVII. 
 Preparations of the Liver. 
 
 In order to preserve the natural appearance and 
 size of the liver, it is necessary that the blood vessels 
 and excretory ducts which compose so great a part of 
 it, should be filled with injection to keep them dis- 
 tended, otherwise, when it dries it will shrink so 
 much as not to retain its form in that degree which 
 is requisite to render a preparation of any material 
 use. 
 
 The method I have found the best is to add one 
 fifth part of turpentine varnish to white spirit varnish, 
 
SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 215 
 
 and some colouring matter as red lead, which should 
 be gently thrown into the vena portae and excretory 
 ducts, and then coarse injection, which is necessary 
 for the distension of the larger vessels. Some coarse 
 injection should likewise be thrown into the hepatic 
 artery. It does not require to be heated before it is 
 injected. 
 
 After the injection is finished, if it is a small liver, 
 as a dog's, a fortnight will be sufficient for its immer- 
 sion in the solution of oxymuriate of mercury ; but 
 if it is a much larger liver a month will be necessary. 
 
 When it is dry it must be painted the natural col- 
 our, and then varnished with the copal varnish as of- 
 ten as may appear necessary. 
 
 In the same manner I have every reason to sup- 
 pose the kidnies may be preserved so as to have 
 their natural appearance. 
 
 SECTION XCVIII. 
 Preparations of the Nose, fyc. 
 
 In making dry preparations of the nose, mouth, 
 larynx, &c. when any of the soft parts are preserved, 
 it is better to put them into the solution of oxymuri- 
 ate of mercury for some time, as they will not then 
 undergo any further changes, and they will like- 
 wise be effectually preserved from the ravages of in- 
 sects. 
 
216 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 When they have been removed from the solution 
 and have become dry, they may be painted and var- 
 nished so as to restore the appearances they original- 
 ly possessed. 
 
 SECTION XCIX. 
 Preparation of the absorbents. 
 
 Though I have not yet had leisure for making pre- 
 parations of the absorbent system, by the same 
 means I have made use of for preparations in gen- 
 eral, yet I think it most probable that they may be 
 made nearly according to the directions given in 
 the general illustration, so as to be much more 
 durable than by the common method ; for as it is 
 owing to insects eating away the solid parts of all 
 dry preparations in the manner they have hitherto 
 been made, the delicate absorbent vessels thus lose 
 their support, and consequently give way to the least 
 pressure or agitation communicated to them. It is 
 therefore reasonable to suppose that when the solid 
 parts have been saturated with the solution of the 
 oxymuriate of mercury, which will prevent insects 
 from touching them, the absorbents, with moderate 
 care may be preserved for a great length of time. 
 
SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 217 
 
 SECTION C. 
 On preparations of the Brain. 
 
 The brain should be carefully removed from the 
 skull, and the nerves left as long as possible, and it 
 should be immediately immersed in rectified spirit of 
 wine to harden it a little, after which the pia mater 
 should be carefully removed, if it is wished to shew 
 distinctly the different eminences and convolutions. 
 
 When the pia mater has been removed, the brain 
 should be put into the solution of oxymuriate of 
 mercury, where it should remain at least a month if 
 it is a large brain, but if it is a small one, as that of a 
 sheep, a fortnight will be long enough. 
 
 When it is taken out of the solution for the purpose 
 of drying, it should be covered once with the white 
 varnish ; it must then be put on a clean plate, but 
 the part in contact with the plate should be changed 
 two or three times in the twenty-four hours for the 
 first few days, otherwise the pressure on the flat sur- 
 face of the plate will totally efface any of the emi- 
 nences, &c. that have been in contact with it too 
 long. 
 
 When it is perfectly dry it must be painted. For 
 this purpose some of the white paint, mentioned 
 amongst the paints is to be used. Having poured off 
 from it the thin liquid, which is chiefly spirit of tur- 
 
 28 
 
218 SWAN'S NEW METHOD* 
 
 pentine, a little of the white paint, which is nearly in 
 the same state it was before the spirit of turpentine 
 was added to it, is to be mixed with as much mastich 
 varnish as gives it the consistence of cream. With 
 this the brain is to be painted so often as is required 
 ' to give it the desired appearance. When this is done, 
 it should be covered with mastich varnish, to which 
 a very small quantity of the paint has been added. 
 Care must be taken that the paint which has been 
 used each time is perfectly dry, before another appli- 
 cation of it is made. 
 
 After it has been sufficiently painted it must be 
 varnished with the white spirit varnish two or three 
 times. As it is impossible to suspend it for this pur- 
 pose, the upper surface must be varnished and suffer- 
 ed to dr/; it must then be turned over, so that the 
 varnish may be applied to the part that was in con- 
 tact with the plate. Every time the varnish is used 
 it is necessary to have very little in the brush, which 
 should only just touch each part once. This precau- 
 tion is necessary, or the paint will be disturbed so 
 as to destroy its proper appearance. 
 
 In the same manner both the brain and medulla 
 spinalis are to be preserved, when they have not been 
 removed from the subject, as in making preparations 
 of the nervous system, and it is wished to shew the 
 origins of the nerves from these parts. 
 

 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 219 
 
 SECTION CL 
 
 On preparations of the Joints. 
 
 The joints in general are very unfavourable for 
 making good dry preparations, on account of the 
 quantity of fat contained in them, but when the dis- 
 section of any one is completed, and all the fat re- 
 moved, it must be put into the solution of the oxymu- 
 riate of mercury, where it must remain a fortnight, 
 and it must then be varnished twice with the white 
 varnish, and in the course of a few weeks when it 
 appears to be perfectly dry, it must be covered twice 
 with the best copal varnish. 
 
 The joint should not be taken from an old sub- 
 ject, and the varnish should never be applied to the 
 bone. 
 
 In the same manner a whole limb, or indeed a 
 whole subject, may be preserved so as to shew all 
 the joints. 
 
 When the ligaments of a whole subject are to be 
 preserved, it might be advisable to fix the different 
 parts in such a manner, that when the ligaments, &c. 
 have become dry, the exact situation of every bone 
 may be kept. 
 
 In preserving a capsular ligament, as that of the 
 knee, it is best to saw through the patella transverse- 
 ly, (which mode also shews the other ligaments of 
 
220 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 this joint to the best advantage,) and as the ligament 
 dries, it should from time to time be put into a pro- 
 per form, by pressing it outwards with the finger. 
 
 SECTION en. 
 On Preparations of the Ear- 
 
 I shall in the present section enter more into an 
 anatomical description than I intended in any part of 
 this work, as I conceive it may be useful to those un- 
 acquainted with the structure of the ear, by enabling 
 them to understand the relative situations of its most 
 intricate parts, in such a manner as is absolutely ne- 
 cessary before they can attempt to make prepara- 
 tions. 
 
 When the top of a skull has been sawn off, and 
 the lower jaw removed, the base may be turned up- 
 wards and divided lengthwise, by carrying the saw 
 through the middle of the palate and the foramen 
 magnum. The bone which forms the inferior part of 
 each meatus auditorius externus must be laid bare, 
 and carefully removed with a chisel and mallet, until 
 the membrana tympani is fully exposed. In one of 
 these portions the extremity of the Eustachian tube 
 must be detached from the pharynx, and turned a 
 little aside ; the anterior part of the skull must then 
 be removed by sawing through the glenoid cavity, so 
 as to leave the membrana tympani and Eustachian 
 tube perfect. In this portion the cavity of the tym- 
 panum may be laid open, by cutting away with a 
 
SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 221 
 
 strong knife or chisel a thin piece of bone which is 
 at the side, and opposite the middle of the petrous 
 portion of the temporal bone, and between its sharp 
 edge and the squamous portion, which will expose 
 malleus and incus. Then the Eustachian tube 
 must be cut open quite into the tympanum. In this 
 dissection, the tympan um will be seen communicat- 
 ing backwards with the mastoid cells, and at the same 
 time the situations of the four small bones must be 
 observed. That the malleus is fixed by its handle to 
 the membrana tympani, and that its processus gracilis 
 is articulated in a groove at the anterior part of the 
 tympanum. That the body of the incus is articulated 
 with the head of the malleus ; that its short crus is 
 resting in a groove in the bone near the entrance of 
 the mastoid cells ; and after a little of the petrous 
 portion, opposite to the incus, has been cut away that 
 its long crus is joined to the os orbiculare, which is 
 a very small round bone. That the stapes goes 
 across the tympanum, its head being articulated with 
 the os orbiculare, and its base with the fenestra ova- 
 lis. To have these bones separate, and at the same 
 time perfect, it is necessary to macerate a temporal 
 bone until they are quite loose. In a similar portion 
 of the skull the muscles of the tympanum must also 
 be dissected. 
 
 
 Each auricle should be left perfect by beginning to 
 open the meatus auditorius externus, where the con- 
 cha terminates. All the skin maybe removed that 
 surrounds it, and likewise all the flesh from every 
 part of the skull, care being taken to leave the Eus- 
 tachian tubes perfect. 
 
222 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 These parts may be thus made into preparations. 
 One half of the skull may shew the Eustachian tube 
 entire, and its exact situation in the pharynx ; the 
 other may shew it cut open into the tympanum. If 
 it is wished to shew the semicircular canals and coch- 
 lea in one of these preparations, it may be done ; 
 otherwise both parts may be put into the solution of 
 oxymuriate of mercury for some time. When taken 
 out to dry, a bit of wood or quill should be put into 
 the Eustachian tubes, that they may dry open. The 
 soft parts may be covered once with the white varnish^ 
 and when dry, the muscular parts, &c. may be colour- 
 ed if necessary. When the whole is perfectly dry, it 
 may be varnished twice with copal varnish. 
 
 Before beginning the diss ection of the labyrinth, 
 it will be necessary in a macerated temporal bone, to 
 saw off the squamous portion just at the superior 
 part of the rneatus auditorius externus ; and then to 
 lay open the meatus auditorius externus and tympa- 
 num, by detaching a piece of bone with a saw, 
 which is first to be directed from the inferior part of 
 the meatus auditorius externus, between the styloid 
 process and the foramen stylo-mastoideum into the 
 inferior extremity, or beginning of the canalis earo- 
 ticus, and then from the superior part of the meatus 
 auditorius externus into the superior part of the ca- 
 nalis caroticus. 
 
 In the bone thus prepared, on the outside of the 
 petrous portion, and about its middle, within the ca- 
 
SWAN'S NEW METHOD* 223 
 
 vity of the tympanum, an oval hole to which the 
 stapes is fixed, called fenestra ovalis will be observ- 
 ed, and immediately below the fenestra ovalis, a pro- 
 jection of the bone called promontory, and at the un- 
 der part of the promontory a hole called fenestra ro- 
 tunda, which is about one-twelfth of an inch below 
 the fenestra ovalis, and which in a recent bone is 
 closed by a membrane ; behind the fenestra rotunda, 
 may be seen a hollow, which is the cavern from which 
 the stapedius muscle originates. 
 
 On the posterior or inner surface of the petrous 
 portion, may be observed the meatus auditorious in* 
 ternus, the bottom of which is divided into two hol- 
 lows by a sharp ridge. The fore part of the inferior 
 hollow is perforated by many minute holes, through 
 which the branches of the portio mollis of the seventh 
 pair of nerves go to the cochlea, and in the back part of 
 this hollow are several holes, through which branch* 
 es of the portio mollis go to the vestibule and semi- 
 circular canals. In the superior hollow are two 
 holes, the lower or smaller one for the transmission 
 of branches of nerves into the vestibule, the upper or 
 larger one for the transmission of the portio dura of 
 the seventh pair of nerves, which may now be traced 
 through its extent ; it goes from the meatus auditori- 
 us internus, between the cochlea and outer extremity 
 of the superior semicircular canal, it then passes over 
 the superior edge of the fenestra ovalis and then 
 backwards and downwards, and terminates at the fo- 
 ramen stylo mastoideum. The bone thus dissected 
 
224 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 may be kept to shew the parts that have been de- 
 scribed, or the labyrinth may be dissected in it. 
 
 For making a preparation of the labyrinth, it is ne- 
 cessary to begin to file about the middle of the pe- 
 trous portion of the temporal bone, and between its 
 ridge and the cavity of the tympanum and the supe- 
 rior semicircular canal will be opened, and by trac- 
 ing it towards the tympanum, will be found termi- 
 nating in the vestibule, nearly opposite to the head 
 of the malleus ; the other extremity will be found 
 terminating in common with the upper extremity of 
 the posterior semicircular canal, which termination 
 is about three-twelfths of an inch from the middle of 
 the posterior part of the meatus auditorius internus, 
 and in the foetus two-twelfths. 
 
 In tracing the posterior canal backwards, its infe- 
 rior extremity will be found at about three and a half 
 twelfths of an inch from the jugular fossa, and in the 
 foetus rather more than two-twelfths of an inch from 
 the foramen stylo-mastoideum. 
 
 These two canals being laid open, the petrous por- 
 tion behind them must be cut away until the exterior 
 semicircular canal is opened. It is placed horizon- 
 tally about four twelfths of an inch deeper in the 
 bone than the top of the superior canal, and is near- 
 ly even with the superior part of the incus. In the 
 foetus it is three twelfths of an inch deeper in the 
 bone than the top of the superior canal. The laby- 
 rinth is most easily dissected in the foetus, for it is as 
 
NEW METHOD. 225 
 
 perfect, as in the adult, whilst the surrounding bone 
 is so soft as to be very easily cut with a knife, but 
 the adult ear makes the most beautiful preparation. 
 In the foetus the course of a great part of the supe- 
 rior and posterior semicircular canals may be seen 
 without any dissection. 
 
 The cochlea is now to be dissected. It lies with 
 its base to the tneatus auditorius internus, and its apex 
 to the tympanum. It is three twelfths of an inch 
 from the entrance of the outer extremity of the su- 
 perior semicircular canal into the vestibule ; in the 
 foetus it is two twelfths of an inch. It must be open- 
 ed by carefully cutting away the bone with a knife, 
 the point being inclined a little downwards towards 
 the tympanum. When the cochlea is laid open, 
 something like a pillar in the middle, going from the 
 base to the apex may be observed ; the lower two 
 thirds of which have been called modiolus, and the 
 upper third infundibulum. The lamina spiralis, which 
 is a thin plate of bone with a membranous edge 
 winds round the pillar ; it begins at the fenestra ro- 
 tunda, and divides the cochlea into two canals called 
 scalse, these two canals communicate at the apex, 
 where the lamina spiralis terminates in a sharp point. 
 
 To have a more perfect knowledge of the laby- 
 rinth it will be necessary to separate the petrous 
 portion from the rest of the temporal bone ; the re- 
 maining part of the shell of the cochlea must then 
 be carefully removed so as to expose the whole of 
 the lamina spiralis, when it may be observed that 
 29 
 
26 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 one of the canals called scala tympani terminates at 
 the foramen rotundum, and the other called scala 
 vestibuli, at the vestibule. The vestibule may be 
 laid open either by filing away the bone between the 
 ineatus auditorius internus, and the common termi- 
 nation of the superior and posterior semicircular ca- 
 nals, or by cutting away the bit of bone between the 
 fenestra ovalis and fenestra rotunda. 
 
 There are two aqueducts, one leading from the 
 vestibule, called aquaBductus vestibuli, and the other 
 from the cochlea called aquseductus cochleae. Both 
 of the aqueducts may be seen in that preparation, 
 where the vestibule has been laid open by cutting 
 away the bone between the fenestra ovalis and fenes- 
 tra rotunda. The aquseductus vestibuli may be seen 
 begining just opposite the opening made in the vesti- 
 bule, and just below the common termination of the 
 superior and posterior semicircular canals. It termi- 
 nates at a hole on the posterior or inner surface of 
 the petrous portion three twelfths of an inch behind 
 the meatus auditorius internus. 
 
 The aquaBductus cochlea may be seen in the same 
 preparation beginning at the under part of the scala 
 tympani, very near the fenestra rotunda, and termi- 
 nating by a wide opening, about three twelfths of an 
 inch below the meatus auditorius internus, and one 
 twelfth of an inch from the anterior part of the jugu- 
 lar fossa. 
 
SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 227 
 
 SECTION CHI. 
 
 On preparations oj the Lungs and Heart. 
 
 The heart and lungs may be preserved dry so as 
 to have their natural appearance. When it is wish- 
 ed to preserve the heart alone, it should be injected 
 according to the usual method with injection made of 
 plaster of Paris, which answers as well as any other 
 injection, and has this advantage, that when a wound 
 has been made in any part of it, as it remains unal- 
 tered by heat, the risk of the preparations being des- 
 troyed is entirely obviated. 
 
 When both the heart and lungs are to be pre- 
 served together, the heart should be first injected as 
 I have just now directed, and then a pipe fixed in the 
 trachea, as near the size of the trachea as possible, 
 care being taken to tie it in very fast. It must then 
 be injected with plaster of Paris injection. The sy- 
 ringe should be proportioned to the size of the lungs, 
 and the trachea should not be left of a much greater 
 length than it is wished to have it in the preparation. 
 
 In injecting the trachea the injection should be sent 
 in until with moderate force no more will enter. The 
 heart and lungs should be from a young subject, and 
 as free from fat as possible. And the same precau- 
 tion should be observed in the choice of the parts 
 when they are to be taken from an animal. 
 
228 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 When it is wished to preserve the lungs alone, it is 
 better to fill the branches of the pulmonary artery by 
 fixing a pipe in the trunk of this artery. The pul- 
 monary veins may be filled by fixing the pipe in the 
 left auricle ; the trachea is then to be injected as 
 before described. After the injection is finished, all 
 the fat and cellular membrane should be removed, 
 when the part should be immersed in the solution of 
 oxymuriate of mercury for a fortnight. 
 
 When it is taken out it must be hung up to dry. 
 The trachea and the whole surface of the lungs 
 should be immediately varnished with the white var- 
 nish, and then the trachea alone should be varnished 
 once every day, for two or three days. 
 
 The heart will require painting. To give the nat- 
 ural appearance both ventricles may be painted red, 
 the vense cavae and pulmonary artery and right auri- 
 cle purple, and the left auricle and aorta red. Or 
 the whole of the right side of the heart may be 
 made purple, and the left red. The coronary arteries 
 and vein will also require painting. 
 
 When the lungs are dry they must be painted with 
 the red paint used for the muscles, and must then be 
 varnished as well as the trachea with the white spi- 
 rit and copal varnishes. 
 
 In making preparations of the heart to shew its 
 internal structure, its cavities should be opened so as 
 not to injure the valves, and when it is wished to 
 
SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 229 
 
 shew all the valves distinctly, it is better to divide the 
 heart so as to make a separate preparation of each 
 side. Before doing this, the right ventricle should 
 be opened nearly as far as the origin of the pulmona- 
 ry artery, and then the pulmonary artery itself should 
 be divided nearly down to the valves, that it may 
 thus be seen how to cut between two of the semilu- 
 nar valves, so that they may all be preserved perfect, 
 any further dissection required to shew the tricuspid 
 valves should be made at the same time. Nearly in 
 the same manner the left ventricle and aorta must be 
 opened, after which the two sides of the heart should 
 be separated. 
 
 In making these dissections, about two or three 
 inches of the aorta and pulmonary artery should be 
 left. So much of each auricle may be removed as to 
 shew distinctly the opening into the ventricles. 
 
 It'is necessary to remove all fat and cellular mem- 
 brane, and after the dissection is finished, the parts 
 are to be immersed in the solution of oxymuriate of 
 mercury for a fortnight. 
 
 When the parts are taken out, they must be sus- 
 pended in the most convenient position- for the pre- 
 servation of the valves, which should be kept as much 
 upon the stretch as possible. In several instances 
 after the auricle has been opened and a great 
 part of it removed, I have sewed the circumference 
 to a common ring proportioned to its size, by which 
 the opening from the auricle to the ventricle is kept 
 
230 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 open : a ring made of bone is to be preferred. By this 
 ring, or by a piece of string passed through any por- 
 tion of the heart with a needle, the part is to be sus- 
 pended to a nail driven into the wall, or a piece of 
 wood. It will also be proper, by hanging small 
 weights in different parts, or by fixing them with 
 strings to several nails placed in different directions 
 of the wall, or piece of wood, or by any other simi- 
 lar contrivance, to keep all the parts constantly on 
 the stretch, in which state they should remain until 
 perfectly dry. If these precautions are not attended 
 to, the valves cannot be preserved so as to be satis- 
 factorily shewn, because the heart when left to it- 
 self contracts so much in drying as hardly to bear 
 any resemblance of the shape it had in its fresh state. 
 
 It is necessary to put some small bits of wood in- 
 to the semilunar valves to keep them separated 
 from the vessels, or they would dry so much in con- 
 tact with the sides of the vessel as not to be distinct- 
 ly seen. 
 
 After this the whole heart must be varnished with 
 the white varnish, and then the valves, the pulmona- 
 ry artery and aorta, must be varnished every day for 
 three or four days. When the heart is perfectly dry 
 the chords tendineaB and aorta, and pulmonary arte- 
 ry and valves, if they dry so as to have a very dark 
 appearance, must be painted once or twice with the 
 white varnish to which a little white paint has been 
 added, and all the muscular part must be coloured 
 with the red paint. It must then be varnished two 
 
SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 231 
 
 or three times over with white spirit varnish, and 
 twice with copal varnish. 
 
 In a general way however, it will not be necessary 
 to paint the valves, so that after they have been var- 
 nished with the white varnish a sufficient number of 
 times, when the muscular partis painted, they as well 
 as the chordae tendinese, and aorta and pulmonary ar- 
 tery, may be done over with oil, to which the least 
 possible portion of red paint has been added that 
 will serve to give them a tinge. The whole must af- 
 terwards be covered with the white spirit and copal 
 varnishes, as has been just directed. 
 
 SECTION CIV. 
 On preparations of JLnimals. 
 
 When it is is intended to make preparations of 
 animals which are very putrid, before beginning the 
 dissection, some of the solution of oxymuriate of 
 mercury should be injected into the arteries, and then 
 if it is not wished to fill the vessels with coarse injec- 
 tion for their preservation, the skin should if possi- 
 ble be entirely removed. If the putrefactive process 
 has not been stopped by the injection, the animal 
 should be immersed in the solution of oxymuriate of 
 mercury for twenty-four hours, or longer if necessa- 
 ry. This might be done with part of the skin re- 
 maining, but it usually contains so much dirt, and the 
 hairs so frequently fall off, and by adhering to the 
 different parts, not only spoil their appearance if the 
 
232 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 dissection has been begun of, but likewise spoil the 
 solution for many purposes, so that if this method is 
 pursued, the animal ought at least to be well washed 
 before it is immersed in the solution. 
 
 The dissection must be finished in the usual way, 
 when the animal must be immersed in the solution of 
 oxymuriate of mercury a proper time, according to 
 the directions given in the general illustration. 
 
 When it is taken out of the solution for the purpose 
 of being dried, if it has naturally white flesh, as a 
 cat, rabbit, common fowl, or fish, it should be var- 
 nished over with the white varnish immediately after 
 having been dried with a cloth, and this should be 
 repeated the next day. The tendons, nerves, &c. 
 should be managed according to the directions al- 
 ready given for the preservation of these parts in the 
 general illustration, and the muscles, when dry, 
 should be tinged with very pale red paint made with 
 varnish ; the whole animal should then be covered 
 with boiled linseed oil and varnish, according to the 
 directions given in the general illustration. When 
 the muscles are of a deep red colour, as in the hu- 
 man subject, they must be treated in an exactly simi- 
 lar manner as is recommended for those of the hu- 
 man subject in the general illustration. 
 
SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 23S 
 
 SECTION CV. 
 
 On Varnishes and Paints. 
 
 The following are the receipts for the paints and 
 varnishes, which are made by the weights and mea- 
 sures of apothecaries. The copal varnish, mastich 
 varnish, white spirit varnish, and turpentine varnish, 
 may be bought at the colour shops. 
 
 The White Varnish. 
 
 Canada balsam, 
 
 Spirit of turpentine, of each three ounces ; 
 
 Mastich varnish, two ounces ; 
 
 Put them into a bottle, and shake them together until 
 they are properly mixed. That Canada balsam an- 
 swers best which is white and rather opaque-. 
 
 Mastich Varnish. 
 
 This may be made by putting four ounces of pow- 
 dered mastich and one pint of spirit of turpentine 
 into a bottle, which should be well shaken every day 
 until the greatest part of the mastich is dissolved. 
 
 Yellow Varnish. 
 
 Infuse one ounce of powdered gamboge in eight 
 ounces of spirit of turpentine for fifteen days ; after 
 which equal parts of the clear liquor, Canada balsam, 
 and mastich varnish, are to be mixed together- 
 SO 
 
234 SWAN'S NEW METHOD. 
 
 White Paint. 
 
 Three ounces of the best white paint and one 
 ounce of spirit of turpentine, are to be put into a 
 bottle and shaken together. When it is used with 
 the varnish, a little of each should be mixed at once. 
 
 Paint for the Muscles 
 
 Is made by grinding on a slab, lake with the white 
 varnish, to which one fourth part of turpentine var- 
 nish has been added. That for the liver requires 
 lake, Prussian blue, and vermilion, mixed in the same 
 way. Prussian blue may be mixed by itself in this 
 way, and a little of it may be added to copal varnish 
 for the veins. 
 
 For convenience, small vials containing these dif- 
 ferent paints should be kept, and a little should be 
 poured out as it is wanted. 
 
 As 1 have before stated I now generally prefer 
 using paint made with oil, which is made by grinding 
 lake with drying oil. I generally make it of a very 
 deep colour, and when I use it, add as much more oil 
 to it as will give it the exact tint I wish. The oil 
 should be of a very drying quality, but if this cannot 
 be procured, some acetate of lead made into as fine 
 a powder as possible should be added to linseed oil, 
 and they should be well mixed together on a slab in 
 the same way as is usual in mixing paint. The paint 
 and oil may be kept in vials, and a little only poured 
 out as it is wanted. 
 
WAN'S NEW METHOD. 235 
 
 If Prussian blue is used with oil, it is necessary to 
 add much acetate of lead to the oil, as it is so very 
 long in drying. 
 
 As the brushes used in varnishing and painting, 
 when left for some hours exposed to the air are en- 
 tirely spoiled, and in this manner much expense is in- 
 curred, it is proper to keep a few vials on purpose for 
 them. All the brushes used with the oil paint, and with 
 varnishes made with spirit of turpentine should be pre- 
 served in vials containing spirit of turpentine, and those 
 used for the white spirit varnish, or any other varnish 
 made with spirit of wine, should be put in vials con- 
 taining rectified spirit of wine. It is better to have 
 the brushes used for different colours in separate vials. 
 
 Camels' hair brushes made in quills are the best 
 for all purposes, for the large ones made in tin, which 
 are very convenient for using once, are fastened in 
 with resin, or some similar substance, in consequence 
 of which, if they are put in vials with spirit of turpen- 
 tine, the resin becomes dissolved, and they are then 
 totally unfit for use again, as this dissolved resin 
 mixes with the varnish that is about to be used, and 
 will in all probability spoil the whole preparation. If 
 large brushes made in tin and fastened in with glue 
 were used, this objection would not exist to the same 
 extent. 
 
236 
 
 CHAPTER X, 
 
 MODELLING. 
 
 SECTION CVI. 
 
 Of the requisite properties of Plaster of Paris for 
 
 modelling. 
 
 PLASTER of Paris may be bought of toy-makers in 
 the large cities of the United States, at three or four 
 shillings a peck. It is prepared by taking common 
 clean plaster as it comes in ships, and having it finely 
 ground and then bake it in an oven to dissipate its 
 water of crystallization. It however imbibes moisture 
 again, if exposed for a length of time to the atmos- 
 phere, and will require farther drying. Where a ve- 
 ry smooth surface is wanted to the cast, the plaster 
 used should be sifted finely, and the coarser kind, 
 may be reserved for filling up the centre of casts. 
 The peculiar quality, which renders it so convenient 
 for the purposes of receiving the impressions of both 
 hard and soft bodies is, that when mixed with water 
 to the consistence of cream, it absorbs the water in a 
 few minutes, and becomes a firm solid mass, without 
 diminishing its bulk, and consequently without crack- 
 
MODELLING. 237 
 
 ing. That which is of a good quality becomes harder 
 and stronger than chalk, and perfectly white, in about 
 seven or ten minutes. When longer in hardening, 
 it proves to be weaker in its texture and acquires a 
 soft pasty feel, and afterwards crumbles easily. When 
 once applied for making a mould or a cast, and it has 
 partially hardened, it will be injured by the addition 
 of more water ; the requisite quantity of water to 
 give it the proper degree of fluidity should therefore 
 be added at once. 
 
 Plaster of Paris may be coloured by adding to it 
 almost any colouring powder in a dry state, and mix- 
 ing them intimately in a mortar before the water is 
 added. The strength and hardness of the composi- 
 tion may be increased by the addition of a small quan- 
 tity of common size. 
 
 SECTION CVII.* 
 
 General Observations on making Models in Plaster 
 
 of Paris. 
 
 The art of modelling is both pleasing and useful, 
 and may be employed to a great variety of purposes, 
 by the Anatomist, Antiquary, and Naturalist. 
 
 The advantage of using this substance in prefer- 
 ence to others, is, that notwithstanding a slight cal- 
 cination of the alabaster (of which it is made) redu- 
 ces it to a pulverable state, it becomes again a tena- 
 cious and cohering body, by being moistened with wa- 
 ter, and afterwards suffered to dry ; by this means, 
 
238 MODELLING. 
 
 either a concave or a convex figure, may be given to 
 it when wet, by a proper mould or model, which it 
 retains by the hardness it acquires when dry ; and 
 from these qualities it is suitable to the double pur- 
 pose of making both moulds and models. 
 
 The particular manner of making Models, (or 
 Casts, as they are commonly called) depends on the 
 form of the subject to be taken ; where there are 
 only slightly elevated parts, the process is simple 
 and easy ; likewise, where there are such, as form 
 only a right, or any greater angle with the principal 
 surface or plan, from which they project : but where 
 parts project in lesser angles, or form curves, inclin- 
 ed toward the principal surface or plan, the work is 
 more difficult. These observations apply to moulds 
 made upon hard inflexible bodies ; but the case is 
 very different with respect to those made upon soft 
 and yielding substances, as are ail the soft parts of 
 an animal body, for if a mould is made by pouring 
 the fluid plaster on such substances, it may often 
 be freed from the mould, even where the object of 
 the experiment projects in acute angles, from the 
 surface upon which it is laid ; but when the cast is 
 made in such moulds, the mould must be removed 
 cautiously by piece-meals, by reason of the cast not 
 being flexible, as the original is to imitate- 
 
 The Moulds should be made of different degrees 
 of strength, according to the size of the cast intended 
 to be made in it ; small subjects will not require them 
 more than about half an inch thick ; large ones will 
 
MODELLING. 239 
 
 require them an inch, or if very large an inch and a 
 half ; as the large moulds, from the size of the pieces, 
 the weight of the casts, and frequently some difficul- 
 ty in removing them from the models, render them 
 more liable to accidents ; and where a considerable 
 number of casts are intended to be made from one 
 mould, it will require particular care that the mould 
 be accurately and strongly made, and as equal in its 
 thickness as may be. 
 
 SECTION CVIII. 
 
 Making Moulds of Plaster of Paris on soft Bodies, 
 and casting their Models. 
 
 When the original to be copied by a Plaster Model 
 is soft and pliable, it will generally render the process 
 much more simple and easy, as is the case with the 
 viscera of the body ; for in such case, let the parts 
 project as they may, this need not be considered in 
 constructing the mould, for the original yields freely 
 to pressure, and may easily be extracted from the 
 mould, even through an aperture less than the bulk of 
 the subject ; this is particularly the case with the in- 
 testines, or any inflated part 
 
 The first step to be taken, is to grease the surface 
 of the original, to prevent the plaster sticking to it ; 
 this may be done with olive oil, laid on with a soft 
 painter's brush ; but if the part is naturally slip- 
 pery, this will be unnecessary, as is the case with most 
 of the internal parts of the body. Then lay the 
 
240 MODELLING. 
 
 original on a smooth table, or other flat surface, pre- 
 viously greased, or covered with a cloth, to prevent 
 the plaster sticking to it ; then surround the original 
 with a frame or ridge of glazier's putty, at such a dis- 
 tance from it as will admit the plaster to rest upon 
 the table, on all sides of the subject, for about an 
 inch, or so much as to give sufficient strength to the 
 mould ; then a sufficient quantity of fluid plaster is to 
 be poured as uniformly as possible, over the whole 
 surface, until it is every where covered to such a 
 thickness, as to give a proper subsistence to the 
 mould, which may vary in proportion to the size. 
 The whole must then be suffered to remain in this 
 condition, till the plaster has attained its hardness ; 
 when the frame is taken away, the mould may be 
 inverted, the subject removed from it, and when the 
 plaster is perfectly dry, let it be well seasoned. 
 
 For making the Casts in these moulds, the whole 
 of the cavity must be first greased with a mixture of 
 olive oil and lard, in equal parts, and then filled with 
 fine fluid plaster, and the plain of the mould formed 
 by its resting on the surface of the table, covered to 
 a sufficient thickness with coarse plaster, to form a 
 strong basis or support for the Cast, if such basis is 
 requisite, which is particularly the case, where the 
 parts represented are thin and membranous, and 
 would not have sufficient strength of themselves. 
 
 The plaster being thus poured into the mould, suf- 
 fer it to stand until it has acquired its greatest degree 
 of hardness ; then the mould is to be removed, the 
 
MODELLING. 241 
 
 effecting of which is more or less difficult, according 
 to the figure of the model ; if the projecting parts 
 only form right or greater angles with the plain of 
 the base or principal surface, the mould may be re- 
 moved without breaking ; but if the parts project in 
 any lesser angles, or form curved lines, inclining to- 
 ward the general surface or plain, it will be more dif- 
 ficult, and endanger the model ; for in this case the 
 mould must be broken away in small pieces, by 
 means of a small mallet and chisel. 
 
 Should any pieces of the mould be broken off, it 
 may be cemented, by making the two broken sur- 
 faces perfectly wet, and applying them together with 
 a little fresh mixed plaster interposed ; and after it 
 is hardened, the joint may be smoothed, by paring off 
 the rough plaster which may have been pressed out 
 in fixing the piece. If any small holes should be ac- 
 cidentally made by the chissel, they may be thorough- 
 ly wetted with water, and then filled up with a fresh 
 mixed plaster, and smoothed over with the edge of a 
 knife. When the model is perfectly dry, it will be 
 fit for colouring if necessary. 
 
 SECTION CIX.* 
 Making Moulds of Plaster of Paris on hard Bodies. 
 
 It has been already mentioned in the general ob- 
 servations, that the mould is simple, and easity made, 
 even upon hard substances, if none of the projecting 
 parts of the figure form acute angles with the plain 
 31 
 
242 MODELLING. 
 
 upon which it is raised ; in this case, the subject being 
 greased with a mixture of olive oil and hog's lard, in 
 equal proportions, the plaster may be poured over the 
 whole surface at once, to a proper thickness ; and when 
 perfectly hardened, it may be removed in one entire 
 piece, by separating it from the pattern with the fin- 
 gers, or by carefully introducing the blade of a knife 
 into the joint, between the mould and original ; then 
 the mould is to be dried in any exposed situation, or, 
 if requisite, it may be done more expeditiously by ar- 
 tificial heat ; and afterwards seasoned (see section 
 110.) when it will be ready for use. If the mould is 
 not a very deep concave, the fine plaster may be 
 poured into it, and managed similar to the making of 
 the mould, spreading it equally thick over the whole 
 surface. It is always to be remembered, that before 
 the plaster is poured into the mould, its surface must 
 be very thinly spread over with the oil and lard, by 
 means of a small painter's brush, and this is to be re- 
 peated every time a cast is made. 
 
 When the object of experiment, or what the artists 
 call the Pattern, is of an irregular figure, consisting 
 of a number of projections, hollows, curves, and an- 
 gles, the work is more complicated, in respect to con- 
 structing the mould, but not so much difference in 
 making the cast. To form the mould properly, it will 
 be necessary to view attentively the pattern, and first 
 consider in what way to proceed, that the mould may 
 be composed of as few parts or pieces as possible ; 
 that is done by making every piece cover as much of 
 the pattern as may be, without surrounding such 
 
MODELLING. 243 
 
 projecting parts, or running into such hollows, as when 
 the plaster is hardened will not admit the piece to 
 come off (or what is technically called relieve or de- 
 liver) from the pattern without breaking, as, for ex- 
 ample, would be the case with the head of the os fe- 
 moris, if it was entirely enclosed in a body of hard 
 plaster ; for the cervix being of less diameter than the 
 head, the aperture in the plaster situated round the 
 cervix, would be too small for the head to deliver, 
 so that the plaster should not exceed an exact hemis- 
 phere. 
 
 The same difficulty would occur by the plaster 
 running into a hollow, the outer orifice of which is any 
 where of less diameter than the internal part ; so that 
 the mould is to be constructed according to the figure 
 of the pattern (see plate IV, Fig. 3.) So simple a 
 figure as a common, round, or oval calculus may be 
 moulded in three parts only, but to mould an os femo- 
 ris would probably require ten or twelve pieces, and 
 the joints formed by the junction of those several 
 pieces, must run along the most prominent parts of 
 the pattern : a little reflection will be sufficient to 
 shew the* necessity of following this rule invariably, 
 when the mould is constructed of two or more parts, 
 for their more convenient relief, and the stronger for- 
 mation of the internal part ; for where the inner sur- 
 face projects into any hollow part of the pattern, such 
 projecting ridge or point is the most liable to acci- 
 dent ; and if divided by a joint running through it, 
 each part being but half the thickness and strength it 
 
244 MODELLING. 
 
 otherwise would have been, consequently will be 
 much more liable to such accidents. 
 
 Where there is a necessity of internal pieces, for 
 the filling up of any hollows, these are to be first 
 made, and the outer pieces after the first has become 
 hard. 
 
 The first thing to be observed in making a mould 
 upon a hard and dry surface, is to have it smoothly 
 rubbed over with the mixture of oil and lard, in equal 
 parts ; then such hollows as require internal pieces, 
 are to be filled up with a sufficient quantity of fluid 
 plaster, and while in a soft state fix a wire loop into 
 it, as shewn in Plate IV. Fig. 3. The plaster should 
 be a little raised in a pyramidal form round the wire, 
 and when it is hard, the surface of it cut smooth with 
 a knife, preserving two or three angular ridges from 
 the loop to the outer edge ; that it may fix more 
 steadily in the outer piece of the mould afterwards 
 to be made upon it ; then let the outer surface be 
 well greased, to prevent the second piece from adher- 
 ing ; the loop which is left projecting, is to be enclos- 
 ed in a little glaziers' putty, or some such substance 
 before the second piece is laid on ; this may prevent 
 an accident by the second piece taking hold of the 
 loop, and preserves a hollow place for the cord. 
 For the formation of the second or outside piece, 
 mix a proper quantity of plaster, proportioned to 
 the extent of surface it is to cover, and the intended 
 thickness of the mould ; when it is just beginning to 
 thicken, or assumes such a consistence, as not rery 
 
MODELLING. 245 
 
 freely to run off the surface, begin and spread it over 
 the internal piece or pieces, and the pattern as far as 
 possible, so as not to include more than will safely 
 deliver ; and as the plaster becomes more tenacious, 
 add more on the pattern, until it is of sufficient thick- 
 ness, keeping the edges smooth and square like the 
 edge of a board: the plaster should be spread equal- 
 ly on all parts, and the best instrument for doing this, 
 is a painter's palate knife, or what apothecaries call 
 a bolus knife ; but for this purpose it should be 
 chosen not so pliable as they are generally made. 
 When the outside piece is hardened, the edges are to 
 be pared smooth, and nearly squared with a small 
 pointed knife ; in the edges are to be formed with the 
 point of the knife, small conical holes, an inch or 
 more distance from each other, according to the size 
 of the piece (see Plate IV. Fig. 1.) These hollows 
 receive the fluid plaster in forming the adjoining 
 parts of the mould, and occasion points correspond- 
 ing with the hollows, and are intended to preserve 
 the edges of the different pieces steadily in their 
 proper relative situations ; the third piece is then to 
 be formed in a manner similar to the second, greas- 
 ing the edges of the former plentifully with the oil 
 and lard, to prevent the pieces from adhering to each 
 other, and thus the pattern is to be wholly enclosed, 
 and afterwards an aperture cut in a suitable part of 
 the mould for pouring in the plaster, and small holes 
 are also to be bored through the mould, opposite to 
 the wire loops fixed in the inside pieces, through 
 which a cord is to be conveyed from the loop, to 
 confine such pieces in their proper situation during 
 the casting. 
 
246 MODELLING. 
 
 There are frequently occurring, cases in which the 
 pattern is not to be wholly enclosed in the mould as 
 before ; for instance, the mould of a pedestal is to be 
 left open at the bottom, where the fluid plaster is to 
 be poured in, also the bottom of a bust where the 
 supposed section of the body is made ; likewise, 
 when it may be designed to model part of the subject 
 only, as a face, extremity, &c. In these cases where 
 the mould terminates, there will be, of course, an 
 aperture left for the pouring in of the plaster. 
 
 The mould being completely formed, the pieces are 
 to be removed from the pattern or original, and 
 exposed to the air to dry, or dried by artificial heat, 
 and then seasoned according to the rules given in 
 Section 1 10, when it will be fit for use. 
 
 SECTION CX*. 
 Seasoning of Plaster of Paris Moulds. 
 
 By seasoning of moulds, is meant the preparing them 
 for use, after their first formation. The first part of 
 this process is to make them perfectly dry, which, if 
 the mould is of considerable thickness, will require 
 two or three weeks, unless it is expedited by artificial 
 heat ; when dry, they are to be brushed over plenti- 
 fully with boiled linseed oil, made more drying by the 
 addition of finely levigated litharge, white vitriol, or 
 sugar of lead. The inside and the joints of the mould 
 should be particularly well supplied with it ; if it be 
 
MODELLING. 247 
 
 large, the outside need not be attended to, as it 
 would be an unnecessary waste ; very small moulds 
 are sometimes boiled in the oil, which fills the pores 
 more perfectly, and gives a greater hardness to the 
 plaster. After the mould is sufficiently oiled, it is to 
 be set aside until perfectly dried ; when, if the sur- 
 face and joints are thinly brushed over with the olive 
 oil and lard, they will be fit for use. 
 
 If linseed oil be used instead of lard, to grease the 
 mould, in order for casting, it will occasion the cast 
 in a short time to assume a disagreeable yellow col- 
 our. 
 
 SECTION CXI.* 
 Of Casting with Plaster of Paris. 
 
 Casting with Plaster of Paris in moulds made of 
 one entire piece, where the projecting parts form 
 obtuse angles with the general plane, is very simple 
 and easy : nothing more is necessary than to thinly 
 grease the inner surface with the oil and lard before 
 mentioned, by means of a painter's brush ; and then 
 pour into it first a small quantity of plaster, mixed to 
 proper consistence, to flow into all the minute parts, 
 which may be assisted by shaking the mould ; then add 
 more, so as to cover the whole inner surface ; and 
 as the plaster begins to acquire a degree of firmness, 
 it may be disposed in any manner we wish, when it 
 should be raised to a proper and equal thickness on 
 
248 MODELLING. 
 
 the mould, by means of a bolus knife ; the edges 
 should be kept square and even, whilst the plaster is 
 sufficiently fluid ; but this should always be done as 
 expeditiously as possible, carefully avoiding any dis- 
 turbance to the stratum of plaster in conjunction with 
 the mould. If we continue working the plaster with 
 the knife for an unnecessary length of time, whilst it 
 is hardening or setting, it will greatly diminish its co- 
 hesion, and render the model brittle. When the 
 model has acquired a sufficient hardness, it may be 
 removed from the mould by a careful separation ; but 
 where the mould is such as will not admit the deliv- 
 ery of the model, it is to be removed by piece-meals, 
 with a amall hammer and chisel : this will require 
 great caution not to break the body of the model, or 
 chip out pieces from the surface ; if small pieces 
 should be thus accidently broken off, it may be af- 
 terwards repaired by thoroughly wetting the parts, 
 and then filling them with a little fresh mixed plas- 
 ter. 
 
 For casting in moulds of a more complete cavity 
 and complicated construction, it will require a diffe- 
 rent process ; the several parts of which the mould 
 is composed, having their internal surfaces and edges 
 greased with the oil and lard as before, are to be pro- 
 perly put together, and bound by a cord round the 
 mould, in such a manner as to secure them in that 
 situation, and prevent the fluid plaster escaping 
 through the several joints : some fine plaster is then 
 to be poured in at the open end or aperture, and the 
 mould turned about in all directions, so as to give the 
 plaster repeated opportunities of spreading itself 
 
MODELLING. 249 
 
 over the internal surface : when this is sufficiently 
 hardened, pour in more fresh mixed plaster, and turn 
 the mould about as before, so as to spread it over the 
 whole of the plaster first introduced, and then the 
 thickness of the cast (varying according to its size) 
 may be made up by a repetition of the same process, 
 with the cheaper kind of plaster ; this will give a 
 fine surface to the cast, which will look and answer as 
 well as if the whole was composed of the same ma- 
 terials. If the model is to be made solid, it may be 
 filled with the coarse plaster after the mould is suffi- 
 ciently lined with the fine as above. When the cast 
 is hardened, the cord maybe taken ofF, and the pieces 
 of the mould carefully removed. To finish the mo- 
 del, nothing more is necessary than to smooth off 
 the seams, and mend any little imperfection in the 
 surface, by the means mentioned in Section 115. 
 
 Where internal pieces are required in the mould, 
 they are to be securely fixed to the external, as al- 
 ready described, before the several outer parts are 
 put together for casting ; and the cords, after casting, 
 are always to be loosened by removing the twisting 
 sticks, and untying the knots, otherwise the cast or 
 mould will be broken in their separation. 
 
 Such subjects as will not admit of being cast en- 
 tire (as a human figure with its extremities extended) 
 are to be cast in detached parts, and joined after- 
 wards : the legs and arms may be strengthened, by 
 introducing a stick into the centre of the mould, 
 whilst the plaster is in a fluid state ; but this is only 
 32 
 
250 MODELLING. 
 
 done when the cast is made solid, that is, no cavity 
 left in its centre. In very small slender parts a brass 
 wire may be used instead of wood ; iron wire is apt 
 to rust and give a stain to the model. 
 
 SECTION CXIL* 
 Of moulding and casting Busts from living Subjects. 
 
 This is an operation which should be conducted 
 with considerable caution, otherwise the person sub- 
 jected to it may be suffocated. This branch of the 
 art of modelling, will frequently be found very useful 
 to those who wish to enrich their anatomical cabinets 
 with rare and extraordinary cases of disease, pro- 
 ducing considerable alterations in the external figure 
 of the parts. 
 
 For the purpose of making the mould, the person 
 should be laid horizontally on the back, with the head 
 raised by a pillow to that exact position (relative to 
 the body) in which it is naturally carried when the 
 body is erect ; then the parts to be represented, are 
 to be very thinly covered with fine oil of almonds, by 
 means of a soft painter's brush ; the face is then first 
 to be covered with fine fluid plaster,* beginning at 
 the upper part of the forehead, and spreading it over 
 the eyes, which are to be kept close, that the plaster 
 may not come in contact with the globe, yet not clos- 
 
 * The plaster for moulding from a living subject will be less disagreeable, if mix- 
 ed with warm, rather than cold water. 
 
MODELLING. 251 
 
 ed so forcibly as to cause wrinkles, unnatural to the 
 part ; then cover the nose and ears, first plugging 
 up the meatus auditorii with cotton, and the nostrils 
 by a small quantity of tow rolled up, of a proper size, 
 to exclude the plaster from those cavities ; during the 
 time the nose is thus stopped, the person is to breathe 
 through the mouth ; in this state the fluid plaster is 
 to be brought down so low as to cover the upper lip, 
 observing to leave the rolls of tow projecting out of 
 the plaster ; the process being carried thus far, the 
 plaster must be suffered to harden, when the tow 
 may be withdrawn, which will leave the nostrils open 
 and free to breathe through ; then the mouth is to be 
 closed in a natural and easy position, and the plaster 
 advanced to the extremity of the chin : afterwards 
 begin to cover that part of the breast to be repre- 
 sented, and spread the plaster to the outsides of the 
 arms, and upward, so as to meet and join that which 
 is previously laid on the face ; when the whole of the 
 mass has acquired its due hardness, it is to be cau- 
 tiously lifted off, so as not to break in any part, or 
 give pain to the person ; which may easily be pre- 
 vented by a little deliberation and care. 
 
 The mould being thus constructed, let it be dried 
 and seasoned, the cast or model is then to be made by 
 pouring fluid plaster over its concave or inner sur- 
 face, and distributing it equally on all parts ; but the 
 holes in the mould, occasioned by the tow placed in 
 the nostrils, should be first stopped by a little plaster 
 placed externally after the cast is thus formed, of suf- 
 ficient thickness in the mould, the latter is to be re- 
 
252 MODELLING. 
 
 moved by carefully breaking it into small pieces with 
 a mallet and chisel. The eyes, which are necessari- 
 ly shown closed, are to be carved, so as to represent 
 the lids elevated, which is performed without diffi- 
 culty ; the nostrils are also to be hollowed out with 
 the point of a knife ; the back part of the head, which 
 is not represented, on account of the difficulty of 
 moulding parts covered with hair, being always dis- 
 posed to adhere to the mould, is to be afterwards 
 formed by plaster from the fancy or ingenuity of 
 the artist : the edges of the model are to be neatly 
 smoothed off, and then the bust fixed on a proper pe- 
 destal. 
 
 Some artists, who are in the frequent practice of 
 taking masks* and busts, use metallic tubes to place 
 in the nostrils instead of the tow ; but I have repeat- 
 edly used tow without any inconvenience : which ever 
 is used, they should be introduced so as not to distort 
 the part where an exact representation of the expres- 
 sion of the countenance is required. 
 
 This operation, though it may strike an inexperi- 
 enced person with disgust, is performed without 
 much inconvenience to the person subjected to it, 
 and what personages of high rank submit to, as the 
 means of preserving the most accurate and infallible 
 likenesses. 
 
 * So called when the face only is cast. 
 
MODELLING. 253 
 
 SECTION CXIIL* 
 
 Jl Method of representing the Outlines of any Fig- 
 ure in Plaster of Paris. 
 
 First draw with a black-lead pencil the subject 
 to be represented ; then take a quire of paper, and 
 lay upon it a smooth piece of tin foil, large enough 
 to include the sketch made with the pencil ; lay the 
 drawing on the foil, and with a blunt-pointed instru- 
 ment, as large as a needle, fixed in a proper handle, 
 trace the drawing over, bearing the point upon it suf- 
 ficiently hard to make a deep impression in the foil, 
 which afterwards is to be very lightly rubbed over 
 with olive oil, by means of a fine camel's-hair pencil ; 
 then mix a sufficient quantity of plaster of Paris, and 
 pour over it to a proper thickness : when it has ac- 
 quired a proper hardness, raise it from the foil, and 
 there will appear in a raised line a copy of the draw- 
 ing. 
 
 By a little care not to injure the foil, it will serve 
 for a considerable number of copies. It must be re- 
 membered, that if the drawing is traced upon that 
 side of the paper on which it is made, the plaster im- 
 pression will show it reversed ; so that to represent 
 it according to the original, it should be traced on 
 the reverse side of the paper, and for which reason 
 oiled paper is preferable, as in that the drawing may 
 be seen on the contrary side. This mode of taking 
 impressions from foil, is simple, easy, and expedi- 
 
254 MODELLING. 
 
 tious, where a considerable number of copies is want- 
 ed ; and it seems probable, that with some little im- 
 provement, it may become much more useful ; if a 
 method can be acquired to impress deep concaves 
 upon it, in such a manner as to retain the impres- 
 sions, it may be employed in making slightly raised 
 figures in the manner of basso-relievos : this may be 
 assisted by spreading the foil on a smooth even bed 
 of glaziers' putty, half an inch in thickness ; the sur- 
 face may be made an exact plain, by pressing the 
 foil upon it with a smooth piece of board ; the putty, 
 if not made too soft, will receive and retain the im- 
 pression made by pressure on the foil with proper 
 instruments, much better than if the foil lay on a 
 hard table. 
 
 SECTION CXIV.* 
 
 Of making Moulds in Wax on irregular Bodies, and 
 casting in Plaster of Paris, without Seams. 
 
 This is a mode of making Casts, which I believe 
 has never been practised by any other person, though 
 it is attended with very little difficulty ; nor is that 
 difficulty increased by the greater irregularity of bod- 
 ies upon which the mould is made ; but it must be 
 remembered, that only such bodies can be modelled 
 in this way as may be readily destroyed by acids, 
 therefore any fleshy or bony substances are favourable 
 for the purpose. The mould is to be made of a com- 
 position of wax, rosin and turpentine varnish ; which 
 ingredients are to be used in the same proportions 
 
MODELLING. 255 
 
 as for coarse injection, only omitting the colouring 
 matter, not as hurtful, but unnecessary. The prepara- 
 tion to be modelled should be placed upon a smooth 
 board (made sufficiently wet to prevent the wax from 
 sticking to it) in that exact position in which it 
 should be represented ; then gradually pour on the 
 composition, liquified by heat, and as it cools on the 
 surface, add more from time to time, until every part 
 is covered to a sufficient thickness, to bear handling 
 without bending, which would deform the mould, 
 and consequently the model : it should be made at 
 least a quarter of an inch thick upon every part ; when 
 the wax is perfectly cold, let it be carefully removed 
 from the board, and in its lower part an opening will 
 be left, by a part of the orignal being in contact with 
 the table or board, through which the whole or a part 
 of the preparation may be withdrawn, without injur- 
 ing the mould. If it can by any means be wholly 
 withdrawn, there is no occasion for corrosion ; but if 
 it cannot, it must be laid in the diluted muriatic acid 
 to corrode it so perfectly, that it may be washed 
 away with a stream of water. The acid is to be pre- 
 pared in the same manner as directed for corroding 
 injected preparations. The preparation being en- 
 tirely dissolved, and washed away, suffer the wax 
 mould to get perfectly dry, then fill the cavity with 
 plaster of Paris ; when this is hardened, put it into a 
 proper vessel of water, and set it over the fire, in or- 
 der that the wax may liquify and rise to the surface, 
 which when cold may be removed, and the plaster 
 model taken out ; the water does not break down the 
 texture of the plaster. The model will not be of a 
 
256 MODELLING. 
 
 good white, on account of the wax entering the pores 
 on the surface, and communicating its colour ; but 
 this is a circumstance of no consequence, when it is 
 to be painted after nature : if it should be wished to 
 preserve the model of a better white, white wax, 
 without any mixture, should be used. 
 
 To make a mould of some preparations, it may be 
 necessary to immerse them in a vessel of melted wax 
 until it is cold ; but care should be taken that no 
 part touches the bottom or sides of the vessel, or 
 floats to the surface ; as this, however small the points 
 of contact, would form openings in the mould in im- 
 proper places : when the wax is cold, remove the 
 mass from the vessel in its entire form, and make 
 an opening with the knife in the mould, opposite to 
 that part- of the preparation, which is of least con- 
 sequence if disfigured ; this opening is to give the 
 acid access to the preparation, which is then to be 
 corroded, and the process conducted as before de- 
 scribed. 
 
 SECTION CXV.* 
 
 Of making Moulds with Putty, and casting with Plas- 
 ter of Paris. 
 
 Putty* is not adapted to the making of moulds, to 
 afford so accurate an imitation of the original as plas- 
 
 * The Putty here meant is that kind used by the Glaziers ; but with raw in- 
 stead of boiled linseed oil. It should be kept under water when not used, to 
 preserve it from drying. 
 
MODELLING. 257 
 
 ter of Paris, but may sometimes be used for subjects 
 whose figure will not admit of being moulded in plas- 
 ter, as is the case where there are numerous project- 
 ing points, incapable of delivering from a more solid 
 mould, as is sometimes the case with diseased bones. 
 One surface only, consisting of not more than an hem- 
 isphere or semi-cylinder, can be represented in one 
 cast ; so that to exhibit the whole surface of a bone 
 it will require at least two casts. 
 
 The manner of conducting this process, is first to 
 prepare a bed of putty upon a table, of such size and 
 shape as the original may require ; it should be squar- 
 ed at the sides, and its upper surface made smooth 
 and even ; then the original is to be thoroughly wet- 
 ted and placed upon the putty, with that side down- 
 ward intended to be represented ; in that direction it 
 must be pressed into it, so as to include half its cir- 
 cumference, and the edges of the putty round the orig- 
 inal should be pressed close to it ; then let it be care- 
 fully removed, preserving the flatness of its upper 
 surface by the assistance of a bolus knife. Upon the 
 flat surface of the putty, make a rim at a sufficient 
 distance from the impression, when it may be filled 
 with fluid plaster until it flows over the upper smooth 
 surface to a proper thickness ; that on the surface of 
 the putty will afford a base to the model of a suffi- 
 cient strength, if such base is needful, which may 
 not always be the case. When the plaster is suffi- 
 ciently hardened, remove the putty from the cast, 
 pick out such pieces as may be left in the interstices, 
 then cut the edges of the base square and even. A 
 33 
 
258 MODELLING. 
 
 repetition of the same kind of process with the other 
 side or sides of the original, will give a good repre- 
 sentation of the subject. Thus I have frequently 
 taken moulds of bones, shells, fossils, &c. None but 
 such things as are tolerably hard and inflexible, can 
 be imitated in this way, on account of the force ne- 
 cessary to be made to impress them in the putty, 
 which, if they are yielding, will disfigure their seve- 
 ral parts. 
 
 SECTION CXVI*. 
 Of smoothing the Surface of Platter Models. 
 
 This is done by means offish skin and Dutch rush- 
 es, such as are used by cabinet-makers. When a 
 cast is taken from a mould, constructed of several parts 
 or pieces, there will be small projecting lines formed 
 by the plaster running a small distance into the joints 
 of the mould : these projecting lines, called seams, 
 are to be carefully removed with a small knife bent 
 laterally, so that the point may not cut the surround- 
 ing parts ; afterwards they may be more neatly 
 smoothed by a Dutch rush. 
 
 The fish-skin is used to take off any more consid- 
 erable roughness which may arise from a bad mould, 
 or otherwise ; but as it leaves a scratched rough sur- 
 face, it should be finished by the rushes. 
 
 It frequently happens that there is a considerable 
 number of air holes in the surface of a model, owing 
 
MODELLING. 259 
 
 to small bubbles being retained under the plaster, 
 when poured into the mould, especially if the plaster 
 should be too thick ; they are to be filled up with a 
 little fluid plaster with the point of a knife 5 but the 
 holes should be thoroughly wetted, by means of a 
 sponge dipped in clean water, immediately previous 
 to the application of the plaster. These parts are 
 afterwards to be smoothed over as before described. 
 
 SECTION CXV1L* 
 Of colouring Models in Plaster of Paris- 
 
 There are several kinds of colouring used upon 
 plaster of Paris, but I do not know any better for 
 anatomical models, than the common oil paint used 
 by Sign and House Painters ; for this has one con- 
 siderable advantage, in not being injured by washing 
 with warm soap-water and a soft Painter's brush : it 
 should be done at least two or three times over where 
 the cast is designed to shew any thing which has a 
 natural gloss, as any internal part from its moisture, 
 the globe of the eye, &c. When models of this kind 
 are raised upon a plaster ground or base, they may, 
 if necessary, have a gloss, and the ground be painted 
 of a dead colour ; this distinction may be made by 
 painting the model twice over, and the ground but 
 once ; or if it is not necessary to paint the model 
 twice, it may be varnished when dry, with oil varnish. 
 VVhere the oil colouring is used, any little injury in 
 the cast or model may be repaired with Glaziers' 
 
260 MODELLING. 
 
 putty, which would not answer if water colours were 
 used. 
 
 With respect to the art of imitating nature by col- 
 ours, this can only be acquired by practice and the 
 exercise of genius ; it is an art distinct from anato- 
 my, yet is very necessary for an anatomist to be ac- 
 quainted with ; and was it more regarded as a neces- 
 sary part of education in youth, designed for this 
 study, we should not have had so many badly exe- 
 cuted anatomical plates published by eminent authors ; 
 and by this means too, many important cases might 
 have been communicated to the world, which for 
 want of it are buried in oblivion. 
 
 SECTION CXVIIL* 
 Of repairing injured Casts in Plaster of Paris. 
 
 Casts in Plaster of Paris are very liable to acciden- 
 tal injuries ; and without some knowledge of this 
 kind, many valuable cases may be wholly lost. 
 
 When the casts have never been oiled or painted, 
 the pieces accidentally broken off may be replaced, 
 by first thoroughly wetting the two parts which are 
 to be joined, then spreading on each a little fluid plas- 
 ter, and applying the surfaces, pressing them close 
 upon each other, and wiping off the superfluous plas- 
 ter, which may be pressed out of the joints : if any 
 pieces should be lost, the space may be filled up with 
 fresh mixed plaster ; and when hardened, shaped 
 
MODELLING. 261 
 
 with a knife, to imitate the original figure of the part, 
 and afterwards smoothed with a Dutch rush, if neces- 
 sary. When casts have been oiled or painted with 
 oil colours, they are not so favourable for repairing 
 in this way, except when a fracture happens through 
 a part of considerable thickness ; for that which has 
 once imbibed the oil, is unfavourable for the adhesion 
 of fresh mixed plaster ; those not disposed, on this 
 account, to adhere firmly, may be fixed by means of 
 strong glue ; and if such pieces, not very large, 
 should be lost, the part may be supplied with bees- 
 wax, rendered more pliable by the addition of a small 
 quantity of common turpentine : this may be used in 
 such a degree of heat, as will facilitate the formation 
 of it according to the original figure of the part ; 
 should it get cold and hard during the application, it 
 may be easily softened by holding near to it a hot 
 iron of considerable thickness. Glaziers' putty may 
 be used for the filling up of any very small chasms ; 
 the part being lightly brushed over with boiled lin- 
 seed oil, before the putty is laid on, that it may strike 
 the better ; when the part is neatly painted, it will be 
 quite unobservable. If putty is used to fill any con- 
 siderable vacuities, it will shrink in the process of 
 drying, and give an uneven, unnatural surface ; for 
 which reason wax is recommended in such cases. 
 
262 MODELLING. 
 
 SECTION CXIX. 
 
 Of casting a Model of the Labyrinth of the Ear 
 with lead, and Corroding the bone in an Jlcid. 
 
 Take a temporal bone, and heat it in the fire, un- 
 til its animal substance is consumed, the lime being 
 left uninjured. Then having suffered it to cool, in- 
 close the petrous portion in plaster of Paris, or in 
 soft clay, and suffer it to dry, taking care that all the 
 foramina leading out of it are closed ; after which 
 heat the whole, and while in this state pour molten 
 lead into the external opening of the ear, which will 
 run into the labyrinth by the foramen ovale, or, (if 
 the stapes has previously been removed,) into the for- 
 amen ovale. The clay or plaster covering of the bone 
 is now to be broken off, and the bone immersed in a 
 mixture of sulphuric or muriatic acid one part, and 
 water three parts, which will immediately destroy 
 the bone without acting on the lead, which will rep- 
 resent the form of the semi-circular canals, the coch- 
 lea and the vestibule. 
 
263 
 
 CHAPTER 
 
 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 
 
 Directions for preserving animals and parts of ani- 
 mals for anatomical investigation. 
 
 Preliminary Observations. 
 
 WHEN the practical anatomist has acquired an ac- 
 curate knowledge of the structure of the human 
 body, and has made a collection of preparations as 
 memorials of his industry, and for future reference in 
 practice, he generally feels inclined to extend his in- 
 vestigations into the structure of such animals as ex- 
 hibit traces of resemblance to man to observe their 
 points of difference and similarity, and the wonder- 
 ful adaptation of structure to use in all, according to 
 the various wants and circumstances of each. 
 
 But besides gratifying the curiosity, such a study 
 furnishes the mind with many interesting illustrations 
 of human anatomy and physiology, a knowledge of 
 which is so essential to success in the practice of 
 physic and surgery. The celebrated Mr. John Hun- 
 ter was fully aware of this truth, and with a zeal 
 
264 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 
 
 worthy of the subject and of his philosophical mind, 
 pushed his inquiries into every department of com- 
 parative anatomy, and gathered a rich harvest of 
 facts and observations, interesting to himself and 
 to the medical world. 
 
 The invaluable collection made by this truly great 
 man, was purchased by the British government, and 
 placed under the care of the Royal college of sur- 
 geons of London, who have made extensive addi- 
 tions and diffused its benefits far and wide by lectures 
 and publications. 
 
 The conservator of the Hunterian museum, Mr. 
 William Clift, F. R. S. was a pupil of the celebrat- 
 ed Mr. Hunter, and imbibed from him those qualities 
 of ardent zeal, patient industry and candid inquiry that 
 characterized in so extraordinary a degree his illus- 
 trious teacher. The life of Mr. Clift has been de- 
 voted exclusively to the interests of this establish- 
 ment, and with a success that has already secured 
 to him the gratitude of his countrymen, and of all 
 persons interested in medicine and surgery, who re- 
 sort to the capital of Christendom for professional 
 improvement. 
 
 The directions contained in the next seven sec- 
 tions, are taken from a recent pamphlet sent me by 
 Mr. Clift, and were " principally framed by the late 
 Mr. Hunter, to facilitate and render effectual the en- 
 deavours of the friends of scientific inquiries, but 
 who are not well acquainted with the art of prepar- 
 
COMPARATIVE ANATOMY,, 265 
 
 ing and preserving animal substances for anatomical 
 investigation." But although the special object of 
 the directions is, to inform the friends of the Royal 
 College of physicians and surgeons how they can 
 best aid the establishment, which renders them more 
 extensive than is necessary for the wants and purpo- 
 ses of an individual anatomist in this country, yet 
 they comprise a brief notice of such objects as are 
 most worthy of attention for his own improvement. 
 
 Brute animals it has justly been remarked, fre- 
 quently afford instances of extraordinary productions, 
 and of expressions of deviations from the healthy con- 
 ditions and offices of parts ; useful in explaining alter- 
 ations in the human organs, besides advancing vete- 
 rinary knowledge. Examples of such productions 
 and expressions, are, therefore, to be sought for 
 among persons who have opportunities of making ob- 
 servations upon dead animals. 
 
 SECTION CXX. 
 
 Of the Methods of Catching Animals ; and of the 
 Primary Objects of .Attention in Them. 
 
 All Animals are naturally wild ; and, in many 
 instances, it needs considerable art to catch them. 
 The more perfect Animals which have much pro- 
 gressive motion, require to be caught by means, 
 which, generally, produce some degree of injury to 
 
 their different parts, and often to their external 
 34 
 
266 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 
 
 form ; this injury will necessarily be in proportion to 
 the difficulty of capture. 
 
 Quadrupeds in general, are either caught in traps, 
 or shot ; consequently some parts of the body are 
 injured. Birds, also, are usually shot, to the inju- 
 ry of their plumage. 
 
 At the time of taking an Animal, it would be prop- 
 er to collect, on the spot, as many circumstances con- 
 nected with its history as possible ; particularly with 
 regard to food, locomotion, propagation, &c. 
 
 Snakes, Lizards, and Reptiles in general, being 
 taken without serious injury, suffer little in their ex- 
 ternal form : yet, even these may be considerably 
 injured without care ; for, as they are commonly ob- 
 tained in the breeding season, it is possible that the 
 organs of generation, and their contents, as eggs, &c. 
 may be destructively compressed ; it is therefore 
 proper to seize them by the neck, and immediately to 
 immerse them in spirit, so as to drown them ; or to 
 keep them in a bag until spirit can be procured. 
 
 Turtles, Fishes, Crustacea, and Insects, suffer very 
 little from the manner of being caught. 
 
 The softer animals, most of which inhabit the sea, 
 sustain little injury from the mode of their prehen- 
 sion ; but, as their shape, and size, admit of conside- 
 rable variation, their form may suffer from the man- 
 ner in which they die. 
 
COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 267 
 
 Animals, without bone to determine their shape or 
 locomotion, yet, having a considerable extent of mus- 
 cular contraction, vary their figure according to cir- 
 cumstances ; of this kind are the Actiniae, Holothu- 
 ria, Testacea, c. which should, therefore, be allow- 
 ed to die gradually in the water to which they are 
 accustomed ; whence, dying in a relaxed state, more 
 of their external form will be displayed : but it is 
 desirable to have specimens in the different degrees 
 of expansion, and contraction. 
 
 When dead, they are immediately to be put into 
 spirit, to prevent putrefaction ; which, otherwise, 
 would soon follow, 
 
 A sketch, however slight, or ill executed, of Mol- 
 luscaa, and others whose form and colour are materi- 
 ally altered by death, or when put into spirit, will 
 greatly assist in rendering a description intelligible. 
 A memorandum of the scale upon which the drawing 
 is made, whether of the natural size, or so many inch- 
 es to a foot, affords essential information ; the admea- 
 surements, also, of an animal where parts only are 
 preserved, is very necessary. Moveover, the Sex 
 of the individual should be noted, if not expressed by 
 the part preserved. 
 
 Animals, of whatever class, which are small enough 
 to be preserved whole, should be kept in that state. 
 Such as are so large that they cannot possibly be 
 brought home entire in spirit, should be divided into 
 those parts which characterize them ; but only some 
 
$68 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 
 
 of the larger Fishes, Birds, and Quadrupeds, require 
 this treatment. 
 
 When this separation of parts is requisite, it will 
 be necessary, previously, to notice the external ap- 
 pearances ; the number of mammae in the female, 
 and their situation ; whether between the anterior 
 extremities, as in the Monkey, Elephant, &c. or 
 along the abdomen, as in the Sow, Bitch, Rat, &c. or 
 between the hind legs, as in the Mare, Cow, &c. If 
 the female cannot be procured, inquiry should be 
 made concerning the mamma3 of the male ; for it 
 sometimes happens, that the male, as the horse, for 
 instance, has no such parts. 
 
 It is hardly necessary to describe the external 
 parts of the female ; as, generally, the whole of them 
 maybe preserved. 
 
 The situation, and external appearances, of the 
 male organ, in its natural state, must be remarked ; 
 whether it be along the abdomen, as in the Dog; 
 pointing backwards, as in the Cat ; whether cover, 
 ed by the common skin, as in the Bull ; or by 
 a proper skin, and only attached to the abdomen on 
 one side, as in the Dog. Any other external part 
 which cannot be preserved, or which is too large to 
 be kept entire, should be particularly noticed. 
 
 When the examination has proceeded thus far, 
 the separation is to be begun, by opening the abdo- 
 men, &c. to ascertain what internal parts are worthy 
 of preservation. 
 
COMPARATIVE ANATOMY, 269 
 
 When the animal is opened for the purpose of sep- 
 aration, it will be proper to take a general view of the 
 viscera in their natural situation ; to ascertain the 
 number of lobes of the lirer ; whether there be a 
 gall-bladder, &c. What be the kind of kidneys, 
 whether conglobate, or conglomerate ; their situation, 
 &c. Also to make such other observations upon the 
 different organs as may be deemed necessary ; after 
 which they may be divided, and severally distin- 
 guished. 
 
 Animals whose food is not known, should have the 
 contents of the stomach examined, to ascertain, if 
 possible, what aliment they had last taken ; and also 
 of the colon and rectum, to determine the kind of 
 fseces which they may contain. 
 
 The stomach and alimentary canal of Fishes, and 
 other marine animals, merit particular examination, 
 as frequently containing not only animals and parts 
 of animals which inhabit great depths, and other sit- 
 uations equally beyond the reach of ordinary endeav- 
 ours ; but also singularly formed intestinal worms. 
 
 Memoranda should be made of the localities from 
 whence specimens have been obtained, whether 
 sea or on land ; and the period of the year when 
 taken, as material to determine the breeding season, 
 &c, the vernacular names, and the meaning thereof, 
 if any, in the language of the country. If there be 
 no name for a specimen, a number should be at- 
 
TREATMENT OF QUADRUPEDS. 
 
 tached to it, corresponding with that of the descrip- 
 tion or memorandum respecting it. A wooden tally 
 or label should be attached to each specimen, where 
 several are put into the same bottle ; these are eas- 
 ily made with a penknife, thus [ i 1 1 v~x x 1 1 ]<^ 
 as tallies of sheet lead, parchment, leather, &c. are 
 liable to be defaced or obliterated. 
 
 Such tallies are preferable, also for dried speci- 
 mens ; as those written with ink are liable to be de- 
 faced, by moisture, or insects, during the voyage. 
 
 The bottles being numbered, little trouble will 
 be required to keep an account of their contents, 
 which will add greatly to their value. If this be 
 neglected, much confusion and uncertainty may en- 
 sue. 
 
 A description should be taken of form, colour, 
 &c. while the animal be alive, or immediately after 
 death, before it be put into spirit ; which frequent- 
 ly produces a collapse or contraction of parts, and 
 changes or destroys the colours, particularly those 
 which are delicate or evanescent. 
 
 SECTION. CXXI. 
 
 Of the Treatment, and Preservation, of Quadru- 
 peds. 
 
 The head of a Quadruped should be preserved, 
 particularly on account of the teeth ; if two large, 
 that part in which the teeth are placed, may be cut 
 off; but this will seldom be necessary. The feet 
 
TREATMENT OF QUADRUPEDS. 271 
 
 and tail may be kept attached to the skin, and dried ; 
 or, if the skin be not preserved, the feet and tail 
 only may be either dried, or put into spirit. 
 
 The oesophagus, and stomach, should be preserv- 
 ed inspirit, with a part of the duodenum ; and the 
 caecum, if any, with a small portion of the ilium, and 
 of the colon. But, if the animal be not too large, 
 it will be preferable to cut off, from the mesentery, 
 the jejunum and ilium, which need not be preserved ; 
 and then to strip down from the spine the contents 
 of the abdomen, beginning at the diaphragm ; so 
 that the stomach, liver, spleen, pancreas, colon, &c. 
 with their attachments, may be taken out together, 
 as low as the rectum where it lies in the pelvis, 
 and, after being cleansed, put into spirit. 
 
 The heart, and lungs, may be preserved in connec- 
 tion, if not too bulky ; if so, the heart, with part of 
 the large blood-vessels. 
 
 The contents of the pelvis, namely, the bladder 
 and rectum, with the internal parts of generation, 
 both male and female ; and the external parts not 
 separated from the internal, with a large portion of 
 the surrounding skin, should be preserved together 
 in spirit. 
 
 Should the female parts be in a state of impreg- 
 nation, they are to be taken out, as before described, 
 without opening the uterus ; or only sufficiently to 
 admit the spirit for their preservation. 
 
 Abortions should be preserved entire. The fetus, 
 when found in the abdomen, may be taken out with 
 the whole of the vagina, uterus, ovaria, &c. 
 
272 TREATMENT OF QUADRUPEDS, 
 
 Also the young of large animals, as of the Whale, 
 the Seal, the Walrus, &c. if of a small size ; but 
 when of too advanced a growth, the tail or extremi- 
 ties may be cut off, and the body put into spirit. 
 
 Of very large full-grown animals, the following 
 parts should be preserved : 
 
 The eyes with a portion of the external skin, 
 their muscles, and fat, in an entire mass. 
 
 The organs of hearing. 
 
 The beginning of the aorta, and pulmonary artery, 
 for their valves. 
 
 The mammae of the female ; with part of the sur- 
 rounding skin. 
 
 The organ of the male, taken off with part of the 
 anus ; and the testes. 
 
 The bones of animals should be preserved ; and 
 if possible, be from adult, but not aged individuals ; 
 the flesh being removed, the bones may be either 
 boiled, or, put into a cask, and securely headed in ; 
 if the time and circumstances will not allow of ma- 
 ce ration. 
 
 To preserve the bones of an animal for a skele- 
 ton, it is desirable that as much of the flesh should 
 be removed as possible, while quite fresh ; without 
 cutting, or defacing the surface of the bones : and, 
 if opportunity allows, it is advisable to soak them for 
 several hours in water, frequently changed, to sep- 
 arate the blood ; and the brain may be broken down, 
 and extracted, by means of a small flattened stick : 
 otherwise the skull will be discoloured. 
 
 The bones should be allowed to remain connect- 
 ed as much as possible, and, when dried in a tolera 
 
COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 273 
 
 bly straight position, they may be packed in saw- 
 dust, or shavings of deal, or any other white wood, 
 which will not cause discolouration. 
 
 Besides an entire set of bones, it is desirable 
 that a skull or two, shewing the teeth in various 
 stages of growth, be preserved. The teeth to be 
 as perfect as possible, and if any become loose or 
 fall out, they may be fixed in their sockets with 
 strong gum water, or glue, but never with paint or 
 putty. Or the loose teeth may be tied up in a piece 
 of linen, and securely attached to the skull. 
 
 Delicate specimens of skulls, or sets of bones, 
 should be inclosed in small separate boxes, to pre- 
 vent their being crushed by larger specimens ; and 
 many may then be packed in one large case. 
 
 All the parts of one animal should be kept sepa- 
 rate from those of other individuals ; except where 
 it is impossible to confound the parts of one animal 
 with those of another. 
 
 SECTION CXXII. 
 Of Birds. 
 
 Before proceeding to separate the parts of Birds, 
 which are too large to be preserved entire, their ex- 
 ternal appearances should be accurately observed. 
 
 Birds have few internal parts of importance, for 
 examination. The hearts and kidneys of all Birds 
 are presumed to be similar. 
 
 The liver, stomach, intestines, and oviduct, may 
 all be taken out as low as the anus, and preserved 
 
 in spirit. 
 
 35 
 
474 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 
 
 When many specimens of rare Birds are procur- 
 ed, the heads of a few of them may be taken off and 
 preserved in spirit, for the structure of the bill, 
 tongue, and trachea ; the legs and feet should also 
 be preserved. 
 
 SECTION CXXIII. 
 Of Fishes and Reptiles- 
 
 In Fishes, regard should be had to the external 
 appearances, the number of fins, their shape, and 
 situation. The length, breadth, arid thickness of 
 the animal, and the relative distances and proportions 
 of as many parts as possible should be recorded. 
 
 In very Jarge specimens of the Ray or Shark 
 kind, the abdomen should be opened, and the speci- 
 men divided below the heart, across the superior 
 portion of the liver : by which means the head, 
 heart, mouths of the oviducts, if a female, or testes, 
 if a male, will be preserved together. The tail, if 
 a thick one, as that of a Shark, may be taken off 
 a little below the anus, and the trunk alone preserv- 
 ed. If the trunk be too large the body should be 
 cut through, above the pelvis, and the parts contain- 
 ed in the lower portion preserved. If a female, the 
 two oviducts should be detached through their 
 whole length, where they pass along the abdomen 
 on each side of the spine ; but kept attached to the 
 pelvis in front, and the whole preserved. 
 
 If with young, or eggs, take out the whole of the 
 organs of generation, without opening them. The 
 
COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 275 
 
 fetal peculiarities in these animals should be noted : 
 and the stomach and intestines should be saved if 
 any thing peculiar be observable in them. If not 
 of the Ray, or Shark tribe, take out such parts from 
 the abdomen as are uncommon, or singular. 
 
 The eyes of many Fishes are proper objects for 
 preservation. 
 
 Separate the heads of such Fishes as have any 
 thing remarkable about the teeth or gills, and are too 
 large to be preserved entire. 
 
 If there be small examples of an interesting kind, 
 keep them entire ; but still preserve such parts of 
 the larger specimens as are curious. 
 
 When Alligators, Crocodiles, Turtles, or Tortoi- 
 ses, are too large to be prserved entire, some parts, 
 as the head, the whole of the viscera stripped down 
 from the neck to the anus, and also the anus, should 
 be preserved. 
 
 Small Lizards may be preserved entire. 
 
 Snakes may be preserved entire, or in part, ac- 
 cording to their size. The heads both of poisonous 
 and innocuous Serpents should be preserved entire in 
 spirit, for the examination of their teeth and fangs. 
 
 In regard to Serpents, there is one circumstance 
 with which it is particularly necessary for the Collec- 
 tor to be acquainted : that of being able to distin- 
 guish with certainty between those which are veno- 
 mous, and those which are not so. 
 
 Innocuous Serpents have four rows of teeth on the 
 upper part of the mouth, viz. one row on each side, 
 immediately within the lip, usually denominated the 
 labial teeth ; and two shorter rows situate on the pal- 
 ate, termed the palatal teeth. In small specimens it 
 
276 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 
 
 may be necessary to pass a pin along the mouth from 
 behind forwards, to detect them. The head is gen- 
 erally long and slender, differing little from the size 
 of the neck ; and the scales on the head much lar- 
 ger than those on the body. 
 
 Whereas, in venomous serpents, the labial, or out- 
 er rows of teeth, do not exist ; the two palatal rows 
 only are present : but towards the anterior part of 
 the upper jaw on each side, just beneath the situation 
 of the eye, are placed the poison-fangs, which are 
 considerably larger and longer than the ordinary 
 teeth, and rnoveable at their base, so as to fold back 
 like the blade of a penknife. The form of the head 
 is generally short, flat, and broad ; and the scales on 
 the head much smaller than those on the body. 
 
 There are, however, two exceptions to the fore- 
 going characteristic marks of innocuous Serpents, 
 viz. the Cobra de Capello, Coluber Naja, LIN. 
 which, although poisonous, has large scales on the 
 crown of the head : -and the Bungarwn Pamah of 
 DR. PATRICK RUSSELL, also poisonous, which has, 
 on each side, three labial teeth of a very small size. 
 
 On the contrary, the Boa Constrictor, although 
 innocuous, has small scales on the crown of the head ; 
 which, in every other known instance, is confined 
 to venomous Serpents. 
 
 SECTION CXXIV. 
 
 Of Crustacea and Insects. 
 
 Lobsters, Crabs, Beetles, Flies, Butterflies, &c. 
 may be dried, because their external covering is their 
 
COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 277 
 
 hardest part, and alters little by shrinking. This 
 is to be done when the external form only is required 
 for examination ; or when the object is too minute 
 to admit of other investigation. 
 
 In preparing them by drjdng, great care is to be 
 taken to preserve all their external parts as perfect, 
 and as expressive of progressive action, as possible. 
 
 Lobsters, Crabs, and Crawfish, when dried, should 
 be wrapped in soft paper, and packed in cotton, so 
 as not to allow them any motion in the case, nor to 
 touch one another. 
 
 Beetles, Butterflies, Moths, &c. should be pinned 
 down upon a board, or piece of cork ; or upon wax 
 which has been melted, and poured along the bottom 
 of a flat box : the pins should be greased or oiled to 
 prevent the juices of the animal from drying round 
 them, and producing rust, which would render them 
 difficult to be removed from the insect. If the pins 
 were pointed at both ends, they would more readily 
 admit of the specimen being turned. 
 
 The specimen should be so securely fixed as to 
 allow of the motion of the box in all directions ; and 
 the fastening should be in proportion to the weight 
 of the specimen. 
 
 When preserved for anatomical investigation, 
 Lobsters, Crawfish, Crabs, Beetles, &c. may be put 
 into a bottle together in spirit ; or if each class be 
 kept separate, several examples may be packed to- 
 gether. 
 
 Butterflies, Moths, and their Larvae, &c. should be 
 kept by themselves ; for, if put into the same bottle 
 with the above, they would be injured. 
 
278 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 
 
 SECTION CXXV. 
 
 Of Eggs. 
 
 To preserve the eggs of Birds with their nests, 
 each nest should be put into a round box, just large 
 enough to contain it. After having made a small 
 perforation at each end of the eggs, and expelled 
 their contents, some cotton should be laid upon them, 
 to keep them from moving, and the whole should be 
 covered with the lid. 
 
 Large eggs, as those of the Ostrich or Emeu, when 
 near hatching, should be preserved in spirit, on ac- 
 count of the peculiarities of the foetus of this class of 
 animals. 
 
 The eggs of Turtles, Lizards, Crocodiles, Snakes, 
 &c. when incubating, should also be preserved in 
 spirit, for the peculiarities of the foetus : likewise 
 the eggs of all sorts of insects, on the same account. 
 
 A small perforation should be made at each end of 
 the egg, by which the spirit will have access to the 
 inside, and the contents be more certainly preserved. 
 
 SECTION CXXVI. 
 
 Various observations on the means of preserving 
 different Jlnimals. 
 
 An animal of the firmest kind, in a temperate cli- 
 mate, may generally be preserved by a quantity of 
 proof spirit equal to its own weight. 
 
 Animals which are termed firm, are those of the 
 
COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 279 
 
 quadruped kind, as Rats, Mice, &c. and indeed 
 Snakes, Lizards, and all land insects, so far as re- 
 spects the quantity of spirit, may be considered in 
 the same class. 
 
 Some of the soft Fishes, however, may perhaps 
 require rather more spirit than their own weight : 
 yet there are many Fishes which will admit of being 
 referred to the first distinction. 
 
 Soft animals, as the marine ones generally, require 
 rectified spirit in nearly the same proportion as the 
 above : but these are relative circumstances, which 
 will vary according to the climate, and the state of the 
 animal at the time. If the climate be very hot, or if 
 a considerable time shall elapse before they are trans- 
 mitted to this country, more spirit will be required. 
 
 The watery, or pulpy kind, such as Sepise, Me- 
 dusae, Echini, AsteriaB, &c. from their internal struc- 
 ture being extremely tender, require rectified spirit. 
 
 The proportion of spirit should be particularly at- 
 tended to, when parts are large ; for a small animal, 
 or part, generally obtains more than what is here di- 
 rected, while a large one has less. 
 
 If the animal be small, it may be preserved by im- 
 mersing it in its own weight of spirit ; but some spi- 
 rit thrown into the abdomen, will further tend to its 
 preservation. 
 
 If the animal be large, the thorax and abdomen 
 should be filled with spirit ; otherwise, before the 
 spirit can penetrate through the skin, the internal 
 parts will become putrid. A trochar, or syringe, will 
 answer for filling both cavities. Large fishes should 
 be treated in the same way. 
 
280 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 
 
 In the Molluscse, the spirit will generally penetrate 
 sufficiently fast, to prevent putrefaction. 
 
 Small animals, preserved for their external figure, 
 should be suspended, or placed in the attitudes in 
 which they are designed to be ultimately preserved. 
 
 Animals which are preserved merely for dissection, 
 may be put into a bottle or cask, without suspension ; 
 and even more than one or two in the same vessel ; 
 paying strict attention to the strength and proportion 
 of the spirit. 
 
 If it be intended that two or more should be put 
 into the same cask, they should, however, be kept 
 separate for some time ; otherwise, they would make 
 too large a mass for the spirit to penetrate sufficiently 
 to prevent putrefaction. 
 
 More than one or two may be put into the same 
 vessel, if suspended, as then they cannot press on 
 one another ; or they may be put into small wooden 
 boxes, which have been put together with wooden 
 pegs instead of nails, having holes bored in the sides 
 to admit the spirit, and prevent the specimens injur- 
 ing each other, by coming in contact : in this manner 
 several may be sent in the same cask, or jar. 
 
 According to the proposed proportion of animal 
 and spirit, a vessel may be half filled with the for- 
 mer. 
 
 Birds are seldom too large to be kept in spirit, in 
 which they should be suspended with care, for the 
 preservation of external appearances. Several may 
 be put into one vessel, but they must not be pressed 
 upon one another. 
 
 The mouth of the vessel should be wide enough to 
 
COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 281 
 
 let them pass against the direction of the feathers. 
 This precaution is also necessary for the preserva- 
 tion of the extremities of Crustacea, Insects, and Rep- 
 tiles. 
 
 If the Bird were put into a proper position, the 
 feathers being laid smooth, and rolled up in fine 
 linen, the external form might be still better pre- 
 served. 
 
 If a pipe were put into the mouth of the Bird, and 
 spirit thrown down the trachea, it would pass through 
 nearly the whole body by means of the air cells. 
 Some spirit might, also, be injected by the anus ; 
 and into the abdomen, by a small aperture made for 
 that purpose. 
 
 Animals of a soft or pulpy texture should be kept 
 separate from those which are hard, more especially 
 if preserved on account of their external figure ; and 
 should not be crowded. If possible, they should be 
 suspended : those not firm enough to support their 
 own weight upon threads, should be put into different 
 bottles. 
 
 Shell-fish may be put into a vessel in any manner, 
 as the shell preserves them from pressure ; but if they 
 died protruding from the shell, they should be sus- 
 pended in the spirit. If of the spiral kind, a small 
 piece of the shell should be broken off at the apex to 
 allow the spirit to enter that end of the shell ; other- 
 wise, from the body of the animal filling the mouth 
 of the shell, that extremity of the animal would be- 
 come putrid before the spirit could penetrate to it 
 
 Snakes should have some spirit injected by the 
 mouth and anus, as they otherwise soon become pu- 
 36 
 
COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 
 
 trescent, and lose the cuticle about the abdomen : 
 they may then be coiled up in close spiral turns 
 round the inside of the vessel. 
 
 Lizards may be suspended by the head. 
 
 Of those which are very long, the tail may be bent 
 upon the body, or rolled in spiral turns on the inside 
 of the vessel. 
 
 Echini with the spines should be wrapped in cot- 
 ton, and either put into a wide-mouthed bottle, or 
 into a round box with holes in it, so as not to touch 
 nor press upon the sides ; the bottle being then filled 
 with, or the box immersed in, spirit. 
 
 For the suspension in a barrel, animals may be 
 fixed to cords stretched across its mouth ; the top 
 should then be put in, and the spirit afterwards ad- 
 ded. 
 
 Animals, or parts, which are put into spirit, should 
 have it changed, at the expiration of a fortnight ; as 
 the first spirit will be considerable lowered in strength, 
 and discoloured : for although it will have penetrated 
 the substance, and checked putrefaction, it will not 
 remain of sufficient strength to continue the preser- 
 vation of the part : the time, however, will vary 
 according to circumstances. If in a hot climate, the 
 spirit may require to be changed sooner ; if in a 
 cold one, later ; if the part be soft, or gelatinous, it 
 will also call for earlier attention than if hard or firm. 
 
 Another advantage arising from spirit sufficiently 
 strong is, its own preservation ; for when much di- 
 luted, and combined with the animal juices, it will 
 acquire an acid quality, by which the bones will be 
 softened, and rendered unfit for a skeleton. 
 
COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 283 
 
 The glass or jar containing any article in spirit, 
 may first be stopped with cork ; over this should be 
 extended a piece of moistened bladder, or of the 
 recent skin of an animal ; the whole of which, when 
 dry, may be coated with resin or wax ; but neither re- 
 sin nor wax should be used to seal the surface of the 
 cork itself ; for when that is done, the spirit pene- 
 trates and dissolves the cement, and thus forms a 
 varnish which mixes with the spirit, and adheres to 
 the specimen contained in it. 
 
 If the glass vessels with sufficiently large mouths 
 cannot be procured, glazed earthen jars will answer 
 the purpose ; and, to prevent evaporation, they may 
 have externally two or three coats of paint, wax, or 
 pitch, and be packed in tow, cotton, or other soft 
 material, to prevent its being rubbed off. 
 
 Glass, or glazed earthen jars, are preferable to 
 casks ; being less liable to discolour the spirit, and 
 thereby injure the specimens, especially those whose 
 size will admit of being preserved in this manner : 
 but if casks are employed, those made of white 
 wood are preferable. 
 
 Where barrels were not to be procured, well made 
 boxes, with white lead introduced into all the joints, 
 have been found to be an efficient substitute. 
 
 In preparing to tie over bottles for packing, it is 
 necessary that the bladders should be soaked in wa- 
 ter for two or three days, or longer if practicable, as 
 they will then adhere more firmly to the neck. 
 
 In lieu of corks, sheet lead may be placed be- 
 tween the first and second bladders. That procur- 
 
284 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 
 
 ed from tea-chests will de sufficiently strong to pre- 
 vent evaporation for a year or two. 
 
 Where spirit cannot be procured, a atrong solu- 
 tion of bay-salt, changed as is before directed with 
 regard to spirit, will preserve specimens for a con- 
 siderable time. 
 
 All marine productions, intended to be preserved 
 in a dried state, should be soaked in fresh water, 
 which must be changed several times ; and the spec- 
 imens must, afterwards, be thoroughly dried before 
 they are packed, otherwise they will continue 
 moist, and become rotten. 
 
 To prevent insects, or other dried specimens from 
 being injured, or destroyed by living insects, they 
 should occasionally be touched with pure oil of tur- 
 pentine, when it can be employed without injuring 
 the specimens. When ihat cannot be done, the in- 
 side of the box may be occasionally moistened with 
 it, or with oil of petroleum. These are more effec- 
 tual preservatives than camphor. Tallow, inclosed 
 in a piece of muslin within the box, will frequently 
 prevent the attacks of insects. 
 
 Animals which are dried, should be so packed as 
 to allow of being aired occasionally; and, if becoming 
 mouldy, should be washed with spirit, and thorough- 
 ly dried before they are re-packed. 
 
 SECTION CXXVII. 
 Of Extraneous Fossils. 
 
 It is judged proper to add a few OBSERVATIONS on 
 Extraneous Fossils ; to display the agencies of Na- 
 
COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 285 
 
 ture and their effects, in all the modes of animal ex- 
 istence ; and, also, as manifested by very interesting 
 parts of Mr. Hunter's collection, through all the 
 changes of which animal bodies are susceptible. 
 
 By extraneous fossils are to be understood, animal 
 and vegetable substances, which, from long residence 
 in the earth, have acquired fossil characters. 
 
 The fossilized remains of large animals, which, of 
 late years have engaged the attention of Naturalists, 
 have been discovered, chiefly, in parts contiguous to 
 the sea, rivers, or lakes ; although sometimes in ele- 
 vated situations, remote from water. 
 
 The changes which occur under ground, are ge- 
 nerally destructive of all the distinguishing parts of 
 an animal, except bone ; whenever, therefore, any 
 soft part, so termed, with its distinctive characters 
 preserved, is found, it is to be treated with the utmost 
 care. 
 
 It should be exposed as little as possible to the 
 air ; and in packing should be guarded from attrition, 
 first by the softest paper, then by more resisting ma- 
 terials, as cotton, tow, horse-hair, sponge, &c. 
 
 The parts more especially to be preserved for an- 
 atomical inquiry, on any occasion, may be understood 
 from the foregoing directions, respecting the organs 
 of various creatures : but it is so difficult to obtain 
 the whole, even of the bones, of a fossilized animal, 
 that every part, in whatever state, may be consider- 
 ed as worthy of preservation. 
 
 With a view to the knowledge of the structure 
 and economy of ai> animal of a tribe extinct, of 
 doubtful existence, or of rare occurrence, it is desir- 
 
286 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 
 
 able that every particular relating to the situation 
 in which it is found, should accompany its bones, 
 skin, or other fragments. 
 
 Upon the discovery, therefore, of an extraneous 
 fossil, every circumstance which can tend to explain 
 the race of the creature to which it belonged; its 
 primary situation ; mode of subsistence, and of pro- 
 pagation ; its instruments of locomotion, defence, 
 &c. ought to be noted. 
 
 Also portions of the stratum from the spot in 
 which the fossil lay, and from parts several yards 
 surrounding it, should be collected for analyses. 
 
 The following proposed heads of columns would 
 probably be favourable to inquiry on the subject, and 
 to perspecuity in the arrangement of facts. 
 
 Place where found distance from sea, river, or 
 lake degree of elevation latitude, and climate 
 distance from forest, or plain indigenous trees, and 
 plants native animals depth from surface strata, 
 to the part where found stratum in* which discover- 
 ed position or situation in which imbedded relics 
 of extraneous fossils observed with it other dis- 
 coveries of extraneous fossils in the same place or 
 its vicinity miscellaneous remarks. 
 
 The name of the place, the depth, and the kind of 
 matrix in which an extraneous fossil is found, are 
 the principal points necessary to be determined : but 
 it is hoped that the College will not be deprived of 
 any extraneous fossil, because, at the time of its 
 discovery, other particulars were not ascertained, or 
 not recorded. 
 
COMPARATIVE ANATOMY. 287 
 
 SECTION CXXVIII. 
 
 Natural Skeletons of Fish, Quadrupeds, Birds, fyc. 
 
 Proceed in the same manner as directed for mak- 
 ing a natural human skeleton. 
 
 Mice, small birds, &c. may be put into a box of 
 proper size, in which holes are bored on all sides, 
 and then buried in an ant hill, where all except the 
 bones and connecting ligaments, will in a week or 
 two, be entirely removed by the ants. Maceration 
 in clean water will afterwards be necessary, to ex- 
 tract the bloody colour, when they may be bleached 
 by lime or alum water, and dried in frames. In 
 country places, they may be more speedily dissect- 
 ed by being placed near a wasp's nest, or in an emp- 
 ty sugar cask, where they resort. Small fish may be 
 put in a vessel of clean water in which a large num- 
 ber of tadpoles are placed, which will soon consume 
 every particle of soft matter. The water should be 
 changed often. I have not tried the same experi- 
 ment with small birds and quadrupeds, but have no 
 doubt that it would prove successful. 
 
288 
 
 CHAPTER XII. 
 
 EXPLANATIONS OF PLATES. 
 
 PLATE I. / 
 
 Respecting the Brass Syringe, with its several 
 Appendages, jor injecting with Coloured Fluids. 
 
 Fig. 1. The syringe complete, consisting of sev- 
 eral parts, supposed to be properly joined and fitted 
 for use, viz. 
 
 A. The barrel. 
 
 B. The piston. 
 
 C. The head of the syringe, which screws on to 
 the top of the barrel. 
 
 D. The bottom of the syringe, which screws on to 
 the bottom of the barrel, in like manner with the 
 head. 
 
 E. The point of the syringe, which screws into the 
 bottom ; this is a tube, to which the bore of all the 
 pipes are adapted, and in the act of Injecting, it is 
 introduced into the pipe. 
 
 Fig. 2. The piston of the syringe, taken out of the 
 barrel, to shew its several parts, viz. 
 
 F. The handle. 
 
EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 289 
 
 G. The rod. 
 
 H. The bottom, consisting of three blocks, united 
 to the rod by a screw. 
 
 I. The uppermost block with a plain edge. 
 
 K. The middle block has a grooved edge, is of a 
 larger diameter than the other two, and is adapted to 
 the bore of the barrel of the syringe ; its groove is for 
 the purpose of retaining oil, as a reservoir to pre- 
 serve the free motion of the piston. 
 
 L. The lowest block, similar to the uppermost, and 
 of the same diameter, having in its lower surface two 
 small holes, to receive the steel pins in the key, for 
 the purpose of screwing it on or off the rod. The 
 uppermost and lowest blocks are less in diameter, to 
 allow room for the two valves. 
 
 Fig. 3. Represents the bottom of the piston with 
 the valves, which are made of circular pieces of soft 
 wash-leather, dipped in olive oil, with a hole in the 
 centre, through which passes the end of the rod. The 
 manner of fixing which is as follows : First, screw 
 on the uppermost block on the rod, as far as it will 
 go ; then put on one of the leather valves, consisting 
 of one or more pieces of leather, as the bore of the 
 syringe may 'require ; then screw on the middle block, 
 after which introduce the piston at the top of the open 
 barrel of the syringe, with the edges of the valves 
 turned towards the handle ; then force the piston to 
 the bottom, which, being also open, gives an oppor- 
 tunity to put on the lower valve, which is to be con- 
 fined in its situation by firmly screwing on the lower- 
 37 
 
290 EXPLANATION OP PLATES. 
 
 most block by means of the key ; the edges of this 
 valve should not be left longer than necessary, as it 
 will prevent the lower block of the piston from going 
 completely down upon the bottom of the syringe, 
 which would be a means of retaining some of the 
 Injection, and thereby mixing the different colours. 
 Being thus fi xed, draw the piston upward, by which 
 the edges of the lower valve will be turned down- 
 ward ; then screw on the bottom and top of the 
 syringe very closely by means of the key ; and after 
 moving the piston a few times up and down in the 
 barrel, try the accuracy of the valves in the following 
 way : first, hold the bottom of the syringe with the 
 left hand, and stop the point with the fore finger, to 
 prevent the admission of air ; then with the right hand 
 draw the piston up to the top, and suddenly let go the 
 handle, when the external air should press the piston 
 completely to the bottom ; this is a sufficient proof that 
 the upper valve is air-tight ; then fill the syringe with 
 air by drawing the piston to the top, while the point is 
 open for its admission ; place the finger on the point 
 to prevent its escape, and forcibly depress the piston ; 
 then suddenly taking off the hand, the elasticity of the 
 compresed air should raise it to the top, making some 
 little allowance for the resistance which may arise 
 from the friction of the piston in the barrel : this is 
 a proof that the lower valve is sufficiently air-tight, 
 and the instrument fit for use. 
 
 Fig. 4. The brass key, which is made of consider- 
 able thickness to give it strength ; it has a square 
 
EXPLANATION OF PLATES- 
 
 291 
 
 notch in each end, the larger of which is adapted to 
 to receive the square block on the top, and bottom 
 of the syringe (MM). The smaller notch is intend- 
 ed to receive the smaller block in the bottom of 
 the syringe (N). This key answers the purpose of 
 a winch, by which we may easily apply what force is 
 necessary to turn the screws. At the extremities 
 of the smaller end of the key, are two steel pins ; 
 these are adapted to two holes in the bottom of the 
 lower block of the piston, into which they are placed* 
 for the more readily screwing it on or off in altering 
 and repairing the valves. 
 
 Fig. 5. A cock, for the purpose of retaining in the 
 blood-vessels, the Injection they have received, whilst 
 the syringe is removed, in case of injecting a large 
 subject, where several syringes full will be required ; 
 the smaller and lower extremity (O) is inserted into 
 the top of the injecting pipe when fixed in the 
 vessel, represented in fig. 11, and for the purpose of 
 throwing in the Injection, the point of the syringe is 
 to be introduced into the upper end of the tube of the 
 cock (P), and when the syringe is discharged of its 
 contents, turn the handle (Q) in a transverse direc- 
 tion to the tube, which will prevent the escape of the 
 injected fluid, until the syringe is filled and introduc- 
 ed at the top as before ; then turn the handle again, 
 and repeat the Injection as often as may be requisite. 
 The plug is fastened in its situation by means of a 
 screw (R), for the purpose of taking it apart at any 
 time, if found necessary, to clean or oil it. 
 
292 EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 
 
 Fig. tf. An injecting pipe of the largest size, in 
 proportion to the size of the syringe. 
 
 S. The finger piece. 
 
 T. The barrel. 
 
 V. The point. 
 
 These pipes should always be made of one solid 
 piece of brass, and the finger piece not soldered on 
 to the barrel, as they will be liable to separate when 
 the heat of the fire is applied to melt out the Injec- 
 tion, which, though it may be done in a hurry, yet 
 should not be made a constant practice of; boiling 
 them in water is a much more agreeable, and less 
 destructive method of cleaning them. Near the ex- 
 tremity of the point is a small shoulder, to prevent 
 its slipping out of the vessel when the ligature is ap- 
 plied. 
 
 Fig. 7. The smallest sized injecting pipe, with the 
 barrel above the finger piece : this is the mode in 
 which the small pipes are frequently made, but I do 
 not know any peculiar advantage in it. 
 
 Fig. 8. A large sized curved pipe, commonly call- 
 ed Aorta-pipe, being principally used for injecting 
 the entire subject, where it is introduced into the 
 Aorta ascendens through an incision in the left ven- 
 tricle of the heart. The advantage of its curvature is, 
 that the extremity of the pipe pointing horizontally or 
 laterally, it admits of a favourable position to intro- 
 duce the point of the syringe. 
 
 Fig. 9. A double injecting curved pipe. The ad- 
 
EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 293 
 
 vantage of having two points, is in order to inject two 
 vessels running near each other, at the same time, 
 with the same coloured Injection, but they are seldom 
 used except for injecting the head by the two carotid 
 arteries, and the two jugulars ; but, for the arteries, 
 the points should be made smaller than is represented 
 in the plate. 
 
 Fig* 10. A long curved pipe, for the purpose of 
 injecting vessels, the orifices of which are out of the 
 reach of the common pipes, as is the case with the 
 coronary arteries and veins of the heart, where we 
 have to convey the point of the pipe, a considera- 
 ble distance through a larger vessel, to the vessel 
 we wish to inject ; and, as it is more particularly in- 
 tended for this preparation, may be called the coro- 
 nary pipe. 
 
 Fig. 11. Represents a pipe fixed in the vein of an 
 umbilical chord, to shew the manner in which the 
 ligature is applied to prevent the escape of the Injec- 
 tion, and secure the pipe in its situation ; if the liga- 
 ture is not brought over the finger-piece of the pipe 
 before the second fastening is made, as here repre- 
 sented, it will generally slip out of the vessel. 
 
 12. A brass blow pipe, sometimes used to in- 
 flate the vessels in order to find their orifices, which 
 is frequently attended with difficulty from their lying 
 perfectly collapsed among cellular membrane ; it 
 will often be found useful to inflate the vessels of de- 
 tached parts of Anatomy, to discover and secure any 
 
294 EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 
 
 outlets where the Injection might otherwise escape ; 
 but these outlets will be more easily discovered if in- 
 flated under water, than any other way : the end of 
 the pipe which is applied to the mouth should be sil- 
 vered, to prevent any unpleasant brassy taste. 
 
 EXPLANATION OF PLATE II. 
 
 Representing the Injecting Tube, and its Jlppendages, 
 for the Purpose of Jilting the Lymphatics, Lacteals, 
 fyc. with Quicksilver. 
 
 Fig. 1. A. The glass tube fixed in its steel cock ; 
 the tube here represented is seven inches in length ; 
 but for different purposes, they are made from five to 
 twenty inches ; some vessels requiring a much high- 
 er column of quicksilver than others. 
 
 B. The cock, for the advantage of retaining or dis- 
 charging the quicksilver at pleasure, by turning the 
 handle of the plug C. in a transverse or longitudinal 
 direction. 
 
 C. A screw at the bottom of the cock, adapted to 
 the socket of the pipes ; the screw is to fix the pipes 
 with greater security to the cock, than the common 
 method, which is only upon the principle of a plug. 
 
 D. A leather collar at the top of the screw, which 
 is pressed by the socket of the pipe, to prevent more 
 effectually an escape of the quicksilver between the 
 threads of the screw. 
 
 F. The plug of the cock taken out; this, by its 
 tapering, always fits close, and works smoothly in the 
 
EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 295 
 
 cock. In the middle of the plug is a perforation, in 
 the direction of its handle, through which the quick- 
 silver passes, when it is turned in the direction of the 
 tube. 
 
 G. A leather collar, which is placed round the 
 small end of the plug, after it is introduced into the 
 cock. 
 
 H. A steel collar, which receives the square end 
 of the plug, after the leather one. 
 
 L The plug screw, which is screwed into the small 
 end of the plug : this confines the plug in the cock, 
 by preventing the collars from slipping off; and the 
 head of the screw pressing on the steel collar, that 
 presses the leather one between it and the side of the 
 cock, the leather, by its softness and elasticity, causes 
 the plug to move smoothly. 
 
 Fig. 2. The curved pipe, which screws on to the 
 end of the cock D, in order for use, which screw is 
 adapted to the socket of the pipe K. 
 
 L. L. The cross pins, for the purpose of passing 
 the ligature round, to prevent the pipe from slipping 
 out of the vessel, when introduced. 
 
 The advantage of its curvature is, to fill, with the 
 greater facility, vessels lying horizontally, as on the 
 surface of a table, whilst the tube is kept in a perpen- 
 dicular direction. 
 
 Fig. 3. A pipe which only differs from the above 
 in its being straight ; this is intended for filling ves- 
 sels in a perpendicular direction, particularly when 
 the tube is to be suspended in the injecting Tray, 
 
296 EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 
 
 with the preparation under water, for a considerable 
 length of time, (see Plate III.) 
 
 Fig. 4. A slender piece of steel, called the clearer, 
 or poker ; it has its upper part flat, to answer the 
 purpose of a handle ; its use is to clear the pipes of 
 any thing which may obstruct the passage of the 
 quicksilver ; this is done by passing the point through 
 the socket of the pipe^to its extremity, or as far as it 
 will go, and moving it backward and forward several 
 times. From its elasticity, it will answer equally well 
 for the curved, as for the straight pipe, 
 
 Fig. 5. Represents a curved pipe fixed in a blood 
 vessel, and secured by a ligature, for the purpose of 
 filling it with quicksilver. 
 
 M. The first knot made with the ligature, passed 
 round the vessel, below the orifice, by means of a 
 needle, for the purpose of compressing it equally on 
 all sides of the pipe, to prevent the escape of the 
 quicksilver. 
 
 N. The second knot made with the ligature, after 
 it has been turned over the cross-pins, to prevent the 
 pipe slipping out of the vessel. 
 
 O. The orifice of a vessel, divided in removing 
 the part from the body, with the quicksilver escaping 
 in globules ; under which is a small ligature passed, 
 by means of a needle, in order to close the out-let by 
 a knot ; this shews the manner of securing the quick- 
 silver in the vessels during the process of injecting, 
 or before the Injection commences. 
 
 Every part of the cock, pipes, and clearer, must 
 
EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 
 
 be made of steel, as any other metal would be amal- 
 gamated by the solvent property of the quicksilver. 
 Care should be taken always to wipe over the metal- 
 lic parts with an oily cloth, after each time of using 
 this instrument, or they will otherwise soon be de- 
 stroyed by rust. 
 
 Fig. 6. Is the quicksilver tube, used by Mascagm, 
 and consists of a glass tube three or four lines in di- 
 ameter and a foot in length, and is bent to a right an- 
 gle near one end arid drawn out to a fine" capillary 
 tube, by means of a lamp and blow pipe. Every 
 anatomist may soon acquire the art of doing this with 
 facility. 
 
 Fig. 7. Is Dumeril's tube ; this is straight like the 
 perpendicular part of Mascagni's tube ; its lower end 
 is slightly everted in the form of a lip ; on which is 
 tied a gum elastic tube, two inches long, and the 
 outer end of this flexible tube is tied in like manner 
 over a short capillary tube, corresponding with the 
 horizontal piece of Mascagni's tube. 
 
 Fig. 8. Is the horizontal tube. 
 
 The advantages of Dumeril's improvement are, that 
 the flexible tube can be pressed between the fingers 
 of one hand and the column of mercury, thus regu- 
 lating it, whilst the other hand is employed in direct- 
 ing the pipe, and that the small tubes can be obtain- 
 ed in a large number from the glass blowers, with 
 one large tube to answer for all, a consideration of 
 38 
 
298 EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 
 
 some importance on account of the capillary part be- 
 ing so easily and so often broken. 
 
 The glass tubes are preferred to Walter's steel 
 tubes, by those who have made trial of both kinds. 
 
 EXPLANATION OF PLATE III. 
 
 Representing the Injecting Tray and its Appendages, 
 for the purpose of facilitating the Process of Quick- 
 silver Injections, and preventing the Loss of Quick- 
 silver, which is constantly sustained in the Old Me- 
 thod. 
 
 A. The Tray ; this should be made of boards, 
 about three quarters of an inch in thickness, and of 
 such wood as will be the least likely to warp ; which 
 will be more effectually prevented by the several parts 
 being joined together with screws ; and by painting 
 it three or four times over, it will prevent the wood 
 absorbing the water, and more effectually secure it 
 from warping : every joint should be made perfect- 
 ly water-tight, and the inside painted black ; as this 
 is much more favourable for seeing the fine parts of 
 white membranes laying upon it, and the quicksilver 
 flowing through the minute ramifications of their ves- 
 sels. The machine being made in this form, is intend, 
 ed to be occasionally filled with water, for the pur- 
 pose of injecting broad and flat parts, which require 
 to be so managed as to prevent their drying, and to 
 which the common jar represented in the plate, is 
 not adapted, as placenta, large portions of mesentery 
 and intestine, female breasts, &c. 
 
EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 299 
 
 B. An iron pipe, for the purpose of drawing off the 
 water and quicksilver, remaining in the tray after the 
 Injection is finished ; it is made of iron, that it may 
 not be affected by the quicksilver. It needs no other 
 stopper than a common cork. 
 
 C C. The right and left sides of the tray, cut down 
 to form a rest for the arms, whilst the hands are em- 
 ployed upon a preparation at the bottom of it. The 
 front D. is also made considerably lower than the 
 sides, for the more convenient management of the 
 preparation. The bottom of this tray should be 
 about twenty inches square ; the front about three 
 inches high, and the sides four and a half : the clear 
 dimensions on the inside are here meant. 
 
 E, A ledge in one corner, for the convenience of 
 fixing the bottle containing the quicksilver : it has a 
 hole sufficiently large to receive the bottle, which is 
 let through, and stands on the bottom of the tray, to 
 preserve it from any accident, which it is very lia- 
 ble to from its weight. 
 
 F F. Two uprights ; the foot of each fixes in two 
 square staples, within the right and left sides of the 
 tray, and ought to be about twenty-four inches high. 
 
 G. The cross-bar ; the ends of which slide up or 
 down in the mortise of the uprights, and are fixed 
 to any height, by means of pins passing through them, 
 and the ends of the cross-bar, to keep them steadily 
 fixed to each other. In the lower edge of this is fix- 
 ed several small hooks, from which may be suspend- 
 ed one or more injecting tubes, as represented in the 
 plate. 
 
 H. Is a glass jar containing water, in which is im- 
 
300 EXPLANATION OF PLATES. 
 
 mersed a hand ; with the quicksilver injecting pipe 
 fixed in the artery, as in the process of filling the 
 vessels. The hand is suspended by a string from 
 the edge of the jar. 
 
 EXPLANATION OF PLATE IV. 
 
 rf Representation of several Moulds in Plaster of Pa- 
 ris, to illustrate the Method of constructing them 
 on hard and inflexible Substances. 
 
 Fig. 1 . Represents the mould of a human calcu- 
 lus, made in three equal parts, and is of the most 
 simple construction that a mould can be made, to be 
 certain of delivering the cast without difficulty, or 
 hazard of breaking, where the pattern or original is 
 to be completely enclosed , in order to copy every 
 part of its surface. The several parts which com- 
 pose the mould, shew also the proportionate thick- 
 ness it will require, to give it proper strength. 
 
 A A A. The internal concave surfaces, which were 
 in immediate contact with the calculus, in the for- 
 mation of the mould, and receive an exact impres- 
 sion^from its surface, whilst the plaster is in its fluid 
 state. 
 
 B B B. Are three holes bored in one edge of the 
 first formed piece, with the point of a knife, after the 
 edge had been cut smooth ; these holes are filled 
 with the fluid plaster in forming the second piece, 
 which, when hardened, become the projecting joints, 
 marked C C C. These points are intended, by en- 
 
EXPLANATION OF PLATES. SOI 
 
 taring the corresponding holes, to keep the edges of 
 the mould steadily fixed to each other. In like man- 
 ner the holes D D D D receive the points E E E E, 
 as also those marked F F F receive the points G G G, 
 for the same purpose. When the three parts are 
 properly joined, they form a complete oval cavity. 
 At the upper end of each portion of the mould, is a 
 notch III, which when the parts are joined, form a 
 circular aperture, expanded toward the outer sur- 
 face ; through this the fluid plaster is to be poured 
 in, in order to make the cast; but before this is at- 
 tempted, the several parts of the mould should be 
 securely bound together with a cord ; without which 
 they would be liable to separate, and suffer the plas- 
 ter to escape. 
 
 Fig. 2. A representation or longitudinal section of 
 a mould of a diseased femur, to shew the manner in 
 which the different parts are joined. 
 
 A A. The diseased femur of an irregular figure. 
 
 B B B B B B. Are the several outside pieces, 
 which enclose the bone. 
 
 C C. Are two inside pieces to fill up those hollow 
 parts which would otherwise prevent the mould from 
 coming off from the bone without breaking ; they 
 are connected to the outside pieces by the loop and 
 string, the principle of which is better explained in 
 Fig. 3. 
 
 D D D D D D D. The several transverse joints 
 of the mould, so formed as to admit every piece to 
 separate easily from the bone and model, afterwards 
 to be cast in it, Those joints are to be made upon 
 
ERRATA. 
 
 Page 28, line 9, for only, read or ly. 
 
 " 31, " 18, for conjunctira resid conjunctiva. 
 
 " 23, for dura mater jugulars read dura mater and jugulars. 
 34, " 20, for subclavian axillary, read subclavian or axillary. 
 36, " 11, for inspecting, read injecting. 
 44, " 14, for formula, read, formulae. 
 46, " 7, for and a vein, read, and veins. 
 49, " 6, for revales, read renales. 
 53, " 15, for withpresect to, read with respect to. 
 65, " 8, for f/iey toiM, read it will. 
 " 81, " 3, for the vessels more superficial, read vessels are more. 
 
 " 6, for tyger's has and order of, read has an order of. 
 " 106, " 22, for ovaries, read ovaria. 
 " 127, < 19, for and, read are. 
 
 " 21, for in the adep fossa, read in the deep fossa. 
 137, last line but one, for carefully cutting, read care/M% shutting. 
 141, line 14, forlarbce, read larva. 
 " 145, lines 18 & 19, for scapute $> fibula, read 
 

 
 

" 
 

 


APPENDIX. 
 
 No. 1. ; Injecting a foetus to shew the course of its 
 circulation in utero? 
 
 THIS is a preparation which requires no great in* 
 genuity, though in making it, the most dexterous 
 Anatomists frequently fail of success, owing chiefly 
 to coagula obstructing the vessels. For this purpose, 
 we can only make choice of such children as are 
 dead born, or died soon after birth ; the former are 
 to be preferred : for in these the lungs having never 
 been called into action, the pulmonary arteries are 
 not so dilated and pervious ; for which reason the 
 Injection will probably pass with greater freedom 
 through the Ductus Arteriosus* and Foramen Ovale.f 
 
 In order to proceed with the Injection, carefully 
 dissect the vein from the arteries in the umbilical 
 cord, which should be preserved three or four 
 inches in length from the abdomen, and not suffered 
 
 * Ductus Arteriosus is a canal passing from the pulmonary artery to the aor- 
 ta, and becomes obliterated soon after birth. 
 
 t Foramen Ovale is an opening from the right auricle to the left, which becomes 
 closed after the birth of the child. 
 
 39 - 
 
306 APPENDIX. 
 
 to get dry ; when separated, fix a middle sized pipe 
 in it, taking care not to include the arteries in the 
 ligature ; then inject warm water repeatedly, until it 
 returns freely by the arteries in the cord ; in doing 
 this, no great force should be used at first, until the 
 vessels become a little cleared of the coagula, or 
 there will be a danger of rupturing them ; after- 
 wards inject air, to expel the water more perfectly ; 
 then throw in the coarse, coloured Injection, with 
 tolerable freedom, till it flows out of the arteries ; on 
 seeing which, stop the arteries by a ligature pre- 
 viously placed loose on them for this purpose ; and 
 when the vessels are sufficiently filled, remove the 
 syringe. After the body is cold, proceed to the dis- 
 section, by first removing the head close to the basis 
 of the skull, the arms with the scapula and pectoral 
 muscles, the lower extremities at the articulation 
 with the acetabulum, the whole of the integuments, 
 muscles of the back, parietes of the abdomen, ante- 
 rior part of the thorax, and all thoracic and abdomi- 
 nal viscera, excepting the heart. In removing the 
 liver, care must be taken to avoid injuring the Duc- 
 tus Venosus.* Preserve the injected vessels in the 
 trunk, the body, and neck ; also the whole chain of 
 vertebrae from the skull downward ; the posterior 
 portions of the ribs, and the entire pelvis ; then care- 
 fully clean away all the cellular membrane, and what 
 obscures the course of the vessels : place the prepa- 
 
 * The Ductus Venosus, is a canal of communication between the vena portae 
 and hepatic veins, near their termination in the inferior cava. 
 
 
APPENDIX. 307 
 
 ration in a proper position for viewing to the best ad- 
 vantage, particularly the Ductus Arteriosus, and 
 Ductus Venosus ; when thus placed, lay it in a situa- 
 tion most favourable for drying ; after which it should 
 be varnished, and secured by a glass or case from 
 accidental injuries, to which it is very liable. 
 
 No. 2.' Injecting and preparing a placenta? 
 
 The injecting a single Placenta is the most simple 
 process of this kind of preparation. 
 
 They generally have only one vein, and two arte- 
 ries in the umbilical cord ; but sometimes more, as 
 two veins and four arteries ; the veins are always so 
 large as to admit with ease a pipe of almost any size ; 
 the arteries are much less, and require pipes nearly 
 of the smallest size ; and some difficulty attends their 
 introduction, by these vessels so contracting, as to 
 greatly lessen their diameter, as well as from the lu- 
 bricity of the gelatinous matter which surrounds them; 
 but this difficulty is in a great measure avoided, by 
 introducing the point of a dissecting scissors, and 
 slitting them down for about half an inch ; then 
 spreading the artery open upon the left fore finger, 
 and keeping it so by pressure with the thumb, by 
 which the pipe may be carried in without difficul- 
 ty ; a ligature should be passed round each pipe 
 with a needle, and secured, as shewn in Plate I. 
 Fig. 21. but considerable care is required in doing 
 this, not to puncture the vessels, as thereby the In- 
 jection would escape; to avoid this, I' have only fix- 
 
308 APPENDIX. 
 
 ed a pipe into each artery, frequently separated to a 
 considerable distance by the interposition of the vein, 
 which in this case I have not regarded puncturing ; I 
 thus have first injected the arteries, and then by put- 
 ting a pipe into the vein, and making the ligature be- 
 low where the needle had probably wounded it, have 
 injected it afterwards. It will generally be found un- 
 necessary to inject by both, or all the arteries, as the 
 anastomosing branches form such a communication, 
 as to admit the Injection thrown into one artery to 
 readily fill the other ; yet it is always proper to have 
 two pipes fixed, in case they should not thus commu- 
 nicate, or any other accident should happen to one, 
 that recourse may be had to the other ; whilst inject- 
 ing by one artery, the pipe in the other should remain 
 open until the Injection flows through it, and then im- 
 mediately stopped by an assistant, yet so as not to 
 interrupt the operation. The veins are most com- 
 monly in this, as well as in other preparations, inject- 
 ed with yellow, and the arteries with red. The ves- 
 sels should always be previously washed, by injecting 
 them several times with warm water ; and a placenta 
 for this purpose should always be entire, both with 
 respect to the membranes and the fleshy part. The 
 knots or coils frequently found in the funis, will not 
 obstruct the injection. 
 
 The injecting double and other placenta is done in 
 the same manner, in respect to the process ; but a 
 greater number of colours are required for distin- 
 guishing the ramifications of the several vessels from 
 each other. 
 
 The parenchyma, or fleshy parts, are then to be 
 
APPENDIX. 309 
 
 carefully dissected from the vessels by the scissors 
 and forceps. The gelatinous matter that surrounds 
 the vessels in the umbilical cord will always dry 
 transparent, and need never be removed : the rough 
 external membrane, or tunica decidua, should be 
 carefully peeled off from the other membranes, to 
 render them more beautiful when dried. The pre- 
 paration should then be macerated in water for about 
 twenty-four hours, to cleanse it from all the blood ; 
 after which the membranes are to be carefully filled 
 with wool, previously oiled, to prevent its sticking to 
 the preparation ; in doing which, care should be tak- 
 en to put a sufficient quantity under the umbilical 
 cord, to keep it at a considerable distance from the 
 membranes ; the cord should be coiled round the 
 placenta within the membranes, imitating its position 
 in utero ; and the whole membranes distended so as 
 to resemble the form of the ovum. It often happens 
 that the membranes are rent in various directions, so 
 as to injure the preparation : this circumstance 
 (though it ought always to be guarded against) may 
 be remedied, by spreading out their edges, and lay- 
 ing them over each other, so as to pin them together* 
 After being distended, it should be placed upon a 
 cloth in a current of air, to dry as soon as possible, 
 when the pins are to be carefully removed. The ex- 
 ternal membranes will very soon lose their moisture ; 
 but the funis, containing a much larger quantity, in 
 proportion to its surface, and being deprived of the 
 circulating air by the surrounding wool, not so soon ; 
 in order to hasten it, when the membranes are dried, 
 a part of the wool may be removed to admit the air to 
 
310 APPENDIX. 
 
 the inside, taking great care not to tear them, which 
 is much more easily done now, than in their wet 
 state. To finish the preparation, nothing more is ne- 
 cessary than to give it two coats of varnish on each 
 side, to increase its strength and transparency, and 
 when well managed, it is one of the most beautiful 
 that is made, and should be defended from injuries 
 by being kept in a glass case. 
 
 No. 3. ' Frames or cradles for macerating and 
 drying the skeletons of quadrupeds? 
 
 These may be made of different dimensions, ac- 
 cording to the size of the animal. They should be 
 in the form of a covered wagon. A floor or board, 
 that is longer and wider than the animal should have 
 several mortice holes near the sides. Bows made of 
 flexible wood in the form of the letter U are inverted 
 with their ends inserted in the mortice holas so as to 
 represent the frame work of the. wagon cover over 
 the floor. Holes are bored through these bows, cor- 
 responding on the two sides, so that a wire or rod 
 may be passed through from side to side, at diffe- 
 rent heights from the board. An animal having most 
 of his flesh cut off, may be fixed in this frame, with 
 his feet nailed to the board, and his body supported 
 by the rods passing through it in different places and 
 through the holes in the bows ; and thus secured, 
 and also with the aid of twine, the whole may be im- 
 mersed in water for maceration, and afterwards the 
 bones may be cleaned and dried in the same frame. 
 
IIVDEX. 
 
 A. 
 
 Abdominal viscera, injecting of to display their vascularity, 52. 
 Acid forremoving the earthy part of bones, 51. 
 
 ..' for corroding injected preparations, 73. 
 Aneurisms, distending of for drying, 106. 
 
 Antiseptic menstrua, different kinds of for wet preparations, 113. 
 Animals, Swan's new method of preserving, 231. 
 Ants employed in dissecting small birds and quadrupeds, 287. 
 Aorta, fixing a pipe in for injecting, 21. 
 Appendix, 305. 
 
 Arm, directions for injecting and preparing, 34. 
 with one side of the head and thorax, 36. 
 
 Swan's new method of preparing, 180. 
 
 Arteries favourable for injecting, 18. 
 
 injecting and dissecting of, 19. 
 
 Articulating of the different parts of the skeleton, 149. 
 of the head, 149. 
 
 of the vertebral column, 150. 
 
 of the atlas and dentatus, 151. 
 
 of the sacrum and coxyx, 152. 
 
 of the ribs, 152. 
 
 of the ribs with the sternum, 153. 
 
 -of the pelvis, 153. 
 
 . of the pubis, 1 54. 
 
 of the occiput and atlas, 154. 
 
 of the acromion and clavicle, 155. 
 
 of the sternum and clavicle, 155. 
 
 of the scapula andhumerus, 156. 
 
 of the humerus and ulna, 1 57. 
 
 of the radius and ulna, 158. 
 
 of the bones of the carpus, 158. 
 
 of the carpus and metacarpus, 160. 
 
 of the metacarpus and phalanges, 161. 
 
 of the phalanges with each other, 161. 
 
 of the head with the bones of the fore arm, 162. 
 
 of the femur with the pelvis, 162. 
 
 of the femur with the tibia, 1 62. 
 
 of the fibula with the tibia, 163. 
 
 of the foot, 164. 
 
 of the tibia with the tarsus, 165. 
 
 B. 
 
 Birds and small animals dissected by ants and wasps, 287. 
 
 , directions for preserving, 273. 280. 
 
 Bloodvessels of a whole subject, how to inject cold, and prepare dry, 19. 
 with the warm injection, 24. 
 
312 INDEX. 
 
 Blood vessels of separate portions of the body, 30. 
 
 Swan's method of preparing, 180. 
 
 Bladder, distending and drying of with the contiguous organs, 58. 
 Bones injecting of to show their vascularity, SO. 
 macerating and cleaning of, 136. 
 
 preparing the cancelliof, 138. 
 
 to render flexible and transparent, 145. 
 
 cleaning and prepared when diseased, 146. 
 
 preparations to exhibit the growth of, 147. 
 
 of the head how to clean and separate, 148. 
 
 articulations of, 149. 
 
 Brain, how to extract from the cranium, 33. 
 
 how to preserve in antiseptic liquids, 124. 
 
 how to preserve dry, 125. 
 
 Swan's method of preserving, 217. 
 
 Breast, female, injecting of with quicksilver, 101. 
 Bronchia, how to prepare by maceration, 135. 
 
 C. 
 
 Cancelliof bones, how to prepare, 138. 
 
 Cat, kidney of, how to inject with mercury, 98. 
 
 Casting with plaster of Paris, 247. 
 
 from living subjects with plaster, 250. 
 
 outlines of any figure in plaster, 250. 
 
 of models in putty, 256. 
 
 strengthening of by sticks or wires, 249. 
 moothing the surface of, 258. 
 
 Casts, 
 
 smoo 
 
 in plaster, repairing of, 260. 
 
 Chirotheca, how to prepare, 134. 
 
 Chordae tendinae, &c. of the heart, how to shew in preparation, 109. 
 
 Circulation, fetal preparation of to explain, see Appendix, No. 1, 305. 
 
 Cold injection of the arteries, how to prepare, 2. 
 
 Colouring of plaster models, 259. 
 
 Colour of morbid specimens to preserve natural, 116. 
 
 Colours used in injections, 6. 
 
 Comparative anatomy, directions for preserving specimens of, 263. 
 
 Corpora Cavernosa of the penis, how to prepare, 57. 
 
 Corroded preparations, observations on making and preserving, 72. 
 
 Crustacea and insects, how to preserve, 276. 
 
 D. 
 
 Dissecting an entire subject for the blood vessels, 19. 
 
 of the nerves of the orbit and face, 126. 
 
 of the nerves of the neck and trunk, 129. 
 
 Distending hollow preparations by spirits of wine, turpentine, &c., 103. 
 
 preparations with air, hair, wool, cotton, quicksilver, plaster, and 
 
 tallow, 106. 
 
 Drying blood vessel subjects, manner of, 65. 
 
 Ear, the labyrinth how to cast with lead, 262. 
 
 Swan's method of preserving dry, 220. 
 
 Eggs to preserve with nests, 278. 
 Extremities, injecting and dissecting of, 34. 
 Eustachian tube, how to exhibit, 107. 
 
INDEX. 313 
 
 P. 
 
 Fish, skeletons of how to make, 287. 
 
 Foetus, injecting of to display the circulation of dry. See Appendix, No. 1, 305. 
 
 minute injections of for making several preparations, 47. 
 
 G. 
 Gland parotid, injecting it with quicksilver, 94. 
 
 .. H. 
 
 Hand, vessels of, how to inject with quicksilver, 99. 
 
 new method of filling both arteries and veins with coloured injection, 41, 
 
 Head, the blood vessels of, to inject and prepare, 31. 
 
 one side of, with the arm and side of the thorax, 36. 
 
 injecting of to preserve its natural appearance, 54. , 
 
 the bones of various sections of, 166. 
 
 how to clean and separate the bones of, 148. 
 
 Heart, injecting and preparing of, 42. 
 
 injecting and preparing of in situ, with the adjacent blood vessels and tho- 
 racic duct, 39. 
 
 . injecting and corroding of, 77. 
 
 injecting and corroding of with the pulmonary vessels, 76. 
 
 dry hollow preparation of 'to shew its cavities, valves, tendons, &c. 109. 
 
 dry preparation of by quicksilver distention, 110. 
 
 and lungs, Swan's method of preparing, 227. 
 
 Hernia, dry preparation of the parts concerned in, 21 1. 
 Hydatids, distending and drying of, 106. 
 
 Hymen, dry preparation of by distention, 108. 110. 
 
 Inclosing wet preparations, manner of, 119. 
 Injections, different kinds of, 1. 
 
 - cold coarse, directions for making, 2. 
 
 cold fine, directions for making, 4. 
 
 cold minute, directions for making, 4. 
 
 warm, directions for making, 5. 
 
 warm coarse, directions for making, 7. 
 
 warm fine, directions for making, 9. 
 
 warm minute, directions for making, 10. 
 
 Swan's plaster, directions for making, 12. 
 
 quicksilver, 84. 
 
 Injecting instruments, 14. 
 
 directions for, 15. 
 
 ' valves concerned in, 18. 
 
 and corroding preparations, remarks on, 72. 
 
 an entire subject for the arteries and veins, with cold injection, 19. 
 
 -~. an entire subject with warm injection, 24. 
 
 and preparing the blood vessels of separate portions of the human 
 
 body, 30. 
 Instruments for the lymphatics, 84. 
 
 40 
 
314 INDEX. 
 
 Insects, preserving preparations from being destroyed by them, 63. 
 
 - how to preserve, 276. 
 Intestines, minute injections of, 81. 
 --- distending and drying of, 52. 
 
 J. 
 
 Joints, how to preserve the ligaments of dry and flexible, 141 = 
 
 - Swan's method of preserving dry, 219. 
 
 K. 
 
 Kidneys of different animals, how to prepare, 81. 
 
 - injecting and corroding of, 79. 
 
 L. 
 
 Labyrinth of the ear, 162. 
 Lacteals, inj 
 
 injecting of with quicksilver, 92. 
 
 of some animals more easily injected than of ot 
 
 ers, 93, 
 
 Larynx and trachea, distention and dry preparation of, 107. 
 Ligaments of the joints, how to preserve dry and flexible, 141. 
 Liver, injecting the lymphatics of with quicksilver, 95. 
 
 Swan's method preparing, 214. 
 
 Lungs injecting and corroding of with the heart, 76. 
 
 - preparing the air vessels of by maceration, 135. 
 
 - and heart Swan's method of preparing dry, 227. 
 
 - preparations of in spirits of wine and oil of turpentine, 104. 
 Lymphatics, injecting of with quicksilver, 85. 
 
 - on the surface of the liver, injecting of, 95. 
 
 on the surface of the lungs, injecting of, 97. 
 
 - Swan's method, 216. 
 
 M. 
 
 Macerating and cleaning bones, 136. 
 
 diseased bones, 146. 
 
 Macerated preparations of the blood vessels of the hand and Coot, 136* 
 
 general remarks on, 134. 
 
 Mamma female, injecting of with quicksilver, 101. 
 Models in plaster of Paris, observations on making, 237. 
 
 requisite properties of plaster for making, 236. 
 
 smoothing the surface of, 258. 
 
 repairing the injuries of when broken, 260. 
 
 Morbid anatomy, how to preserve the natural colour of specimens, 11G. 
 
 Moulding and casting busts from living persons, 250. 
 
 Moulds, making of on soft bodies and casting their models, 239. 
 
 making of on hard bodies, 241. 
 
 making of in wax on irregular bodies and casting without seems, 254. 
 
 making of in putty, and casting the models, 250. 
 
 N. 
 
 Natural colour of morbid specimens to preserve, 116. 
 Nerves, dissection of those of the face and orbit, 126. 
 
 dissection of the neck and trunk, 129. 
 
 r- dissection of the cerebral, after destroying the bones with an acid, 132. 
 
 cerebral nerves, imitation of, 133. 
 
INDEX. 315 
 
 Nerves, Swan's method of preserving them dry, 200. 
 Nose, Swan's method of preserving dry, 215. 
 
 O. 
 
 Old preparations, how to repair, 70. 
 Osteogeny, preparations for exhibiting, 147. 
 Ovaria, distention of for drying, 106. 
 
 P. 
 
 Paints and varnishes by Swan, 233. 
 Painting or colouring plaster models, 259. 
 Pancreas, a corroded preparation of, 83. 
 Parotid gland, injection of with quicksilver, 94. 
 Penis, injecting and preparing of, 56. 
 
 bladder and vesiculae seminales, 58. 
 
 corroded preparation of, 82. 
 
 Periosteum, preparation of, dried, 144. 
 
 Placentae, injecting and preparing of, See Appendix, No. 2, 107. 
 
 injecting and corroding of, 81. 
 
 Plaster of Paris, requisite properties for modelling, 236. 
 
 distending hollow preparations with, 111. 
 
 .. on making moulds with, 237. 
 
 Podatheca, how to prepare, 134. 
 
 Preparations by distention with spirits of wine, turpentine, &c. 103. 
 
 with air, hair, wool, cotton, quicksilver, plaster and tallow, 106. 
 
 drying of, general directions for, 65. 
 
 varnishing of, 65. 
 
 preserving of from insects, 63. 
 
 old and injured, repairing of, 70. 
 
 how to inclose in jars, 119. 283. 
 
 a. 
 
 Quadrupeds, small skeletons of, how to make, 287. 
 
 larger, see Appendix, No. 3, 310. 
 
 treatment and preservation of, 270. 
 
 duicksilver preparations, 84. 
 
 R. 
 
 Repairing old and injured dry arterial preparations, 70. 
 
 of casts in plaster of Paris, 260. 
 
 Reptiles and fishes, how to preserve entire, 274. 
 
 S. 
 
 Sections of the bones, to exhibit their cavities, 166. 
 Separating the bones of the head after cleaning, 148. 
 Size for minute injection, how to make, 10. 
 Skeletons, artificial, how to wire, 149. 
 
 of quadrupeds, &,c. how to macerate and dry in frames, See Appendix, 
 
 No. 3, 310. 
 
 natural, how to make, 139. 
 
 of new born child, 142. 
 
 Spleen, maceration and corrosion of, 79. 
 
316 INDEX. 
 
 Syringes for injecting, 14. 
 
 Swan's new method of making dried preparations, 177. 
 
 T. 
 
 Tallow used for filling the heart, 109. 
 
 Testes, injecting and preparing of, 57. 
 
 Thorax, how to open for injecting the aorta ascendens, 20. 
 
 Tray for injecting with quicksilver, 298. 
 
 Tubes, Fallopian, distending of with cotton, 46. 
 
 U. 
 
 Uterus, distending with mercury, and preserving of, 110. 
 injecting and preserving of, 45. 
 
 gravid distention and drying of, 47 
 
 V. 
 
 Vagina, dry preparation of by distention, 108. 110. 
 
 Valves of the arteries and veins, 18. 
 
 of the veins of the hand how to overcome, 41. 
 
 Varnishes, composition of, 68. 
 
 and paints by Swan, 233. 
 
 Varnishing anatomical preparations, 66. 
 
 Veins, valves of, 18. 
 
 ' ' of the hand and foot, how to prevent their obstructing the flow of injec- 
 tion in, 41. 
 
 injecting of, 23. 
 
 of the head, how to inject, 31. 
 
 of the heart how to inject for corrosion, 76. 
 
 of the extremities, how to inject, 35. 
 
 of the liver, spleen, kidney, pancreas, and penis for corrosion, how to in- 
 ject, 81, 82, 83. 
 
 . large about the heart, how to inject, 39. 
 
 of the hand, how to inject with quicksilver, 110. 
 
 of the uterus, 46. 
 
 of the placenta, how to inject. See Appendix, No. 2, 307 . 
 
 .. coronary of the heart, how to inject with quicksilver, 110. 
 
 Injection of, to shew the foetal circulation. See Appendix, No. 1, 305. 
 
 Vena magnae, ipsius penis, how to inject, 56. 
 
 Vena portae, how to inject, 62. 
 
 W. 
 
 Warm injection, formulae for, 5. 
 Washing corroded preparations, 74. 
 Wet preparations, 113. 
 Wiring a skeleton, 149. 
 

 RETURN TO the circulation desk of any 
 University of California Library 
 or to the 
 
 4onR- h I NAL LIBRARY 
 . 400, Richmond Field Station 
 
 University of California 
 Richmond, CA 94804-4698 
 
 renewed 
 
 books 
 
 
 
 DUE AS STAMPED BELOW 
 
i v ,,t?O. *^rr^ rr^ i 
 
 = >m>c>Mg3v^3333< = 
 
 ISITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LI8R 
 
 <TS 
 
 ISITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 u- \V*- X 
 
 1 
 
 5 VK